So Fistik

VERiFiCATiON MANUAL
Design Code Benchmarks
SOFiSTiK | 2018
VERiFiCATiON MANUAL
VERiFiCATiON MANUAL, Version 2018-4

Software Version: SOFiSTiK 2018
Copyright © 2018 by SOFiSTiK AG, Oberschleissheim, Germany.
SOFiSTiK AG
HQ Oberschleissheim Office Nuremberg

Bruckmannring 38 Burgschmietstr. 40
85764 Oberschleissheim 90419 Nuremberg
Germany Germany
T +49 (0)89 315878-0 T +49 (0)911 39901-0

F +49 (0)89 315878-23 F +49(0)911 397904
[email protected]
www.sofistik.com
This manual is protected by copyright laws. No part of it may be translated, copied or reproduced, in any form or by any means,
without written permission from SOFiSTiK AG. SOFiSTiK reserves the right to modify or to release new editions of this manual.
The manual and the program have been thoroughly checked for errors. However, SOFiSTiK does not claim that either one is
completely error free. Errors and omissions are corrected as soon as they are detected.
The user of the program is solely responsible for the applications. We strongly encourage the user to test the correctness of all
calculations at least by random sampling.
Front Cover
Project: New SOFiSTiK Office, Nuremberg | Contractor: WOLFF & MLLER, Stuttgart | Architecture: WABE-PLAN ARCHITEKTUR, Stuttgart |
Structural Engineer: Boll und Partner. Beratende Ingenieure VBI, Stuttgart | MEP: GM Planen + Beraten, Griesheim | Lead Architect: Gerhard P.
Wirth gpwirtharchitekten, Nuremberg | Vizualisation: Armin Dariz, BiMOTiON GmbH
Contents
Contents
Introduction 3
1 About this Manual 3
1.1 Layout and Organization of a Benchmark .............................................. 3
1.2 Finding the Benchmark of interest ....................................................... 3
1.3 Symbols .................................................................................... 5
2 Index by Categories 7
2.1 Design Code Benchmarks................................................................ 7
I SOFiSTiK Software Quality Assurance (SQA) 9

3 SOFiSTiK SQA Policy 11
3.1 Objectives .................................................................................. 11
3.1.1 About SOFiSTiK ........................................................................ 11
3.1.2 Innovation and Reliability .............................................................. 11
3.2 Organisation ............................................................................... 11
3.2.1 Software Release Schedule ........................................................... 11
3.2.2 SQA Modules - Classification ......................................................... 12
3.2.3 Responsibilities ......................................................................... 12
3.2.4 Software Release Procedure .......................................................... 13
3.3 Instruments................................................................................. 14
3.3.1 CRM System ............................................................................ 14
3.3.2 Tracking System (internal) ............................................................ 14
3.3.3 Continuous Integration – Continuous Testing........................................ 14
3.4 Additional Provisions ...................................................................... 15
3.4.1 Training................................................................................... 15
3.4.2 Academia Network ..................................................................... 16
3.5 Disclaimer .................................................................................. 16
II Design Code Benchmarks 17

4 DCE-EN1: Design of Slab for Bending 19
4.1 Problem Description....................................................................... 19
4.2 Reference Solution ........................................................................ 19
4.3 Model and Results ........................................................................ 20
4.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 21
4.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 22
4.6 Literature ................................................................................... 22
5 DCE-EN2: Design of a Rectangular CS for Bending 23

SOFiSTiK 2018 | VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks i

Contents
5.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 25

5.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 27
5.6 Literature ................................................................................... 27
6 DCE-EN3: Design of a T-section for Bending 29

6.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 32
6.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 33
6.6 Literature ................................................................................... 33
7 DCE-EN4: Design of a Rectangular CS for Bending and Axial Force 35

7.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 37
7.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 38
7.6 Literature ................................................................................... 38
8 DCE-EN5: Design of a Rectangular CS for Double Bending and Axial Force 39

8.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 42
8.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 43
8.6 Literature ................................................................................... 43
9 DCE-EN6: Design of a Rectangular CS for Shear Force 45

9.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 47
9.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 48
9.6 Literature ................................................................................... 48
10 DCE-EN7: Design of a T-section for Shear 49

10.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 52
10.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 55
10.6 Literature ................................................................................... 55
11 DCE-EN8: Design of a Rectangular CS for Shear and Axial Force 57

11.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 59
11.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 61
11.6 Literature ................................................................................... 61
12 DCE-EN9: Design of a Rectangular CS for Shear and Torsion 63

ii VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks | SOFiSTiK 2018

Contents

12.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 66
12.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 69
12.6 Literature ................................................................................... 69
13 DCE-EN10: Shear between web and flanges of T-sections 71

13.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 75
13.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 78
13.6 Literature ................................................................................... 78
14 DCE-EN11: Shear at the interface between concrete cast 79

14.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 82
14.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 85
14.6 Literature ................................................................................... 85
15 DCE-EN12: Crack width calculation of reinforced beam acc. DIN EN 1992-1-1 87

15.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 90
15.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 95
15.6 Literature ................................................................................... 95
16 DCE-EN13: Design of a Steel I-section for Bending and Shear 97

16.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 99
16.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 102
16.6 Literature ................................................................................... 103
17 DCE-EN14: Classification of Steel Cross-sections 105

17.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 108
17.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 109
17.6 Literature ................................................................................... 109
18 DCE-EN15: Buckling Resistance of Steel Members 111

18.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 113
18.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 114
18.6 Literature ................................................................................... 114
19 DCE-EN17: Stress Calculation at a Rectangular Prestressed Concrete CS 115

SOFiSTiK 2018 | VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks iii

Contents

19.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 119
19.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 122
19.6 Literature ................................................................................... 122
20 DCE-EN18: Creep and Shrinkage Calculation of a Rectangular Prestressed Con-

crete CS 123
20.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 125
20.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 129
20.6 Literature ................................................................................... 129
21 DCE-EN19: Fatigue of a Rectangular Reinforced Concrete CS 131

21.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 133
21.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 139
21.6 Literature ................................................................................... 139
22 DCE-EN20: Design of a Steel I-section for Bending, Shear and Axial Force 141
22.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 143
22.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 146
22.6 Literature ................................................................................... 147
23 DCE-EN21: Real Creep and Shrinkage Calculation of a T-Beam Prestressed CS 149

23.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 152
23.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 163
23.6 Literature ................................................................................... 163
24 DCE-EN22: Stress Relaxation of Prestressing Steel - EN 1992-1-1 165

24.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 167
24.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 171
24.6 Literature ................................................................................... 171
25 DCE-EN23: Stress Relaxation of Prestressing Steel - DIN EN 1992-1-1 173

25.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 175
25.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 179
25.6 Literature ................................................................................... 179
iv VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks | SOFiSTiK 2018

Contents
26 DCE-EN24: Lateral Torsional Buckling 181

26.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 184
26.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 191
26.6 Literature ................................................................................... 191
27 DCE-EN25: Shear between web and flanges of Hollow CS acc. DIN EN 1992-2 193
27.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 197
27.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 201
27.6 Literature ................................................................................... 202
28 DCE-EN27: Design of Quad Elements - Layer Design and Baumann Method 203
28.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 208
28.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 215
28.6 Literature ................................................................................... 215
29 DCE-EN28: Design of a T-section for bending and shear using Design Elements 217
29.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 220
29.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 222
29.6 Literature ................................................................................... 222
30 DCE-EN29: Design of restrained steel column 223

30.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 226
30.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 230
30.6 Literature ................................................................................... 230
31 DCE-EN30: Steel column with a class 4 cross-section 231

31.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 235
31.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 243
31.6 Literature ................................................................................... 243
32 DCE-EN31: Punching of flat slab acc. DIN EN 1992-1-1 245

32.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 248
32.4.1 Material .................................................................................. 248
SOFiSTiK 2018 | VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks v

Contents
32.4.2 Actions and Loads ...................................................................... 248

32.4.3 Punching check for inner Column ..................................................... 248
32.4.4 Punching check for edge column ..................................................... 253
32.4.5 Punching check for wall ................................................................ 256
32.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 261
32.6 Literature ................................................................................... 261
33 DCE-EN32: Crack width calculation of reinforced slab acc. DIN EN 1992-1-1 263
33.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 267
33.4.1 Material .................................................................................. 267
33.4.2 Without direct calculation .............................................................. 267
33.4.3 With direct calculation .................................................................. 268
33.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 271
33.6 Literature ................................................................................... 271
34 DCE-EN33: Designing a Reinforced Concrete Column acc. DIN EN 1992-1-1 273

34.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 276
34.4.1 Exposure class .......................................................................... 276
34.4.2 Actions ................................................................................... 276
34.4.3 Materials ................................................................................. 276
34.4.4 Buckling length .......................................................................... 277
34.4.5 Imperfections ............................................................................ 278
34.4.6 Min. and max. required reinforcement ............................................... 278
34.4.7 Design of longitudinal reinforcement ................................................. 279
34.4.8 Design of shear reinforcement ........................................................ 281
34.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 282
34.6 Literature ................................................................................... 283
35 DCE-EN34: Elastic Critical Plate Buckling Stress 285

35.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 289
35.4.1 Klöppel ................................................................................... 289
35.4.2 EBPlate .................................................................................. 290
35.4.3 EN 1993-1-5, Annex A.2 ............................................................... 291
35.4.4 ABAQUS ................................................................................. 294
35.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 295
35.6 Literature ................................................................................... 295
36 DCE-MC1: Creep and Shrinkage Calculation using the Model Code 2010 297
36.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 299
36.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 303
36.6 Literature ................................................................................... 303
vi VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks | SOFiSTiK 2018

Contents
37 DCE-MC2: Creep and Shrinkage Calculation using the Model Code 1990 305
37.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 307
37.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 310
37.6 Literature ................................................................................... 310
38 DCE-SIA1: Punching of flat slabs 311

38.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 314
38.5 Conclusion ................................................................................. 319
38.6 Literature ................................................................................... 319
SOFiSTiK 2018 | VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks vii

Contents
viii VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks | SOFiSTiK 2018

Contents
Introduction
SOFiSTiK 2018 | VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks 1

About this Manual
1 About this Manual
The primary objective of this manual is to verify the capabilities of SOFiSTiK by means of nontrivial
problems which are bound to reference solutions.
To this end, this manual contains a compilation of a number of selected computational benchmarks, each
benchmark focusing on a specific (mechanical/design) topic. The obtained results from the SOFiSTiK
analysis are contrasted with corresponding reference solutions1 .
The tasks covered by SOFiSTiK, address a broad scope of engineering applications and it is therefore
not possible to validate all specific features with known reference solutions in terms of this Verification
Manual. An attempt has been made though, to include most significant features of the software with
respect to common problems of general static and dynamic analysis of structures.
1.1 Layout and Organization of a Benchmark

For the description of each Benchmark, a standard format is employed, where the following topics are
always treated:
• Problem Description
• Reference Solution
• Model and Results
• Conclusion
• Literature
First, the problem description is given, where the target of the benchmark is stated, followed by the
reference solution, where usually a closed-form analytical solution is presented, when available. The
next section is the description of the model, where its properties, the loading configuration, the analysis
method and assumptions, further information on the finite element model, are presented in detail. Finally,
the results are discussed and evaluated with respect to the reference solution and a final conclusion for
the response of the software to the specific problem is drawn. Last but not least, the textbooks and
references used for the verification examples are listed, which are usually well known and come from
widely acclaimed engineering literature sources.
1.2 Finding the Benchmark of interest

There are several ways of locating a Benchmark that is of interest for the user. For each example a
description table is provided in the beginning of the document, where all corresponding categories, that
are treated by the specific benchmark, are tabulated, as well as the name of the corresponding input
file. Such a description table with some example entries, follows next.
Overview
Element Type(s): C2D

Analysis Type(s): STAT, MNL
1 Where available, analytical solutions serve as reference. Where this is not feasible, numerical or empirical solutions are
referred to. In any case, the origin of the reference solution is explicitly stated.

About this Manual
Procedure(s): LSTP
Topic(s): SOIL
Module(s): TALPA
Input file(s): passive earth pressure.dat
As it can be seen, the available categories are the element type, the analysis type, the procedure, the
topics and the modules. For each category that is provided in the description table, a hyperlink is created,
linking each example to the global categories tables. In this manner, the user has a direct overview of
the attributes involved in each problem, and at the same time is able to browse by category through the
Verification Manual focusing only on the one of his interest. Table 1.1 provides an overview of all the
categories options that are available.
Table 1.1: Categories Overview
Categories Options
Continuum 3D
Continuum 2D (plane strain)
Continuum axisymmetric
Shell
FE beam 3D
Nonlinear FE beam 3D (AQB)
Element Type
Fiber beam 2D
Fiber beam 3D
Truss element
Cable element
Spring element
Damping element
Couplings
Geometrically nonlinear
Physically nonlinear
Analysis Type Dynamic
Static
Potential problem
Buckling analysis
Eigenvalue/ Modal analysis

Procedure
Time stepping
Load stepping
Phi-C reduction
Soil related
Topic
4 VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks | SOFiSTiK 2018

About this Manual
Table 1.1: (continued)
Categories Options
Seismic
Fire design
AQB
AQUA
ASE
Module BDK
BEMESS
CSM
DYNA
SOFiLOAD
SOFiMSHC
STAR2
TALPA
TENDON
1.3 Symbols
For the purpose of this manual the following symbols and abbreviations apply.
SOF. SOFiSTiK
Ref. reference
Tol. tolerance
cs cross-section
sect. section
temp. temperature
homog. homogeneous
Be. benchmark
con. construction
SDOF single degree of freedom
er relative error of the approximate number
|er | absolute relative error of the approximate number
e error of the approximate number
|e| absolute error of the approximate number
ep () same as e()

About this Manual

Index by Categories
2 Index by Categories
Subsequent tables show all Benchmarks included in this Verification Manual, indexed by category.
2.1 Design Code Benchmarks
DESIGN CODE FAMILY Keyword Benchmark Examples
Eurocodes EN DCE-EN6, DCE-EN7, DCE-EN13, DCE-EN14,

DCE-EN15, DCE-EN20, DCE-EN21, DCE-EN22,
DCE-EN24
, DCE-EN27
, DCE-EN30, DCE-EN31, DCE-EN32, DCE-EN33,
DCE-EN34
German Standards DIN DCE-EN1, DCE-EN2, DCE-EN3, DCE-EN4, DCE-
EN5, DCE-EN6, DCE-EN8, DCE-EN9, DCE-EN10,
DCE-EN19, DCE-EN23, DCE-EN25
, DCE-EN28, DCE-EN29, DCE-EN31, DCE-EN32,
DCE-EN33
CEB-FIB Model Code MC DCE-MC1, DCE-MC2
Swiss Standards SIA DCE-SIA1
DESIGN CODE Keyword Benchmark Examples
Eurocode for Design of Concrete EN 1992-1-1 DCE-EN1, DCE-EN2, DCE-EN3, DCE-EN4,

Structures - General rules and DCE-EN5, DCE-EN6, DCE-EN7, DCE-EN8,
rules for buildings DCE-EN9, DCE-EN10, DCE-EN11, DCE-
EN12, DCE-EN17, DCE-EN18, DCE-EN19,
DCE-EN21, DCE-EN22, DCE-EN23, DCE-
EN25
, DCE-EN27
, DCE-EN28, DCE-EN31, DCE-EN32, DCE-
EN33
Eurocode for Design of Concrete EN 1992-2 DCE-EN25
Structures - Concrete bridges
Eurocode for Design of Steel EN 1993-1-1 DCE-EN13, DCE-EN14, DCE-EN15, DCE-

Structures - General rules and EN20, DCE-EN24
rules for buildings , DCE-EN29, DCE-EN30, DCE-EN34
Table continued on next page.

Index by Categories
DESIGN CODE Keyword Benchmark Examples
Eurocode for Design of Concrete DIN EN 1992-1-1 DCE-EN1, DCE-EN2, DCE-EN3, DCE-EN4,
Structures - General rules and DCE-EN5, DCE-EN6, DCE-EN7, DCE-EN8,
rules for building incl. German DCE-EN9, DCE-EN10, DCE-EN11, DCE-
National Annex EN12, DCE-EN17, DCE-EN18, DCE-EN19,
DCE-EN21, DCE-EN22, DCE-EN23, DCE-
EN25
, DCE-EN27
, DCE-EN28, DCE-EN31, DCE-EN32, DCE-
EN33
Eurocode for Design of Concrete DIN EN 1992-2 DCE-EN25
Structures - Concrete bridges
incl. German National Annex
Eurocode for Design of Steel DIN EN 1993-1-1 DCE-EN13, DCE-EN14, DCE-EN15, DCE-
Structures - General rules and EN20, DCE-EN24
rules for buildings incl. German , DCE-EN29, DCE-EN30, DCE-EN34
National Annex
CEB-FIP Model Code for MC 1990 DCE-MC2
Concrete Structures 1990
CEB-FIP Model Code for MC 2010 DCE-MC1
Concrete Structures 2010
Swiss Standard for Concrete SIA 262 DCE-SIA1
Structures
MODULE Keyword Benchmark Examples
Design of Cross Sections and of AQB DCE-EN1, DCE-EN2, DCE-EN3, DCE-EN4, DCE-
Prestressed Concrete and EN5, DCE-EN6, DCE-EN7, DCE-EN8, DCE-EN9,
Composite Cross Sections DCE-EN10, DCE-EN11, DCE-EN12, DCE-EN13,
DCE-EN20, DCE-EN22, DCE-EN23, DCE-EN25
, DCE-EN28, DCE-EN30, DCE-MC1, DCE-MC2
Lateral Torsional Buckling Check BDK DCE-EN15, DCE-EN24

for Steel Cross Sections , DCE-EN29, DCE-EN30
Design of Plates and Shells BEMESS DCE-EN27

, DCE-EN31, DCE-EN32DCE-SIA1
Geometry of Prestressing TENDON DCE-EN17

Tendons
Construction Stage Manager CSM DCE-EN18, DCE-EN21
, DCE-MC1, DCE-MC2

Part I
SOFiSTiK Software Quality

Assurance (SQA)

SOFiSTiK SQA Policy
3 SOFiSTiK SQA Policy
3.1 Objectives
3.1.1 About SOFiSTiK
SOFiSTiK finite element software has been continuously developed since 1981. It is currently used
by more than 10000 customers worldwide. SOFiSTiK is a multipurpose tool with extensive capabilities
which fall into a wide spectrum of engineering analyses such as static and dynamic structural analysis,
modal and buckling eigenvalue problems, nonlinearities and higher order effects, geotechnics and tunnel
analysis, heat transfer and fire analysis, as well as numerous types of other applications.
3.1.2 Innovation and Reliability

As a provider of cutting-edge engineering software, confidence in robustness and reliability of the product
is an issue of outstanding relevance for SOFiSTiK. To some degree, however, innovation and reliability
are conflicting targets, since every change introduces new possible sources of uncertainty and error.
To meet both demands on a sustainable basis, SOFiSTiK has installed a comprehensive quality assur-
ance system. The involved organizational procedures and instruments are documented in the following
Sections.
3.2 Organisation
3.2.1 Software Release Schedule
The SOFiSTiK software release schedule is characterized by a two-year major release cycle. The
first customer shipment (FCS) of a SOFiSTiK major release is preceded by an extensive BETA testing
period. In this phase - after having passed all internal test procedures (Section 3.2.4: Software Release
Procedure) - the new product is adopted for authentic engineering projects both by SOFiSTiK and by
selected customers. For a two-year transition period, subsequent major releases are fully supported in
parallel, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023
FCS Start of Transition Phase Discontinuation of Maintenance

07.09.2015 07.08.2017 30.09.2019
BETA SOFiSTiK 2016
FCS Start of Transition Phase
07.08.2017 Planned: Summer 2019
BETA SOFiSTiK 2018
FCS
Planned: Summer 2019
BETA SOFiSTiK 2020
Figure 3.1: SOFiSTiK Release Schedule
The major release cycle is supplemented by a two-month service pack cycle. Service packs are quality
assured, which means they have passed both the continuous testing procedures and the functional tests
(Section 3.2.2: SQA Modules - Classification). They are available for download via the SOFiSTiK update
tool SONAR.

SOFiSTiK SQA Policy
Software updates for the current version (service packs) include bug-fixes and minor new features only;
major new developments with increased potential regarding side- effects are reserved for major releases
with an obligatory extensive testing period.
3.2.2 SQA Modules - Classification

Figure 3.2 depicts the ”three pillars” of the SOFiSTiK SQA procedure. Preventive and analytic provisions
can be differentiated.
Preventive provisions essentially concern the organization of the development process. They aim at
minimizing human errors by a high degree of automatism and by avoiding error-prone stress situations.
These provisions comprise:
• A thoroughly planned feature map and release schedule.
• Strict phase differentiation: Prior to any software release (also for service packs), the development
phase is followed up by a consolidation phase . This phase is characterized by extensive functional
testing. No new features are implemented, only test feedback is incorporated. For major releases,
an additional BETA test phase is scheduled.
• Fully automated build and publishing mechanisms.
Analytic provisions provide for the actual testing of the software products. Continuous Testing directly
accompanies the development process: Automated and modular regression tests assure feedback at a
very early stage of the development (Section 3.3.3: Continuous Testing). Functional Testing is carried
out in particular during the consolidation phases. These tests essentially involve manual testing; they
focus on comprehensive workflow tests and product oriented semantic tests.
SQA
(Software Quality Assurance)
Development Process
Continuous Testing
Phase differentiation, build- and Functional Testing
Automated, modular and
publishing mechanism
continuous regression testing Focus: workflow tests, product
Organizational Provision oriented semantic tests
Instruments (analytic)
(preventive)
Figure 3.2: SQA Modules
3.2.3 Responsibilities
The consistent implementation of quality assurance procedures is responsibly coordinated by the man-
aging board executive for products.
The development divisions are in authority for:
• The establishment, maintenance and checking of continuous testing procedures.

SOFiSTiK SQA Policy
• The implementation of corresponding feedback.
The product management is responsible for:
• The coordination and execution of functional testing.
• The integration of customer feedback into the QA process.
As a corporate activity is carried out:
• Continuous review of processes.
• The identification of supplemental objectives.
• Identification and implementation of possible optimizations.
Product
Development
Management
Continuous Integration
Functional testing
Continuous Testing
Integrating customer
Implementing feedback
feedback
Corporate Activity
Adaption of processes
Definition of objectives
Coordinated by managing board
Figure 3.3: SQA Responsibilities
3.2.4 Software Release Procedure

The defined minimum requirements for software releases of type Hotfix, Service Pack and Major Release
are illustrated by Figure 3.4. Approval of individual products is accomplished by the respective person
in charge; the overall approval is in authority of the managing board executive for products.

SOFiSTiK SQA Policy
Release
Requirements
Hotfix Service Pack Major Release
Continuous Testing Continuous Testing Continuous Testing

Passed Passed Passed
Functional Testing Functional Testing

Passed Passed
BETA Test Phase

Passed
Figure 3.4: Software Release Requirements
3.3 Instruments
3.3.1 CRM System
Each request from our customers is traced by means of a Customer Relation Management (CRM)
System assuring that no case will be lost. Detailed feedback to the customer is provided via this system.
Possible bug fixes or enhancements of the software are documented with version number and date
in corresponding log files. These log files are published via RSS-feed to our customers. In this way,
announcement of available software updates (service-pack or hotfix) is featured proactively. Moreover,
information is provided independent of and prior to the actual software update procedure.
Further sources of information are the electronic newsletter/ newsfeeds and the internet forum
(www.sofistik.de / www.sofistik.com).
3.3.2 Tracking System (internal)

For SOFiSTiK-internal management and coordination of the software development process - both re-
garding implementation of features and the fixing of detected bugs - a web-based tracking system is
adopted.
3.3.3 Continuous Integration – Continuous Testing

As mentioned above, the production chain is characterized by a high degree of automation. An important
concern is the realization of prompt feedback cycles featuring an immediate response regarding quality
of the current development state.

SOFiSTiK SQA Policy
Automated Automated
Continuous Testing Continuous Integration
procedure procedure
Development/ PM
Assessing feedback
Committing modifications
Figure 3.5: Feedback cycle: Continuous Integration – Continuous Testing
Continuous integration denotes the automated process, assuring that all executed and committed mod-
ifications of the program’s code basis are directly integrated via rebuild into the internal testing environ-
ment.
Upon completion of the integration, the continuous testing procedure is triggered automatically. This
procedure executes a standardized testing scenario using the newly updated software. Test results are
prepared in form of compact test protocols allowing for quick assessment.
The executed tests are so-called regression tests. Regression tests examine by means of associated
reference solutions wether the conducted modifications of the code basis cause undesired performance
in other already tested parts of the program.
Together, continuous integration and continuous testing form the basis for a quality control that directly
accompanies the development process. This way, possibly required corrections can be initiated promptly.
SOFiSTiK has successfully implemented this procedure. Currently, the continuous test database com-
prises more than 3000 tests.
3.4 Additional Provisions

3.4.1 Training
As a special service to our customers, SOFiSTiK provides for comprehensive and individually tailored
training to support a qualified and responsible use of the software. This is complemented by offering a
variety of thematic workshops which are dedicated to specific engineering topics.
It is the credo of SOFiSTiK that a high-quality product can only be created and maintained by highly qual-
ified personnel. Continuing education of the staff members is required by SOFiSTiK and it is supported
by an education program which involves both in- house trainings and provisions of external trainings on
a regular basis.

SOFiSTiK SQA Policy
3.4.2 Academia Network

Arising questions are treated by an intense discussion with customers, authorities and scientists to find
the best interpretation.
3.5 Disclaimer
Despite all efforts to achieve the highest possible degree of reliability, SOFiSTiK cannot assure that the
provided software is bug-free or that it will solve a particular problem in a way which is implied with the
opinion of the user in all details. Engineering skill is required when assessing the software results.

Part II
Design Code Benchmarks

DCE-EN1: Design of Slab for Bending
4 DCE-EN1: Design of Slab for Bending
Overview
Design Code Family(s): DIN

Design Code(s): DIN EN 1992-1-1
Module(s): AQB
Input file(s): slab bending.dat
4.1 Problem Description

The problem consists of a slab section of depth h, as shown in Fig. 4.1. The cross-section is designed
for an ultimate moment mEd and the required reinforcement is determined.
h d mEd
s1 s1
Figure 4.1: Problem Description
4.2 Reference Solution

This example is concerned with the design of sections for ULS, subject to pure flexure, such as beams
or slabs. The content of this problem is covered by the following parts of DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 [1]:
• Design stress-strain curves for concrete and reinforcement (Section 3.1.7, 3.2.7)
• Basic assumptions for section design (Section 6.1)
• Reinforcement (Section 9.3.1.1, 9.2.1.1)

εc
Ac  Fc
d z
As Fs
εs
Figure 4.2: Stress and Strain Distributions in the Design of Cross-sections
In singly reinforced beams and slabs, the conditions in the cross-section at the ultimate limit state, are

assumed to be as shown in Fig. 4.2. The design stress-strain diagram for reinforcing steel considered
in this example, consists of an inclined top branch, as presented in Fig. 4.3 and as defined in DIN EN
1992-1-1:2004 [1] (Section 3.2.7).
A
σ
ƒtk,c = 525N/ mm2
ƒyk
ƒyd = ƒyk / γs
B A Idealised
B Design
εd = 25 0 /00
Figure 4.3: Idealised and Design Stress-Strain Diagram for Reinforcing Steel
4.3 Model and Results

The rectangular slab section, with properties as defined in Table 4.1, is to be designed, with respect to
DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 (German National Annex) [1] [2], to carry an ultimate moment of 25 kNm. The
calculation steps with different design methods [3] [4] [5] are presented below and the results are given
in Table 4.2. Here, it has to be mentioned that these standard methods employed in order to calculate
the reinforcement are approximate, and therefore deviations often occur.
Table 4.1: Model Properties
Material Properties Geometric Properties Loading
C 25/ 30 h = 20.0 cm mEd = 25 kNm/ m
B 500A d = 17.0 cm
b = 1.0 m
Table 4.2: Results
SOF. General Chart [3] ω−Table [3] kd −Table [3]
s1 [cm2 / m] 3.334 3.328 3.334 3.333

4.4 Design Process1

Design with respect to DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 (NA) [1] [2]:2
Material:
Concrete: γc = 1.50 (NDP) 2.4.2.4: (1), Tab. 2.1DE: Partial

Steel: γs = 1.15 factors for materials
ƒck = 25 MP Tab. 3.1: Strength for concrete

ƒcd = cc · ƒck / γc = 0.85 · 25/ 1.5 = 14.17 MP 3.1.6: (1)P, Eq. (3.15): cc = 0.85 con-
sidering long term effects
ƒyk = 500 MP 3.2.2: (3)P: yield strength ƒyk = 500

ƒyd = ƒyk / γs = 500/ 1.15 = 434.78 MP MP
3.2.7: (2), Fig. 3.8
Design Load:
MEd = mEd · b = 25 kNm; NEd = 0

MEds = MEd − NEd · zs1 = 25 kNm
Design with respect to General Design Chart Bending with axial

force for rectangular cross-sections:
MEds 25 · 10−3
μEds = = = 0.061
b · d2 · ƒcd 1.0 · 0.172 · 14.17
Tab. 9.1 [3]: General Chart for up to
ε = 25 · 10−3; ζ = 0.97 → σs1d = 456.52 MP C50/ 60 - Cross-section without com-
pression reinforcement
1 MEds

s1 = · + NEd = 3.328 cm2 / m
σs1d ζ·d
Design with respect to ω− (or μs − ) Design Table for rectangular

cross-sections:
MEds 25 · 10−3
μEds = = = 0.061
b · d2 · ƒcd 1.0 · 0.172 · 14.17
Tab. 9.2 [3]: ω−Table for up to C50/ 60
ω = 0.0632 (interpolated) and σsd = 456.52 MP - Rectangular section without compres-
sion reinforcement
1
s1 = · (ω · b · d · ƒcd + NEd ) = 3.334 cm2 / m
σsd
Design with respect to kd − Design Table for rectangular cross-

sections:
d 17
kd = p =p = 3.40
MEds / b 25/ 1.0 Tab. 9.3 [3]: kd −Table for up to
C50/ 60 - Rectangular section without
ks = 2.381, κs = 0.952 (interpolated values) compression reinforcement
MEds NEd

s1 = ks · + · κs = 3.333 cm2 / m
d σs1d
1 The tools used in the design process are based on steel stress-strain diagrams, as
defined in [1] 3.2.7:(2), Fig. 3.8, which can be seen in Fig. 4.3.
2 The sections mentioned in the margins refer to DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 (German Na-
tional Annex) [1], [2], unless otherwise specified.

4.5 Conclusion
This example shows the calculation of the required reinforcement for a slab section under bending.
Various different reference solutions are employed in order to compare the SOFiSTiK results to. It has
been shown that the results are reproduced with excellent accuracy.
4.6 Literature
[1] DIN EN 1992-1-1/NA: Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures, Part 1-1/NA: General rules and
rules for buildings - German version EN 1992-1-1:2005 (D), Nationaler Anhang Deutschland -
Stand Februar 2010. CEN. 2010.
[2] F. Fingerloos, J. Hegger, and K. Zilch. DIN EN 1992-1-1 Bemessung und Konstruktion von
Stahlbeton- und Spannbetontragwerken - Teil 1-1: Allgemeine Bemessungsregeln und Regeln
für den Hochbau. BVPI, DBV, ISB, VBI. Ernst & Sohn, Beuth, 2012.
[3] K. Holschemacher, T. Müller, and F. Lobisch. Bemessungshilfsmittel für Betonbauteile nach Eu-
rocode 2 Bauingenieure. 3rd. Ernst & Sohn, 2012.
[4] Beispiele zur Bemessung nach Eurocode 2 - Band 1: Hochbau. Ernst & Sohn. Deutschen Beton-
und Bautechnik-Verein E.V. 2011.
[5] R. S. Narayanan and A. W. Beeby. Designers’ Guide to EN 1992-1-1 and EN 1992-1-2 - Eurocode
2: Design of Concrete Structures. Thomas Telford, 2005.

DCE-EN2: Design of a Rectangular CS for Bending
5 DCE-EN2: Design of a Rectangular CS for Bending
Overview

Module(s): AQB
Input file(s): rectangular bending.dat

The problem consists of a rectangular section, as shown in Fig. 5.1. The cross-section is designed for
an ultimate moment MEd and the required reinforcement is determined.
As2
h d d2 MEd
As1

This example is concerned with the design of doubly reinforced sections for ULS, subject to pure flexure,
such as beams. The content of this problem is covered by the following parts of DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004
[1]:
εc σcd
d2 Fs2d
σs2d
As2 εs2
 Fc
d zs2
z
zs1
As1
d1 εs1 σs1d Fs1d
Figure 5.2: Stress and Strain Distributions in the Design of Doubly Reinforced Cross-sections

In doubly reinforced rectangular beams, the conditions in the cross-section at the ultimate limit state, are
1992-1-1:2004 [1] (Section 3.2.7).
A
σ ƒtk,c = 525N/ mm2
ƒyk
ƒyd = ƒyk / γs
B A Idealised
B Design
εd = 25 0 /00

The rectangular cross- section, with properties as defined in Table 5.1, is to be designed, with respect to
DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 (German National Annex) [1], [2], to carry an ultimate moment of 135 kNm. The
calculation steps with different design methods [3] [4] [5] are presented below and the results are given
in Table 5.2. Here, it has to be mentioned that these standard methods employed in order to calculate
the reinforcement are approximate, and therefore deviations often occur.
C 20/ 25 h = 40.0 cm MEd = 135 kNm
B 500A d = 35.0 cm
d2 = 5.0 cm
b = 25 cm
Table 5.2: Results
SOF. General Chart [3] ω−Table [3] kd −Table [3]
As1 [cm2 / m] 10.73 10.73 10.77 10.79
As2 [cm2 / m] 2.47 2.47 2.52 2.43

5.4 Design Process1

Material:

factors for materials
Steel: γs = 1.15


ƒyd = ƒyk / γs = 500/ 1.15 = 434.78 MP MP
3.2.7: (2), Fig. 3.8
Design Load:
NEd = 0
Design with respect to General Design Chart Bending with axial

MEds 135 · 10−3

μEds = = = 0.389
b · d2 · ƒcd 0.25 · 0.352 · 11.33
μEds > μEds,m = 0.296 5.4: (NA.5): Linear elastic analysis
ξ = height of comression zone / d ≤
→ compression reinforcement required 0.45 for C12/ 15 − C50/ 60
from design chart for μEds,m = 0.296 and d2 / d = 0.143 : Tab. 9.1 [3]: General Chart for up to
εs1 = 4.30 · 10−3 ; εs2 = −2.35 · 10−3 ; ζ = z/ d = 0.813 C50/ 60 - Section with compression re-
inforcement
for εs1 = 4.30 · 10−3 → σs1d = 436.8 MP

for εs2 = −2.35 · 10−3 → σs1d = −434.9 MP
MEds,m = μEds,m · b · d2 · ƒcd = 102.7 kNm

ΔMEds = MEds − MEds,m = 135 − 102.7 = 32.3 kNm
1 MEds,m ΔMEds

As1 = · + + NEd = 10.73 cm2
σs1d ζ·d d − d2
1 ΔMEds
As2 = · = 2.47 cm2
|σs2d | d − d2
Design with respect to ω− (or μs − )Table for rectangular cross-

sections:
MEds 135 · 10−3
μEds = = = 0.389
b · d2 · ƒcd 0.25 · 0.352 · 11.33
5.4: (NA.5): Linear elastic analysis
Because the internal force determination is done on the basis of a linear 0.45 for C12/ 15 − C50/ 60

elastic calculation, then ξm = 0.45 is chosen. Referring to the design

Tab. 9.2 [3]: ω−Table for up to C50/ 60 table with compression reinforcement and for d2 / d = 0.15:
- Rectangular section with compression
reinforcement ω1 = 0.4726; ω1 = 0.1104
1
As1 = · (ω1 · b · d · ƒcd + NEd ) = 10.77 cm2
ƒyd
ƒcd
As2 = · (ω2 · b · d) = 2.52 cm2
ƒyd
Design with respect to kd − Design Table for rectangular cross-

sections:
d 35
kd = p =p = 1.51
Tab. 9.3 [3]: kd −Table for up to
MEds / b 135/ 0.25
C50/ 60 - Rectangular section with
compression reinforcement Not able to read values from kd −table for simply reinforced rectangular
cross-sections
5.4: (NA.5): Linear elastic analysis → compression reinforcement is required
0.45 for C12/ 15 − C50/ 60 Because the internal force determination is done on the basis of a lin-
ear elastic calculation, then ξm = 0.45 is chosen. Referring to the
kd −table with compression reinforcement:
ks1 = 2.740; ks2 = 0.575

(interpolated values for kd = 1.51)
ρ1 = 1.021; ρ2 = 1.097
(interpolated values for d2 / d = 0.143 and ks1 = 2.740)
MEds NEd
As1 = ρ1 · ks1 · + = 10.79 cm2
d σs1d
MEds
As2 = ρ2 · ks2 · = 2.43 cm2
d

5.5 Conclusion
This example shows the calculation of the required reinforcement for a rectangular beam cross-section
under bending. Various different reference solutions are employed in order to compare the SOFiSTiK
results to. It has been shown that the results are reproduced with excellent accuracy.
5.6 Literature


DCE-EN3: Design of a T-section for Bending
6 DCE-EN3: Design of a T-section for Bending
Overview

Module(s): AQB
Input file(s): t-beam bending.dat

The problem consists of a T-beam section, as shown in Fig. 6.1. The cross-section is designed for an
ultimate moment MEd and the required reinforcement is determined.
hƒ
MEd
h d
zs
As1 As1
d1
b

This example is concerned with the design of sections for ULS, subject to pure flexure. The content of
this problem is covered by the following parts of DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 [1]:

εc

zs
As1
εs1
Figure 6.2: Stress and Strain Distributions in the Design of T-beams
1992-1-1:2004 [1] (Section 3.2.7).
A
σ ƒtk,c = 525N/ mm2
ƒyk
ƒyd = ƒyk / γs
B A Idealised
B Design
εd = 25 0 /00

The T-beam, with properties as defined in Table 6.1, is to be designed, with respect to DIN EN 1992-
1-1:2004 (German National Annex) [1], [2], to carry an ultimate moment of 425 kNm. The calculation
steps with different design methods [3] [4] [5] are presented below and the results are given in Table
6.2. Here, it has to be mentioned that these standard methods employed in order to calculate the
reinforcement are approximate, and therefore deviations often occur.
C 20/ 25 h = 65.0 cm MEd = 425 kNm
B 500A d = 60.0 cm
d1 = 5.0 cm
b = 30 cm
beƒ ƒ = 258 cm

hƒ = 18 cm
Table 6.2: Results
SOF. ω−Table [3] kd −Table [3]
As1 [cm2 / m] 15.90 15.74 15.85

6.4 Design Process1

Material:
(NDP) 2.4.2.4: (1), Tab. 2.1DE: Partial Concrete: γc = 1.50

factors for materials Steel: γs = 1.15
Tab. 3.1: Strength for concrete ƒck = 20 MP

3.1.6: (1)P, Eq. (3.15): cc = 0.85 con- ƒcd = cc · ƒck / γc = 0.85 · 20/ 1.5 = 11.33 MP
3.2.2: (3)P: yield strength ƒyk = 500 ƒyk = 500 MP

MP ƒyd = ƒyk / γs = 500/ 1.15 = 434.78 MP
3.2.7: (2), Fig. 3.8
Design Load:
NEd = 0
Design with respect to ω− (or μs − )Table for T-beams:
MEds 425 · 10−3

Tab. 9.4 [3]: ω−Table for up to C50/ 60 μEds = = = 0.040
- T-beam beƒ ƒ · d2 · ƒcd 2.58 · 0.602 · 11.33
Referring to the design table for T-beams for:
μEds = 0.040 and
hƒ 0.18 beƒ ƒ 2.58

= = 0.30; = = 8.6
d 0.60 b 0.30
→ ω1 = 0.039
1
As1 = · ω1 · beƒ ƒ · d · ƒcd + NEd = 15.74 cm2

ƒyd
Design with respect to kd − Design Table for T-beams:
Alternatively, the kd −Tables can be applied, demonstrated that the neu-

tral line lies inside the flange.
d 60
Tab. 9.3 [3]: kd −Table for up to kd = p =p = 4.67
C50/ 60 - Rectangular section without MEds / b 425/ 2.58
compression reinforcement
Referring to the table for kd = 4.67 and after interpolation
→ ks = 2.351; ξ = 0.060 ; κs = 0.952
kd −Table is applicable since the neutral  = ξ · d = 0.060 · 60 = 3.6 cm ¡ hƒ = 18 cm

line lies inside the flange
MEds NEd

As1 = ks · + · κs = 15.85 cm2
d σs1d

6.5 Conclusion
This example shows the calculation of the required reinforcement for a T-beam under bending. Two
different reference solutions are employed in order to compare the SOFiSTiK results to. It has been
shown that the results are reproduced with excellent accuracy.
6.6 Literature


DCE-EN4: Design of a Rectangular CS for Bending and Axial Force
7 DCE-EN4: Design of a Rectangular CS for Bending and

Axial Force
Overview

Module(s): AQB
Input file(s): rectangular bending axial.dat

an ultimate moment MEd and a compressive force NEd and the required reinforcement is determined.
As,tot / 2 h d d2 MEd
d1 = d2 NEd
As,tot / 2

This example is concerned with the design of sections for ULS, subject to bending with axial force. The
content of this problem is covered by the following parts of DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 [1]:
εc σcd
d2 σs2d Fs2d
As2  εs2 Fc
d zs2
z
zs1
As1
d1 εs1 σs1d Fs1d

in this example, consists of an horizontal top branch, as presented in Fig. 7.3 and as defined in DIN EN
1992-1-1:2004 [1] (Section 3.2.7).
A
σ ƒtk,c
ƒyk
ƒyd = ƒyk / γs
B A Idealised
B Design

The rectangular cross- section, with properties as defined in Table 7.1, is to be designed, with respect to
DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 (German National Annex) [1], [2], to carry an ultimate moment of 382 kNm with
an axial compressive force of 1785 kN. The calculation steps with a commonly used design method
[3] [4] are presented below and the results are given in Table 7.2. Here, it has to be mentioned that
the standard methods employed in order to calculate the reinforcement are approximate, and therefore
deviations often occur.
C 30/ 37 h = 50.0 cm MEd = 382 kNm
B 500A d = 45.0 cm NEd = −1785 kN
d1 = d2 = 5.0 cm
b = 30 cm
Table 7.2: Results
SOF. Interaction Diagram [3]
As,tot [cm2 / m] 35.03 35.19

7.4 Design Process1

Material:

Steel: γs = 1.15 factors for materials


ƒyd = ƒyk / γs = 500/ 1.15 = 434.78 MP MP
3.2.7: (2), Fig. 3.8
Design Load:
NEd = −1785 kN
MEd = 382 kNm
ed MEd 382

= = = 0.428 < 3.5
h NEd · h −1785 · 0.50
→ Axial force dominant → Design with respect to μ − ν interaction

diagram is suggested
Design with respect to Interaction diagram for Bending with axial

MEd 382 · 10−3

μEd = = = 0.30 Tab. 9.6 [3]: μ − ν Interaction diagram
b · h2 · ƒcd 0.30 · 0.502 · 17.0 for concrete C12/ 15 − C50/ 60 - Rect-
angular cross-section with double sym-
NEd −1785 · 10−3 metric reinforcement.
νEd = = = −0.70
b · h2 · ƒcd 0.30 · 0.50 · 17.0
from design chart for d1 / h = 0.05/ 0.5 = 0.10:
ωtot = 0.60
b·h
As,tot = ωtot · = 35.19 cm2
ƒyd / ƒcd
As,tot
As1 = As2 = = 17.6 cm2
2

7.5 Conclusion
under bending with axial force. It has been shown that the results are reproduced with excellent accu-
racy.
7.6 Literature

DCE-EN5: Design of a Rectangular CS for Double Bending and Axial Force
8 DCE-EN5: Design of a Rectangular CS for Double

Bending and Axial Force
Overview

Module(s): AQB
Input file(s): rectangular double bending axial.dat

double axially bending moments MEdy , MEdz and a compressive force NEd .
MEdz
each As,tot / 4
d1 NEd
= h MEdy
d2
b
b1 = b2

This example is concerned with the design of sections for ULS, subject to double bending with axial
force. The content of the problem is covered by the following parts of DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 [1]:

εc σcd
d2 Fs2d
As2 εs2 σs2d
d zs2  Fc
z
zs1
As1
d1 εs1 σs1d Fs1d
The design stress-strain diagram for reinforcing steel considered in this example, consists of an inclined
top branch, as presented in Fig. 8.3 and as defined in DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 [1] (Section 3.2.7).
A
σ
ƒtk,c
ƒyk
ƒyd = ƒyk / γs
B A Idealised
B Design

The rectangular cross- section, with properties as defined in Table 8.1, is to be designed, with respect
to DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 (German National Annex) [1], [2], under double axial bending and an axial
compressive force of 1600 kN. The calculation steps with a commonly used design method [3] [4] are
presented below and the results are given in Table 8.2. Here, it has to be mentioned that the standard
methods employed in order to calculate the reinforcement are approximate, and therefore deviations
often occur.
C 35/ 45 h = 50.0 cm MEdy = 500 kNm
B 500A b1 = b2 = 5.0 cm MEdz = 450 kNm
d1 = d2 = 5.0 cm NEd = −1600 kN
b = 40 cm

Table 8.2: Results
SOF. Interaction Diagram [3]
As,tot [cm2 / m] 115.9 113.1

8.4 Design Process1

Material:

Steel: γs = 1.15


MP ƒyd = ƒyk / γs = 500/ 1.15 = 434.78 MP
3.2.7: (2), Fig. 3.8
Design Load:
NEd = −1600 kN
MEdy = 500 kNm
MEdz = 450 kNm
Design with respect to Interaction diagram for Double Bending

with axial force for rectangular cross-sections:
MEd 500 · 10−3

μEdy = = = 0.252
b · h2 · ƒcd 0.40 · 0.502 · 19.8
MEd 450 · 10−3

μEdz = = = 0.284
b · h2 · ƒcd 0.40 · 0.502 · 19.8
NEd −1600 · 10−3

νEd = = = −0.403
b · h2 · ƒcd 0.40 · 0.50 · 19.8
Tab. 9.7 [3]: μ − ν Interaction diagram from design chart → ωtot = 1.24 for:
for concrete C12/ 15 − C50/ 60 - Rect-
angular cross-section with all-round • d1 / h = d2 / h = 0.05/ 0.5 = 0.10
symmetric reinforcement.
• b1 / b = b2 / b = 0.05/ 0.4 = 0.08 ≈ 0.10
• ν = −0.4
• μ1 = m μEdy ; μEdz = 0.284

• μ2 = mn μEdy ; μEdz = 0.252

b·h
As,tot = ωtot · = 113.1 cm2
ƒyd / ƒcd
As,tot/ 4 = 28.28 cm2

8.5 Conclusion
under double axial bending with compressive axial force. It has been shown that the results are repro-
duced with excellent accuracy.
8.6 Literature


DCE-EN6: Design of a Rectangular CS for Shear Force
9 DCE-EN6: Design of a Rectangular CS for Shear Force
Overview
Design Code Family(s): EN, DIN

Design Code(s): DIN EN 1992-1-1, EN 1992-1-1
Module(s): AQB
Input file(s): rectangular shear.dat

The problem consists of a rectangular section, symmetrically reinforced for bending, as shown in Fig.
9.1. The cross-section is designed for shear force VEd and the required shear reinforcement is deter-
mined.
As,tot / 2
h d z
VEd
As,tot / 2

This example is concerned with the design of sections for ULS, subject to shear force. The content of
this problem is covered by the following parts of DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 [1] [2]:
• Guidelines for shear design (Section 6.2)
• Reinforcement (Section 9.2.2)
Fcd
V
α N
d z θ
V V(cot θ − cot α) M
s Ftd
shear reinforcement
Figure 9.2: Shear Reinforced Members

A
σ
ƒtk,c
ƒyk
ƒyd = ƒyk / γs
B A Idealised
B Design

The rectangular section, with properties as defined in Table 9.1, is to be designed, with respect to DIN
EN 1992-1-1:2004 (German National Annex) [1], [2], under shear force of 343.25 kN. The reference
calculation steps are presented below and the results are given in Table 9.2. Then, the same section is
designed with repsect to EN 1992-1-1:2004 [6]. The same angle θ(= 1.60) is chosen, as calculated
with respect to DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004, in order to compare the results. If no θ value is input, then the
calculation starts with the upper limit cot θ = 2.5 and through an optimization process the right angle is
selected. In this case, the reinforcement is determined with cot θ = 2.5, giving a shear reinforcement of
7.80 cm2 / m. Also in order to demonstrate that the correct value of VRd,m = 734.4 kN (reference
value) with repsect to DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 is calculated in SOFiSTiK, we input a design shear force of
734.3 delivering a shear reinforcement, but when a value of 734.4 is input then AQB gives the warning
of ’no shear design possible’ showing that the maximum shear resistance is exceeded.
C 30/ 37 h = 50.0 cm VEd = 343.25 kN
B 500A b = 30 cm
d = 45.0 cm
As,tot = 38.67 cm2
Table 9.2: Results
As,tot [cm2 / m] Design Code SOF. Ref.
DIN EN [1] 12.84 12.84
EN [6] 12.18 12.18

9.4 Design Process1

Material:

Steel: γs = 1.15

ƒyd = ƒyk / γs = 500/ 1.15 = 434.78 MP MP
3.2.7: (2), Fig. 3.8
Design Load: VEd = 343.25 kN
z = mx d − cV, − 30 mm; d − 2 cV,

(NDP) 6.2.3 (1): Inner lever arm z
z = mx {384; 378} = 384 mm

1.2 + 1.4 σcd / ƒcd
1.0 ≤ cot θ ≤ ≤ 3.0 (NDP) 6.2.3 (2): Eq. 6.7aDE
1 − VRd,cc / VEd
σcd

1/ 3
VRd,cc = c · 0.48 · ƒck · 1 − 1.2 · b · z (NDP) Eq. 6.2.3 (2): 6.7bDE
ƒcd c = 0.5
VRd,cc = 0.5 · 0.48 · 30 1/ 3 · (1 − 0) · 0.3 · 0.384 (NDP) 6.2.3 (2): σcd = NEd / Ac
VRd,cc = 0.08591 MN = 85.91kN
1.2 + 0
cot θ = = 1.60 (NDP) 6.2.3 (2): The angle θ should be
1 − 85.91 / 343.25 limited by Eq. 6.7DE
As,req / s = VEd / (ƒyd · z · cot θ) = 12.84 cm2 / m 6.2.3 (3): Eq. 6.8
ƒyd = ƒyk / γs = 435 MP
VRd,m = b · z · ν1 · ƒcd / (cot θ + tn θ) (NDP) 6.2.3 (3): Eq. 6.9

Maximum shear force VRd,m occurs
VRd,m = 0.3 · 0.384 · 0.75 · 17 / (1 + 1) = 734.4 kN for θ = 45◦ : cot θ = tn θ = 1
ν1 = 0.75 · ν2 = 0.75, ν2 = 1 for
≤ C50/ 60
Design with respect to EN 1992-1-1:2004 [6]: 3
z = 0.9 · d 6.2.3 (1): Inner lever arm z
z = 0.9 · 450 = 405 mm
1.0 ≤ cot θ ≤ 2.5 → cot θ = 1.60 (choose for comparison) 6.2.3 (2): Eq. 6.7N
The angle θ should be limited by Eq.
As,req / s = VEd / (ƒyd · z · cot θ) = 12.18 cm2 / m 6.7N

3 The sections mentioned in the margins refer to EN 1992-1-1:2004 [6], unless other-
wise specified.

9.5 Conclusion
This example shows the calculation of the required reinforcement for a rectangular cross-section under
shear force. It has been shown that the results are reproduced with excellent accuracy.
9.6 Literature
[6] EN 1992-1-1: Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures, Part 1-1: General rules and rules for
buildings. CEN. 2004.

DCE-EN7: Design of a T-section for Shear
10 DCE-EN7: Design of a T-section for Shear
Overview
Design Code Family(s): EN

Design Code(s): EN 1992-1-1
Module(s): AQB
Input file(s): t-beam shear.dat

The problem consists of a T-section, as shown in Fig. 10.1. The cross-section is designed for an ultimate
shear force VEd and the required reinforcement is determined.
beƒ ƒ
hƒ
VEd
h d
zs
As1 As1
d1
b

This example is concerned with the design of sections for ULS, subject to shear force. The content of
this problem is covered by the following parts of EN 1992-1-1:2004 [6]:
Fcd
V
α N
d z θ
s Ftd
shear reinforcement

top branch, as presented in Fig. 10.3 and as defined in EN 1992-1-1:2004 [6] (Section 3.2.7).
A
σ ƒtk,c
ƒyk
ƒyd = ƒyk / γs
B A Idealised
B Design

The T-section, with properties as defined in Table 10.1, is to be designed, with respect to EN 1992-1-
1:2004 [6] to carry an ultimate shear force of 450 kN. The reference calculation steps are presented
below and the results are given in Table 10.2.
C 30/ 37 h = 60.0 cm VEd = 450 kN
B 500A d = 53.0 cm
d1 = 7.0 cm
b = 30 cm
beƒ ƒ = 180 cm
hƒ = 15 cm
As1 = 15 cm2
The intermediate steps of calculating the required reinforcement are also validated in this example.
First we calculate the design value for the shear resistance VRd,c for members not requiring shear
reinforcement.
It gives a value of VRd,c = 62.52 kN.
Checking the results in AQB, we can see that SOFiSTiK outputs also Vrd1,c = 62.52 kN.
Just to test this result, if we input a shear force of VEd = 62.51 kN just below the value for VRd,c , AQB
will not output any value for cot θ and the minimum reinforcement will be printed (M). If we now give a
value of VEd = 62.53 kN just larger than VRd,c , then AQB will start increasing cot θ and the minimum

reinforcement will be printed. If we continue increasing VEd , AQB will continue increasing cot θ until
it reaches the upper limit ofcot θ = 2.5 with using the minimum reinforcement. If now the minimum
reinforcement is exceeded, AQB starts calculating a value for the required reinforcement.
Another option to test this limit of VRd,c = 62.52 kN, would be to keep cot θ = 1.0 and now with
VEd = 62.53 kN, AQB calculates a value for the required reinforcement larger than the minimum
reinforcement. For the maximum value of the angle θ, hence cot θ = 1.0, the maximum value allowed
for VEd can be calculated as 755.57 kN. This can be found in AQB results as the Vrd2,c = 755.57 kN
for the case of cot θ = 1.0. Giving as an input a shear force just above this value VEd = 755.58 triggers
a warning ”Shear design not possible”.
Next step is the validation of VRd,m . When the design shear force VEd exceeds VRd,m then cot θ
must be decreased so that VEd = VRd,m . The reference result for VRd,m is 521.08 kN. Inputing a
value just below that, should give a cot θ = 2.5, whereas for a value just above should give cot θ < 2.5.
This can be verified easily in AQB output for VEd = 521.07 and 521.09 kN, respectively.
Also the minimum reinforcement is calculated exactly by AQB with a value of 2.63 cm2 / m.
Table 10.2: Results
SOF. Ref.
As,req / s [cm2 / m] 8.68 8.679
As,mn / s [cm2 / m] 2.63 2.629
VRd,c [kN] 62.52 62.517
VRd,m [kN] 521.08 521.08
VEd,m [kN] 755.57 755.5

10.4 Design Process1

(NDP) 2.4.2.4: (1), Tab. 2.1DE: Partial Material: Concrete: γc = 1.50
Steel: γs = 1.15

ƒcd = cc · ƒck / γc = 1.0 · 30/ 1.5 = 20.0 MP
3.1.6: (1)P, Eq. (3.15): cc = 0.85 con- αcc = 1.0

MP ƒyd = ƒyk / γs = 500/ 1.15 = 434.78 MP
3.2.7: (2), Fig. 3.8
Design with respect to EN 1992-1-1:2004 [6]:2
6.2.3 (1): Inner lever arm z z ≈ 0.9 · d = 0.9 · 530 = 477 mm

6.2.2 (1): Design value for shear resis- VRd,c = CRd,c · k · (100 · ρ1 · ƒck ) 1/ 3 + k1 · σcp · b · d
tance VRd,c for members not requiring
design shear reinforcement CRd,c = 0.18/ γc = 0.12
v
t 200
k =1+ = 1.6143 < 2.0
d
As
ρ1 = = 0.00 < 0.02
b d

1/ 3
VRd,c = 0.12 · 1.6143 · (100 · 0.0 · 30) + 0 · 0.3 · 0.53
VRd,c = 0.00 kN ≥ VRd,c,mn
VRd,c,mn = (mn + k1 · σcp ) · b · d

1/ 2
mn = 0.035 · k 3/ 2 · ƒck
mn = 0.035 · 1.6143 · 301/ 2 = 0.39319
VRd,c,mn = (0.39319 + 0.0) · 0.3 · 0.53 = 0.062517 MN
VRd,c,mn = 62.517 kN → VRd,c = 62.517 kN
VEd > VRd,c → shear reinforcement is required
6.2.3 (2): Eq. 6.7N: The angle θ should 1.0 ≤ cot θ ≤ 2.5 → start with cot θ = 2.50
be limited by Eq. 6.7N
6.2.3 (3): Eq. 6.9 VRd,m = b · z · ν · ƒcd / (cot θ + tn θ)
ƒck

6.2.2 (6): Eq. 6.6N ν = 0.6 · 1 − = 0.528
250
Min. reinforcement:
wise specified.

p
ρ,mn = 0.08 · ƒck / ƒyk = 0.08 · 30/ 500 = 0.0008763
p
9.2.2 (5): Eq. 9.5N
As,mn / s = ρ,mn · b sin α
As,mn / s = 0.0008763 · 30 · 100 = 2.629 cm2 / m0
Required reinforcement:
VEd
As,req / s = 6.2.3 (3): Eq. 6.8
ƒyd · z · cot θ
• For VEd < VRd,c
Shear reinforcement not required (min. reinforcement). In this example

min. reinforcement is disabled.
cotθ = tnθ = 1.0, b = 0.3 m, z = 0.477 m, ν1 = 0.6
α = 1.0
20
VRd,m = 1.0 · 0.3 · 0.477 · 0.60 · = 0.85859 MN
1.0 + 1.0
VRd,m = 858.59 kN
• For VEd = 63.0 kN > VRd,c = 62.57:
Calculating the VRd,m value:
20
VRd,m = 0.3 · 0.477 · 0.528 · = 0.52108 MN
2.5 + 0.4
VRd,m = 521.08 kN ≥ VEd = 63 kN
Calculating the As,req / s value:
0.063
As,req / s = · 1002 = 1.2151 cm2
434.78 · 0.477 · 2.5
• For VEd = 63 kN and cot θ = 1.0:
VEd = 63 kN > VRd,c = 62.51 kN
20
VRd,m = 0.3 · 0.477 · 0.528 · = 0.7555 MN
1.0 + 1.0
VRd,m = 755.5 kN ≥ VEd = 63 kN
0.521
As,req / s = · 1002 = 3.037 cm2
434.78 · 0.477 · 1.0
• For VEd = 756 kN and cot θ = 1.0:
VEd = 756 kN > VRd,c = 62.51 kN
VEd = 756 kN > VRd,m = 755.5 kN
Shear design not possible, because the cot θ value is fixed and can’t

be iterated.
• For VEd = 521.10 kN:
VEd = 521.10 kN > VRd,c = 62.51 kN
VEd = 521.10 kN > VRd,m = 521.08 kN
The cot θ value is iterated until VRd,m ≥ VEd
• For VEd = 450 kN:
VEd = 450 kN > VRd,c = 62.51 kN
VEd = 450 kN < VRd,m = 521.08 kN
20
VRd,m = 0.3 · 0.477 · 0.528 · = 0.52108 MN
2.5 + 0.4
VRd,m = 521.08 kN ≥ VEd = 450 kN
0.450
As,req / s = · 1002 = 8.679 cm2
434.78 · 0.477 · 2.5

10.5 Conclusion
This example shows the calculation of the required reinforcement for a T-beam under shear force. It has
10.6 Literature


DCE-EN8: Design of a Rectangular CS for Shear and Axial Force
11 DCE-EN8: Design of a Rectangular CS for Shear and

Axial Force
Overview

Module(s): AQB
Input file(s): rectangular shear axial.dat

11.1. The cross-section is designed for a shear force VEd and a compressive force NEd and and the
required reinforcement is determined.
As,tot / 2
h d z
NEd
VEd
As,tot / 2

This example is concerned with the design of sections for ULS, subject to shear force and axial force.
The content of this problem is covered by the following parts of DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 [1] [2]:
Fcd
V
α N
d z θ
s Ftd
shear reinforcement

top branch, as presented in Fig. 11.3 and defined in DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 [1].
A
σ
ƒyk
ƒyd = ƒyk / γs
B A Idealised
B Design

The rectangular cross-section, with properties as defined in Table 11.1, is to be designed, with respect
to DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 (German National Annex) [1], [2], under a shear force of 343.25 kN and a
compressive axial force of 500.0 kN . The reference calculation steps are presented below and the
results are given in Table 11.2.
C 30/ 37 h = 50.0 cm VEd = 343.25 kN
B 500A b = 30 cm NEd = 500.0 kN
d = 45.0 cm
As,tot = 38.67 cm2
cV, = 3.6 cm
Table 11.2: Results
SOF. Ref.
As / s [cm2 / m] 11.27 11.27
VRd,c [kN] 132.71 132.71
cot θ 1.82 1.82


Material:

Steel: γs = 1.15

ƒyd = ƒyk / γs = 500/ 1.15 = 434.78 MP MP
3.2.7: (2), Fig. 3.8
NEd = −500.0 kN
z = mx d − cV, − 30 mm; d − 2 cV,

z = mx {384; 378} = 384 mm

1/ 3
VRd,c = CRd,c · k · (100 · ρ1 · ƒck ) + 0.12 · σcp · b · d (NDP) 6.2.2 (1): Eq. 6.2a: Design value
for shear resistance VRd,c for members
with a minimum of not requiring design shear reinforce-
ment
νmn + 0.12 · σcp · b · d

(NDP) 6.2.2 (1): Eq. 6.2b
CRd,c = 0.15/ γc = 0.1 (NDP) 6.2.2 (1): CRd,c = 0.15/ γc

v v
t 200 t 200
k =1+ =1+ = 1.6667 < 2.0
d 450
As,tot / 2
ρ1 = = 0.01432 < 0.02
b d
VRd,c,mn = νmn + 0.12 · σcp · b · d

1/ 2
νmn = (0.0525/ γc ) · k 3/ 2 · ƒck = 0.41249 (NDP) 6.2.2 (1): Eq. 6.3aDE: νmn for
d ≤ 600 mm
VRd,c,mn = 109.68 kN
σcp = NEd / Ac < 0.2 · ƒcd (NDP) 6.2.2 (1): Eq. 6.2
σcp > 0 for compression
σcp = −500 · 10−3 / 0.15 · 106 = −3.3333 N/ mm2 < 3.4

VRd,c = 0.1 · 1.6667 · (1.432 · 30) 1/ 3 + 0.112 · 3.3333 · 0.3 ·
0.45 = 132.71 kN
VEd > VRd,c → shear reinforcement is required


1.2 + 1.4 σcd / ƒcd

(NDP) 6.2.3 (2): Eq. 6.7aDE 1.0 ≤ cot θ ≤ ≤ 3.0
1 − VRd,cc / VEd
σcd

1/ 3
(NDP) 6.2.3 (2): Eq. 6.7bDE VRd,cc = c · 0.48 · ƒck · 1 − 1.2 · b · z
c = 0.5 ƒcd
(NDP) 6.2.3 (2): σcd = NEd / Ac σcp = NEd / Ac
σcd = −500 · 10−3 / 0.15 · 106 = −3.3333 N/ mm2

3.3333

6.7DE: σcd > 0 for compression VRd,cc = 0.5 · 0.48 · 30 1/ 3 · 1 − 1.2 · 0.3 · 0.384
17.0
VRd,cc = 65.6948 kN
1.2 + 1.4 · 3.3333 / 17.0

(NDP) 6.2.3 (2): The angle θ should be cot θ = = 1.823
limited by Eq. 6.7DE 1 − 65.6948 / 343.25
6.2.3 (3): Eq. 6.8 As,req / s = VEd / (ƒyd · z · cot θ) = 11.27 cm2 / m
(NDP) 6.2.3 (3): Eq. 6.9 VRd,m = b · z · ν1 · ƒcd / (cot θ + tn θ)
for θ = 45◦ : cot θ = tn θ = 1 VRd,m = 0.3 · 0.384 · 0.75 · 17 / (1 + 1) = 734.4 kN
(NDP) ν1 = 0.75 · ν2 = 0.75, ν2 = 1
for ≤ C50/ 60

11.5 Conclusion
under shear with compressive axial force. It has been shown that the results are reproduced with
excellent accuracy.
11.6 Literature


DCE-EN9: Design of a Rectangular CS for Shear and Torsion
12 DCE-EN9: Design of a Rectangular CS for Shear and

Torsion
Overview

Module(s): AQB
Input file(s): rectangular shear torsion.dat

12.1. The cross-section is designed for shear force VEd and torsion TEd and the required shear and
torsion reinforcement is determined.
As,tot / 2
h d
TEd
VEd
As,tot / 2

This example is concerned with the design of sections for ULS, subject to shear force and torsion. The
content of this problem is covered by the following parts of DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 [1] [2]:
• Guidelines for shear (Section 6.2) and torsion design (Section 6.3)
• Reinforcement (Section 9.2.2, 9.2.3)

z
Ak
cover centre-line
TEd
teƒ / 2 V
teƒ
Figure 12.2: Torsion Reinforced Members
A
σ ƒtk,c
ƒyk
ƒyd = ƒyk / γs
B A Idealised
B Design

The rectangular cross-section, with properties as defined in Table 12.1, is to be designed, with respect to
DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 (German National Annex) [1], [2], under shear force of 175.0 kN and torsional
moment 35 kNm. The reference calculation steps [4] are presented below and the results are given in
Table 12.2.
C 35/ 45 h = 70.0 cm VEd = 175.0 kN
B 500A b = 30 cm TEd = 35.0 kNm
d = 65.0 cm
As,tot = 26.8 cm2

Table 12.2: Results
SOF. Ref.
As / s (T) [cm2 / m] 3.35 3.35
As (T) [cm2 ] 5.37 5.37
As,tot / s [cm2 / m] 13.60 13.59
VRd,m [kN] 1303.04 1303.03
TRd,m [kNm] 124.95 124.95

12.4 Design Process 1

Material:
(NA) 2.4.2.4: (1), Tab. 2.1DE: Partial Concrete: γc = 1.50

Steel: γs = 1.15
(NDP) 3.1.6: (1)P, Eq. (3.15): cc = ƒcd = cc · ƒck / γc = 0.85 · 35/ 1.5 = 19.833 MP
0.85 considering long term effects
(NDP) 3.2.2: (3)P: yield strength ƒyk = ƒyk = 500 MP
500 MP
3.2.7: (2), Fig. 3.8 ƒyd = ƒyk / γs = 500/ 1.15 = 434.78 MP
Design Load:
VEd = 175.0 kN, TEd = 35.0 kN

VEd · b
(NDP) 6.3.2 (5): Eq. (NA.6.31.1): TEd ≤
For approximately rectangular solid 4.5
sections no shear and torsion rein-
forcement is required except from the
175 · 0.3
minimum reinforcement, provided that
35 > = 11.66
4.5
the condition is satisfied
→ Eq. NA.6.31.1 is not fulfilled
and (NDP) 6.3.2 (5): Eq. (NA.6.31.2):
4.5 · TEd
When the condition equation is not

fulfilled then shear and torsion design VEd · 1 + ≤ VRd,c
has to be reverified VEd · b

1/ 3
(NDP) 6.2.2 (1): Eq. 6.2a: Design value VRd,c = CRd,c · k · (100 · ρ1 · ƒck ) + 0.12 · σcp · b · d
not requiring design shear reinforce- CRd,c = 0.15/ γc = 0.1
ment
(NDP) 6.2.2 (1): CRd,c = 0.15/ γc v
t 200
k =1+ = 1.5773 < 2.0
d
As
ρ1 =
b · d
26.8
ρ1 = = 0.0137 < 0.02
0.3 · 65

1/ 3
VRd,c = 0.1 · 1.5773 · (100 · 0.0137 · 35) + 0 · 0.3 · 0.65
VRd,c = 111.74 kN
4.5 · 35

175 · 1 + = 700 > 111.74
175 · 0.3
→ requirement of Eq. NA.6.31.2 is not met

Torsional reinforcement
teƒ ƒ ,1 = teƒ ƒ ,2 = 2 · 50 = 100 mm (so = s = ss = 50 mm) 6.3.1 (3): Solid sections may be mod-
elled by equivalent thin-walled sections
Ak = (h − s − so ) · b − teƒ ƒ ,1 = 100 mm

(Fig. 12.2)
Ak : area enclosed by the centre-line
Ak = (700 − 50 − 50) · (300 − 100) = 120000 mm2 = 0.12 m2
k = 2 · [(700 − 50 − 50) + (300 − 100)] = 1600 mm = 1.6 m k : circumference of area Ak
Simplifying, the reinforcement for torsion may be determined alone un-

6.3.2 (2): The effects of torsion
der the assumption of cot θ = 1.0, θ = 45◦ and be added to the and shear may be superimposed,
independently calculated shear force reinforcement. assuming the same value for θ
As,req / s = TEd · tn θ / (ƒyd · 2Ak ) (NDP) 6.3.2 (3): Eq. (NA.6.28.1)
As,req / s = 350 · 1.0 / (435 · 2 · 0.12) = 3.35 cm2 / m (T)
As,req = TEd · k · cot θ / (ƒyd · 2Ak ) = 5.37 cm2 (T) 6.3.2 (3): Eq. 6.28
Torsional resistance moment
TRd,m = 2 · ν · ƒcd · Ak · teƒ ƒ , · sin θ · cos θ 6.3.2 (4): Eq. 6.30

(NDP): ν = 0.525
sin θ · cos θ = 0.5 since θ = 45◦
TRd,m = 124.95 kNm
Check of the concrete compressive strut bearing capacity for the

load combination of shear force and torsion
The maximum resistance of a member subjected to torsion and shear

is limited by the capacity of the concrete struts. The following condition
should be satisfied:
2 2
TEd VEd

+ ≤ 1.0 (NDP) 6.3.2 (4): Eq. (NA.6.29.1) for
TRd,m VRd,m solid cross-sections
For the T+V utilization, SOFiSTiK uses:

v
2 2
TEd VEd
u
+
t
≤ 1.0
TRd,m VRd,m
z = mx d − cV, − 30 mm; d − 2 cV,

cV, = so − Do / 2 = 50 − 28/ 2 = 36 mm so : offset of reinforcement

Do : bar diameter
z = mx {584; 578} = 584 mm
VRd,m = b · z · ν1 · ƒcd / (cot θ + tn θ) (NDP) 6.2.3 (3): Eq. 6.9

VRd,m = 0.3 · 0.584 · 0.75 · 19.833 / (1 + 1) = 1303.03 kN for θ = 45◦ : cot θ = tn θ = 1
(NDP) 6.2.3 (3):ν1 = 0.75 · ν2 = 0.75,
2 2 ν2 = 1 for ≤ C50/ 60
35 175

+ = 0.0965 < 1
124.95 1303.04
Shear reinforcement
As,req / s = VEd / (ƒyd · z · cot θ) = 6.89 cm2 / m 6.2.3 (3): Eq. 6.8

Total required reinforcement
Required torsional reinforcement:
2 · As / s = 2 · 3.35 = 6.7 cm2 / m (double-shear connection)
Total reinforcement: As,tot / s = 6.7 + 6.89 = 13.59 cm2 / m

12.5 Conclusion
under shear and torsion. It has been shown that the results are reproduced with excellent accuracy.
12.6 Literature


DCE-EN10: Shear between web and flanges of T-sections
13 DCE-EN10: Shear between web and flanges of T-

sections
Overview

Module(s): AQB
Input file(s): t-beam shear web flange.dat

The problem consists of a T-beam section, as shown in Fig. 13.1. The cs is designed for shear, the shear
between web and flanges of T-sections is considered and the required reinforcement is determined.
beƒ ƒ
hƒ
VEd
h d
As1 As1
d1

This example is concerned with the shear design of T-sections, for the ultimate limit state. The content
of this problem is covered by the following parts of DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 [1]:

Fd
Fd beƒ ƒ
sƒ Δ
θƒ
longitudinal bar anchored hƒ

beyond this point Fd + ΔFd
compressive Asƒ
struts Fd + ΔFd
b
Figure 13.2: Connection between flange and web in T-sections
A
σ ƒtk,c = 525N/ mm2
ƒyk
ƒyd = ƒyk / γs
B A Idealised
B Design
εd = 25 0 /00

The T-section, with properties as defined in Table 13.1, is to be designed for shear, with respect to DIN
EN 1992-1-1:2004 (German National Annex) [1], [2]. The structure analysed, consists of a single span
beam with a distributed load in gravity direction. The cross-section geometry, as well as the shear cut
under consideration can be seen in Fig. 13.4.

175
1 1
15
1 1
60
67.5 40 67.5
Figure 13.4: Cross-section Geometry, Properties and Shear Cuts

SOFiSTiK AG * Bruckmannring 38 * 85764 Oberschleißheim Page 1
SOFiSTiKC 20/WINGRAF
2016-3 25 - GRAPHICS FOR FINITE ELEMENTS h = 75.0 cm
(V 18.03) Pg = 155 kN/ m 2016-01-15
Single span beam
B 500A hƒ = 15 cm, h = 60.0 cm
d1 = 7.0 cm
155.0 155.0 155.0 = 40 cm155.0

b155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0
beƒ ƒ , = 67.5 cm, beƒ ƒ = 175 cm
0.00
SOFiSTiK 2016-3 WINGRAF - GRAPHICS FOR FINITE ELEMENTS (V 18.03) 2016-01-15
Single span beam
The system with its loading as well as the moment and shear force are shown in Fig. 13.5. The reference
calculation steps [4] 2.00
are presented in the4.00next section and the6.00results are given in8.00Table 13.2.
SOFiSTiK AG - www.sofistik.de
0.00 10.00 m
All loads (in components), Loadcase 1 sum_PZ=1550.0 kN . , (1 cm 3D = unit) Beam line load (force) in global Z (Unit=160.2 M 1 : 41
Y X
kN/m ) (Max=155.0)
Z
155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0 0.00
0.00
1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010
697.5
697.5
1240
1240
1628
1628
0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00 m

1860
1860
1938
Y X
kN/m ) (Max=155.0)
Z
Figure 13.5: Loaded Structure, Resulting Moment and Shear Force

2.00
0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00 m

0.00
Beam Elements , Number

1001 1002 of element (Max=1010)
1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 M 1 : 41
Y X
Beam Elements , Bending moment My, Loadcase 1 sum_PZ=1550.0 kN . , 1 cm 3D = 1000. kNm (Max=1938.)
Z
697.5
697.5
Table 13.2: Results

1240
1240
1628
1628
1860
1860
1938
At beam 1001 SOF. Ref.
As1 [cm2 ] at  = 1.0 m 23.25 23.27
Asƒ / sƒ [cm2 / m]
0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00 m
5.72 5.79
Beam Elements , Number of element (Max=1010) M 1 : 41
Y X
Z


VRd,c [kN] 61.05 61.2
VRd,m [kN] 711.68 712.53
cot θ 1.62 1.619

z [cm] at  = 1.0 m 65.72 65.7
VEd = ΔFd [kN] 403.65 409.36


Material:

Steel: γs = 1.15

ƒyd = ƒyk / γs = 500/ 1.15 = 434.78 MP MP
3.2.7: (2), Fig. 3.8
σsd = 456.52 MP
Design loads
• Design Load for beam 1001, x=0.0 m:
MEd,=0.0 m = 0.0 kNm
MEd,=1.0 m = 697.5 kNm
Calculating the longitudinal reinforcement:
• For beam 1001, x=0.0 m
MEds 0.0 · 10−3

μEds = = = 0.00 μ = 0 → As1 = 0
beƒ ƒ · d2 · ƒcd 1.75 · 0.682 · 14.17
• For beam 1001, x=1.0 m
MEds 697.5 · 10−3

μEds = = = 0.0608
beƒ ƒ · d2 · ƒcd 1.75 · 0.682 · 14.17
ω ≈ 0.063, ζ ≈ 0.967 and ξ ≈ 0.086 (interpolated) Tab. 9.2 [3]: ω−Table for up to C50/ 60
without compression reinforcement
1
As1 = · (ω · b · d · ƒcd + NEd ) NEd = 0
σsd
1
As1 = · (0.063 · 1.75 · 0.68 · 14.17) · 1002 = 23.27 cm2
456.52
z = ζ · d = 0.967 · 0.68 m ≈ 65.7 cm
Calculating the shear between flange and web
The shear force, is determined by the change of the longitudinal force, at

the junction between one side of a flange and the web, in the separated
flange: 6.2.4 (3): Eq. 6.20

MEd,=1.0 MEd,=0.0 hƒ · beƒ ƒ ,

ΔFd = − ·
z z hƒ · beƒ ƒ
For beam 1001 (x=0.00 m) → MEd = 0.00 therefore:

697.5 0.675

In AQB output ΔFd = T[kN/ m] ΔFd = −0 · = 409.36 kN
0.657 1.75
The longitudinal shear stress Ed at the junction between one side of a
flange and the web is determined by the change of the normal (longitu-
dinal) force in the part of the flange considered, according to:
ΔFd
DIN EN 1992, 6.2.4 (3),Eq. 6.20: hƒ Ed =
is the thickness of flange at the junc- hƒ · Δ
tions, Δ is the length under consider-
ation, ΔFd is the change of the normal In our case Δ = 1.0 because the beam length is = 1.00 m.
force in the flange over the length Δ
Please note that AQB is outputting the results per length.
409.36
In AQB output Ed = τ − V Ed = = 0.272 kN/ m2 = 2.72 MP
15 · 100
Checking the maximum Rd,m value to prevent crushing of the
struts in the flange
To prevent crushing of the compression struts in the flange, the following

condition should be satisfied:
DIN EN 1992, 6.2.4 (4),Eq. 6.22 Ed ≤ Rd,m = ν · ƒcd · snθƒ · cosθƒ
Rd,m = ν · ƒcd · snθƒ · cosθƒ
According to DIN EN 1992-1-1, NDP 6.2.4(4):
ν = ν1
DIN EN 1992, NDP 6.2.3 (3),Eq. 6.22 ν1 = 0.75 · ν2

ƒck
ν2 = 1.1 − ≤ 1.0
500
20
ν2 = 1.1 − = 1.1 − 0.04 = 1.06 ≥ 1.0 → ν2 = 1.0
500
ν1 = 0.75 · 1.0 = 0.75 → ν = 0.75
The θ value is calculated:

σcd

1/ 3
DIN EN 1992, NDP 6.2.3 (2),Eq. VRd,cc = c · 0.48 · ƒck · 1 − 1.2 · · b · z
NA.6.7b: σcd = NEd / AC , c=0.5 ƒcd
b → hƒ , z → Δ, c = 0.5
σcd

1/ 3
VRd,cc = c · 0.48 · ƒck · 1 − 1.2 · · hƒ · Δ
ƒcd
0

VRd,cc = 0.5 · 0.48 · 251/ 3 · 1 − 1.2 · · 0.15 · 1.0
14.17
VRd,cc = 0.1052 MN = 105.26 kN

1.2 + 1.4 · Δσcd / ƒcd

1.0 ≤ cotθ ≤ ≤ 3.0 DIN EN 1992, NDP 6.2.3 (2),Eq.
1 − VRd,cc / VEd NA.6.7a
1.2
cotθ = = 1.619
1 − 105.26/ 409.36
1 1
tn θ = = = 0.619 → θ = 31.75◦
cotθ 1.619
Rd,m = 0.75 · 14.17 · sn31.75 · cos31.75 = 4.7502 MP
VRd,m = Rd,m · hƒ · Δ = 4.7502 · 0.15 · 1.0 = 0.71253 MN
VRd,m = 712.53 kN
Checking the value Rd,c
If Ed is less than or equal to Rd,c = k · ƒctd no extra reinforcement

above that for flexure is required.
Rd,c = k · ƒctd
For concrete C 25/30 → ƒctd = 1.02 MP
Rd,c = 0.4 · 1.02 = 0.408 MP
VRd,c = Rd,c · hƒ · Δ = 0.0408 · 15 · 100 = 61.2 kN
• Calculating the necessary transverse reinforcement:
Ed · hƒ
sƒ = DIN EN 1992, 6.2.4 (4),Eq. 6.21
cotθƒ · ƒyd
2.72 · 0.15
sƒ = · 1002 = 5.79 cm2
1.619 · 434.78

13.5 Conclusion
This example is concerned with the calculation of the shear between web and flanges of T-sections. It
has been shown that the results are reproduced with good accuracy.
13.6 Literature

DCE-EN11: Shear at the interface between concrete cast
14 DCE-EN11: Shear at the interface between concrete

cast
Overview

Module(s): AQB
Input file(s): shear interface.dat

The problem consists of a T-beam section, as shown in Fig. 14.1. The cs is designed for shear, the shear
at the interface between concrete cast at different times is considered and the required reinforcement is
determined.
beƒ ƒ
hƒ 
VEd
h d
Shear section 
zs
As1 As1
d1
b

This example is concerned with the shear design of T-sections, for the ultimate limit state. The content
of this problem is covered by the following parts of DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 [1]:

 new concrete anchorage

NEd b
h2 ≤ 10d
45◦ ≤ α ≤ 90◦ α
≤ 30◦ VEd b
h1 ≤ 10d
 old concrete anchorage
Figure 14.2: Indented Construction Joint - Examples of Interfaces
A
σ ƒtk,c
ƒyk
ƒyd = ƒyk / γs
B A Idealised
B Design

The T-section, with properties as defined in Table 14.1, is to be designed for shear, with respect to DIN
EN 1992-1-1:2004 (German National Annex) [1], [2]. The reference calculation steps [4] are presented
in the next section and the results are given in Table 14.2.
C 20/ 25 h = 135.0 cm Vz = 800 kN
B 500A hƒ = 29cm My = 2250 kNm
d1 = 7.0 cm
b = 40 cm , beƒ ƒ = 250 cm
As1 = 1.0 cm2
zs = 95.56 cm

Table 14.2: Results
s [cm2 / m] SOF. Ref.
state  7.04 7.07

state  only V 4.89 4.90
state  V + M 4.99 4.99


Material:

Steel: γs = 1.15

MP ƒyd = ƒyk / γs = 500/ 1.15 = 434.78 MP
3.2.7: (2), Fig. 3.8
σsd = 456.52 MP

T V·S
τ= =
b y · b
where S is the static moment of the separated area
S = h · b · (zs − h / 2) = 0.18058 m3
0.8 · 0.18058
τ= = 2.1669 MP
0.16667 · 0.4
0.8 · 0.18058
T = = 0.86676 MN/ m = 866.76 kN/ m
0.16667
The shear section with a length of 0.4
m is split into two equal parts with b =
0.2 m T = 866.76 / 2 = 433.38 kN/ m
State :
The associated design shear flow VEd Design Load:

is:
VEd = T = 433.38 kN/ m
Ed = τ = 2.1669 MP

1/ 3
(NDP) 6.2.2 (1): Eq. 6.2a: Design value VRd,c = CRd,c · k · (100 · ρ1 · ƒck ) + 0.12 · σcp · b · d
not requiring design shear reinforce- 1/ 3
ment
Rd,c = CRd,c · k · (100 · ρ1 · ƒck ) + 0.12 · σcp
As
ρ1 = = 0.0 → Rd,c = 0.0
b d
with a minimum of
VRd,c,mn = νmn + 0.12 · σcp · b · d

(NDP) 6.2.2 (1): Eq. 6.2b
Rd,c,mn = νmn + 0.12 · σcp

1/ 2
(NDP) 6.2.2 (1): Eq. 6.3bDE νmn = (0.0375/ γc ) · k 3/ 2 · ƒck = 0.20833 MP

Rd,c,mn = 0.20833 → Rd,c = 0.20833 MP
Ed > Rd,c → shear reinforcement is required
Ed ≤ Rd 6.2.5 (1): Eq. 6.23: The design shear

stress at the interface should satisfy this
Rd = c · ƒctd + μ · σn + ρ · ƒyd · (1.2 · μ · sin α + cos α) (NDP) 6.2.5 (1): Eq. 6.25
and Rd ≤ 0.5 · ν · ƒcd Maximum shear stress Rd,m

(NDP) 6.2.5 (1): ν = 0.70 for indented
Rd,m = 0.5 · ν · ƒcd = 4.9585 MP surface
c = 0.50 and μ = 0.9 for indented surface 6.2.5 (2): c, μ: factors depending on the
roughness of the interface
ƒctd = αct · ƒctk;0.05 / γc (NDP) 3.1.6 (2)P: Eq. 3.16
αct = 0.85
ƒctd = 0.85 · 1.80 / 1.5 = 1.02 3.1.2 (3): Tab. 3.1 - Strength for con-
crete: ƒctk;0.05 = 1.8 MP:
s s
Rd = 0.5 · 1.02 + 0 + · 435 · (1.2 · 0.9 · 1 + 0) ρ= : area of reinforcement cross-
0.2 · 1.0 b · 
ing interface / area of joint
s
Rd = 0.51 + · 469.56 = 2.1669
0.2
s = 7.07 cm2 / m
State  only shear force V:
Design Load:
From the calculated inner lever arms for the two states we get a ratio:
z
= 0.7664
z
The associated design shear flow VEd is:
VEd = 0.7664 · 433.38 = 332.15 kN/ m
and Ed = 332.15/ 0.2 = 1.66 MP
Following the same calculation steps as for state  we have:
Rd,c = 0.20833 MP (as above)
Ed ≤ Rd
Rd = c · ƒctd + μ · σn + ρ · ƒyd · (1.2 · μ · sin α + cos α)

s
Rd = 0.5 · 1.02 + 0 + · 435 · (1.2 · 0.9 · 1 + 0)
0.2 · 1.0
s
Rd = 0.51 + · 469.56 = 1.66
0.2
s = 4.90 cm2 / m

State  shear force V and moment M:
MEds = 2250 kNm
MEds 2250 · 10−3

μEds = = = 0.03876
beƒ ƒ · d2 · ƒcd 2.5 · 1.282 · 14.17
Tab. 9.2 [3]: ω−Table for up to C50/ 60 ω = 0.03971 and ξ = 0.9766 (interpolated)
1
NEd = 0 As1 = · (ω · b · d · ƒcd + NEd ) = 39.44 cm2
σsd
z = mx d − cV, − 30 mm; d − 2 cV,

z = mx {1160; 1190} = 1190 mm
Design Load:
The shear section with a length of 0.4 T = V / z = 800 / 1.19 = 672.268 kN/ m
m is split into two equal parts with b =
0.2 m T = 672.268 / 2 = 336.134 kN/ m
VEd = 336.134 kN/ m
and Ed = 336.134 / 0.2 = 1.68 MP
1/ 3
Rd,c = CRd,c · k · (100 · ρ1 · ƒck ) + 0.12 · σcp
(NDP) 6.2.2 (1): CRd,c = 0.15/ γc CRd,c = 0.15/ γc = 0.1

v v
t 200 t 200
k =1+ =1+ = 1.3953 < 2.0
d 1280
As 39.44
ρ1 = = = 0.007703 < 0.02
b d 40 · 128
1/ 3
Rd,c = 0.1 · 1.3953 · (100 · 0.007703 · 25) +0
Rd,c = 0.373229 MP
Rd = c · ƒctd + μ · σn + ρ · ƒyd · (1.2 · μ · sin α + cos α)

s
Rd = 0.5 · 1.02 + 0 + · 435 · (1.2 · 0.9 · 1 + 0)
0.2 · 1.0
s
Rd = 0.51 + · 469.56 = 1.68
0.2
s = 4.99 cm2 / m

14.5 Conclusion
This example shows the calculation of the required reinforcement for a T-section under shear at the
interface between concrete cast at different times. It has been shown that the results are reproduced
with excellent accuracy. Small deviations occur because AQUA calculates (by using FEM analysis) the
shear stresses more accurate compared to the reference example.
14.6 Literature


DCE-EN12: Crack width calculation of reinforced beam acc. DIN EN 1992-1-1
15 DCE-EN12: Crack width calculation of reinforced

beam acc. DIN EN 1992-1-1
Overview

Module(s): AQB
Input file(s): crack widths.dat

The problem consists of a rectangular section, asymmetrically reinforced, as shown in Fig. 15.1. Differ-
ent loading conditions are examined, always consisting of a bending moment MEd , and in addition with
or without a compressive or tensile axial force NEd . The crack width is determined.
As0
h d z MEd
NEd
As

This example is concerned with the control of crack widths. The content of this problem is covered by
the following parts of DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 [1]:
• Basic assumptions for calculation of crack widths (Section 7.3.2, 7.3.3, 7.3.4)

A
ϕ h−
c B

ε2 = 0
h d
A C
E D
hc,eƒ
B ε1 5(c + ϕ/ 2)
top branch, as defined in DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 [1] (Section 3.2.7).

The rectangular cross-section, with properties as defined in Table 15.1, is to be designed for crack
width, with respect to DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 (German National Annex) [1] [2]. The calculation steps
with different loading conditions and calculated with different sections of DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 are
presented below and the results are given in Table 15.2.
C 25/ 30 h = 100.0 cm NEd = 0 or ±300 kN
B 500A d = 96.0 cm MEd = 562.5 kNm
b = 30.0 cm
ϕs = 25.0 mm, As = 24.50 cm2
ϕs0 = 12.0 mm, As0 = 2.26 cm2
k = 0.3 mm
Table 15.2: Results
Case Load As given [cm2 ] Result SOF. Ref.
 MEd , NEd = 0 24.50 As,req [cm2 ] 6.93 6.93
σs [MP] 207.85 207.85
 MEd , NEd = 300 24.50 As,req [cm2 ] 10.39 10.39
 MEd , NEd = −300 24.50 As,req [cm2 ] 4.04 4.04

Case Load As given [cm2 ] Result SOF. Ref.
V MEd , NEd = 0 24.50 As [cm2 ] passed with
given reinforcement
σs [MP] 440.57 440.53
V MEd , NEd = 0 12.0 As [cm2 ] not passed with
given reinforcement
→ new: 14.54 σs [MP] 436.30 436.28
V MEd , NEd = 0 24.50 k [mm] 0.13 0.13


Material:

factors for materials Steel: γs = 1.15
Tab. 3.1 : Strength for concrete ƒck = 25 MP

MP
3.2.7: (2), Fig. 3.8 ƒyd = ƒyk / γs = 500/ 1.15 = 434.78 MP
Design Load:
MEd = 562.5 kNm
NEd = 0.0 or ±300 kN
7.3.2: If crack control is required, a min- Minimum reinforcement areas

imum amount of bonded reinforcement
is required to control cracking in areas • Case : MEd , NEd = 0.0
where tension is expected
7.3.2 (2): Eq. 7.1: As,mn minimum area As,mn · σs = kc · k · ƒct,eƒ ƒ · Act
of reinforcing steel within tensile zone
(NDP) 7.3.2 (2): ƒct,eƒ ƒ mean value of ƒct,eƒ ƒ = ƒctm ≥ 3.0 MP
concrete tensile strength
When the cracking time can’t be placed ƒct,eƒ ƒ = 2.6 < 3.0 MP → ƒct,eƒ ƒ = 3.0 MP
with certainty in the first 28 days then
ƒct,eƒ ƒ ≥ 3.0 MP for normal concrete
Tab. 3.1: ƒctm = 2.6 MP for C 25
Act = b · heƒ ƒ = 0.3 · 0.5 = 0.15 m2
7.3.2 (2): Act is the area of concrete
within tensile zone, for pure bending of
a rectangular section its height is h/ 2 fct,eff
heƒ ƒ = h/ 2
7.3.2 (2): Eq. 7.2: kc for bending of

rectangular sections
σc

kc = 0.4 · 1 − ≤1
7.3.2 (2): Eq. 7.4: σc mean stress of k1 · (h/ h∗ ) · ƒct,eƒ ƒ
the concrete
σc = NEd / (b · h) = 0.0 → kc = 0.4
7.3.2 (2): h is the lesser value of b, h
h = min {300, 1000} = 300 mm k = 0.8 for h ≤ 300
7.3.2 (NA.5): Eq. NA.7.5.2: For deter-
mination of the reinforcement stress the ϕs = ϕ∗
s
· ƒct,eƒ ƒ / 2.9 N/ mm2
maximum bar diameter has to be modi-
fied ϕ∗
s
= 25 · 2.9 / 3.0 = 24.16667
defined in [1] 3.2.7:(2), Fig. 3.8.


Ç
σs = k · 3.48 · 106 / ϕ∗
s
= 207.846 MP (NDP) 7.3.3 Tab. 7.2DE (a)
where k = 0.3 m the prescribed
maximum crack width
As,req = 0.4 · 0.8 · 3.0 · 0.15 · 104 / 207.846 = 6.928cm2
• Case : NEd = 300 kN
As,mn · σs = kc · k · ƒct,eƒ ƒ · Act 7.3.2 (2): Eq. 7.1: As,mn minimum area
ƒct,eƒ ƒ = ƒctm ≥ 3.0 MP
ƒct,eƒ ƒ = 2.6 < 3.0 MP → ƒct,eƒ ƒ = 3.0 MP Tab. 3.1: ƒctm = 2.6 MP for C 25
Act = b · heƒ ƒ = 0.15 m2 7.3.2 (2): Act is the area of concrete

within tensile zone
NEd 300 · 103
σc = = = 1.0 MP 7.3.2 (2): Eq. 7.4: σc mean stress of
b·h 300 · 1000 the concrete, tensile stress σc < 0
k = 0.8 for h ≤ 300 7.3.2 (2): h is the lesser value of b, h

h = min {300, 1000} = 300 mm
ϕs = ϕ∗
s
· ƒct,eƒ ƒ / 2.9 N/ mm2 (NDP) 7.3.2 (NA.5): Eq. NA.7.5.2:
For determination of the reinforcement
ϕ∗
s
= 25 · 2.9 / 3.0 = 24.16667 stress the maximum bar diameter has
to be modified
Ç
σs = k · 3.48 · 106 / ϕ∗
s
= 207.846 MP (NDP) 7.3.3 Tab. 7.2DE (a)
σc maximum crack width

kc = 0.4 · 1 − ≤1 7.3.2 (2): Eq. 7.2: kc for bending with
k1 · (h/ h∗ ) · ƒct,eƒ ƒ axial force of rectangular sections
k1 = 2 · h∗ / (3 · h) = 2/ 3 h∗ = 1.0 m for h ≥ 1.0 m

k1 = 2 · h∗ / (3 · h) if NEd tensile force
1.0

kc = 0.4 · 1 + = 0.6 ≤ 1 7.3.2 (2): Eq. 7.1: Tensile stress σc < 0
(2/ 3) · 1 · 3.0
As,req = 0.6 · 0.8 · 3.0 · 0.15 · 104 / 207.846 = 10.39cm2
• Case : NEd = −300 kN
As,mn · σs = kc · k · ƒct,eƒ ƒ · Act 7.3.2 (2): Eq. 7.1: As,mn minimum area
Act = b · heƒ ƒ 7.3.2 (2): Act is the area of concrete

within tensile zone
The height of the tensile zone is determined through the stresses:
NEd 300 · 103

σc = = = 1.0 MP 7.3.2 (2): Eq. 7.4: σc mean stress of the
b·h 300 · 1000 concrete, compressive stress σc > 0
σ = ƒct,eƒ ƒ = 3.0 MP
3.0 · 50
⇒ heƒ ƒ = = 37.5cm
3.0 + 1.0
Act = 0.3 · 0.375 = 0.1125 m2
k = 0.8 for h ≤ 300 7.3.2 (2): h is the lesser value of b, h

h = min {300, 1000} = 300 mm
(NDP) 7.3.2 (NA.5): Eq. NA.7.5.2:

For determination of the reinforcement
stress the maximum bar diameter has
to be modified
ϕs = ϕ∗
s
· ƒct,eƒ ƒ / 2.9 N/ mm2
ϕ∗
s
= 25 · 2.9 / 3.0 = 24.16667
Ç
(NDP) 7.3.3 Tab. 7.2DE (a) σs = k · 3.48 · 106 / ϕ∗
s
= 207.846 MP
maximum crack width σc

7.3.2 (2): Eq. 7.2: kc for bending with kc = 0.4 · 1 − ≤1
axial force of rectangular sections k1 · (h/ h∗ ) · ƒct,eƒ ƒ
h∗ = 1.0 m for h ≥ 1.0 m k1 = 1.5

k1 = 1.5 if NEd compressive force
1.0

kc = 0.4 · 1 − = 0.3111 ≤ 1
1.5 · 1 · 3.0
As,req = 0.3111 · 0.8 · 3.0 · 0.1125 · 104 / 207.846 = 4.04 cm2
7.3.3: Control of cracking without direct Control of cracking without direct calculation
calculation
Examples calculated in this section are • Case V: NEd = 0.0
w.r.t. Table 7.2DE, here Table 7.3N is
not relevant
(NDP) 7.3.2 (2): ƒct,eƒ ƒ mean value of
Tab. 3.1: ƒctm = 2.6 MP for C 25
ƒct,eƒ ƒ = 2.6 < 3.0 MP → ƒct,eƒ ƒ = 3.0 MP
(NDP) 7.3.3: Eq. 7.7.1DE: The maxi-
σs · As ƒct,eƒ ƒ
mum bar diameters should be modified
ϕs = ϕ∗
s
· ≥ ϕ∗
s
·
for load action 4(h − d) · b · 2.9 2.9
As = 24.5 cm2 prescribed reinforce-
ment 264.06 · 24.50
ϕs = 25 mm = ϕ∗
s
· = ϕ∗
s
· 4.6476
4(100 − 96) · 30 · 2.9
→ ϕ∗
s
= 5.3791 mm
Ç
(NDP) 7.3.3 Tab. 7.2DE (a) σs = k · 3.48 · 106 / ϕ∗
s
= 440.53 MP
maximum crack width σs = 264.06 < 440.53 MP
which corresponds to the value calculated in SOFiSTiK [ssr]
→ crack width control is passed with given reinforcement.
In case the usage factor becomes 1.0 then the stresses σs are equal,
as it can be seen in Case V below.
ƒct,eƒ ƒ 3.0
and ϕs = 25 mm > ϕ∗
s
· = 5.3791 · = 5.5646
2.9 2.9
also control the steel stress with respect to the calculated strains
εs = 0.440 + 1.913 · (0.50 − 0.04) = 1.31998
→ σs = 0.00131998 · 200000 = 264.0 MP
or
(NDP) 7.3.3 Tab. 7.2DE (a) from Tab. 7.2DE and for σs = 264.04 ≈ 260.0 MP
(NDP) 7.3.3: Eq. 7.7.1DE: The maxi- → ϕ∗
s
= 15 mm → ϕs = ϕ∗
s
· ≥ ϕ∗
s
·
mum bar diameters should be modified 4(h − d) · b · 2.9 2.9
for load action

264.06 · 24.50
ϕs = 15 · = 69.69 mm > 25 mm
4(100 − 96) · 30 · 2.9
→ crack width control is passed with given reinforcement.
• Case V: NEd = 0.0, As = 12.0 cm2
In this case, the prescribed reinforcement is decreased from As =

24.5 cm2 to As = 12.0 cm2 in order to examine a case where the
the crack width control is not passed with the given reinforcement.
ƒct,eƒ ƒ = ƒctm ≥ 3.0 MP (NDP) 7.3.2 (2): ƒct,eƒ ƒ mean value of
from Tab. 7.2DE and for σs = 509.15 ≈ 510.0 MP (NDP) 7.3.3 Tab. 7.2DE (a)
σs · As
→ ϕ∗
s
≈ 3.9 mm → ϕs = ϕ∗
s
· (NDP) 7.3.3: Eq. 7.7.1DE: The maxi-
4(h − d) · b · 2.9 mum bar diameters should be modified
for load action
509.15 · 12.0
ϕs = 3.9 · = 17.12 mm < 25 mm
4(100 − 96) · 30 · 2.9
→ crack width control is not passed with given reinforcement.
→ start increasing reinforcement in order to be in the limits of admissible

steel stresses
from Tab. 7.2DE and for σs = 436.43 MP (NDP) 7.3.3 Tab. 7.2DE (a)
σs · As
→ ϕ∗
s
≈ 5.6 mm → ϕs = ϕ∗
s
· 7.3.3: Eq. 7.7.1DE: The maximum bar
4(h − d) · b · 2.9 diameters should be modified for load
action
436.43 · 14.54
ϕs = 5.6 · = 25.45 mm ≥ 25 mm
4(100 − 96) · 30 · 2.9
→ crack width control passed with additional reinforcement.
If we now input as prescribed reinforcement the reinforcement that is

calculated in order to pass crack control, i.e. As = 14.54 cm2 we get
a steel stress of σs = 436.36 MP which gives
436.36 · 14.54
ϕs = 25 mm = ϕ∗
s
·
4(100 − 96) · 30 · 2.9
→ ϕ∗
s
= 5.4849 mm
Ç
σs = k · 3.48 · 106 / ϕ∗
s
(NDP) 7.3.3 Tab. 7.2DE (a)
p maximum crack width
σs = 0.3 · 3.48 · 106 / 5.4849 = 436.28 MP
Here we can notice that the stresses are equal leading to a usage
factor of 1.0
Control of cracking with direct

calculation 7.3.4: Control of cracking with direct cal-
culation

• Case V: NEd = 0.0
7.3.4 (1): αe is the ratio Es / Ecm αe = Es / Ecm = 200000 / 31476 = 6.354
7.3.4 (1): Eq. 7.10: where A0p and ρp,eƒ ƒ = (As + ξ21 · A0p ) / Ac,eƒ ƒ
Ac,eƒ ƒ are defined in 7.3.2 (3)
7.3.2 (3): hc,eƒ see Fig. 7.1DE (d) Ac,eƒ ƒ = hc,eƒ · b
h / d1 = 100/ 4 = 25.00 → hc,eƒ / d1 = 3.25
Ac,eƒ ƒ = (3.25 · 4) · 30 = 13 · 30 = 390 cm2
7.3.2 (3): where A0p is the area of pre or A0p = 0.0 cm2
post-tensioned tendons within Ac,eƒ ƒ
ρp,eƒ ƒ = 24.50 / 390 = 0.06282
ƒct,eƒ ƒ
σs − kt · · (1 + αe · ρp,eƒ ƒ )
ρp,eƒ ƒ σs
7.3.4 (1): Eq. 7.9: the difference of the εsm − εcm = ≥ 0.6 ·
mean strain in the reinforcement and in Es Es
the concrete
2/ 3
(NDP) 7.3.2 (2): ƒct,eƒ ƒ mean value of ƒct,eƒ ƒ = ƒctm = 0.30 · ƒck = 2.565 ≈ 2.6 MP
concrete tensile strength, here no mini-
mum value of ƒct,eƒ ƒ ≥ 3.0 MP is set ƒct,eƒ ƒ = 2.6 < 3.0 MP → ƒct,eƒ ƒ = 3.0 MP
Tab. 3.1: ƒctm = 2.6 MP for C 25 or
2/ 3
ƒctm = 0.30 · ƒck = 2.565 MP 2.565
264.06 − 0.4 · · (1 + 6.354 · 0.06282)
0.06282
kt : factor dependent on the duration of εsm − εcm =
the load, kt = 0.4 for long term loading 200000
264.06
εsm − εcm = 1.2060 · 10−3 > 0.6 · = 0.79218 · 10−3
200000
ϕ σs · ϕ
(NDP) 7.3.4 (3): Eq. 7.11: sr,m is the sr,m = ≤
maximum crack spacing 3.6 · ρp,eƒ ƒ 3.6 · ƒct,eƒ ƒ
25
sr,m = = 110.545 mm
3.6 · 0.06282
σs · ϕ
sr,m ≤ = 611.25 mm
3.6 · ƒct,eƒ ƒ
7.3.4 (1): Eq. 7.8: k the crack width k = sr,m · (εsm − εcm ) = 110.545 · 1.2060 · 10−3
k = 0.133 < 0.3 mm → Check for crack width passed with given
reinforcements
Stress limitation
7.2 (5) σm,t = k3 · ƒyk
σm,t = 0.80 · 500 MP
σm,t = 400 MP

15.5 Conclusion
This example shows the calculation of crack widths. Various ways of reference calculations are demon-
strated, in order to compare the SOFiSTiK results to. It has been shown that the results are reproduced
with excellent accuracy.
15.6 Literature


DCE-EN13: Design of a Steel I-section for Bending and Shear
16 DCE-EN13: Design of a Steel I-section for Bending

and Shear
Overview

Module(s): AQB, AQUA
Input file(s): usage steel.dat

The problem consists of a steel I- section, as shown in Fig. 16.1. The cross-section is designed for
bending and shear.
b
tƒ
r
t
Mz
Vy
h y

This example is concerned with the resistance of steel cross-sections for bending and shear. The content
of this problem is covered by the following parts of EN 1993-1-1:2005 [7]:
• Structural steel (Section 3.2 )
• Resistance of cross-sections (Section 6.2)

The I-section, a HEA 200, with properties as defined in Table 16.1, is to be designed for an ultimate
moment Mz and a shear force Vy , with respect to EN 1993-1-1:2005 [7]. The calculation steps are

presented below and the results are given in Table 16.2. The utilisation level of allowable plastic forces
are calculated and compared to SOFiSTiK results.
S 235 HEA 200 Vy = 200 or 300 kN
b = 20.0 cm Mz = 20 kNm
h = 19.0 cm
tƒ = 1.0 cm, t = 0.65 cm
r = 1.8 cm
Table 16.2: Results
Case Result SOF. SOF. Ref.

(EC3 Tables) (FEM)
Vp,Rd,y [kN] 542.71 611.85 542.71
Vp,Rd,z [kN] 245.32 228.38 245.32
Util. level Vy 0.369 0.326 0.369


Util. level Mz 0.418 0.418 0.418
Util. level Vy 0.553 0.490 0.553


Util. level Mz 0.422 0.417 0.422


Material:
Structural Steel S 235
ƒy = 235 N/ mm2 Tab. 3.1 : Nominal values of yield

strength ƒy and ultimate tensile strength
Cross-sectional properties: ƒ for hot rolled structural steel.
Wp,y = 429.5 cm3 Plastic section modulus of HEA 200

w.r.t. y− and z−axis
Wp,z = 203.8 cm3
Where the shear force is present allowance should be made for its effect
on the moment resistance. This effect may be neglected, where the 6.2.8: Bending and shear
shear force is less than half the plastic shear resistance.
VEd ≤ 0.5 Vp,Rd 6.2.8 (2)
p
AV · ƒy / 3
Vp,Rd = 6.2.6 (2): Eq. 6.18: Vp,Rd the design
γM0 plastic shear resistance
AV the shear area w.r.t. y− and z−axis,
AVy = 2 · Aƒ nge (in the y−direction only contribution the two flanges ) respectively
AVy = 2 · tƒ · b = 2 · 1 · 20 = 40 cm2
AVz = A − 2 · b · tƒ + (t + 2 · r) · tƒ but not less than η · h · t
AVz = 53.8 − 2 · 20 · 1 + (0.65 + 2 · 1.8) · 1 6.2.6 (3): The shear area AV may be
taken as follows for rolled I-sections with
h = h − 2 · tƒ = 17 cm load parallel to the web
AVz = 18.08 cm2 > 1 · 17 · 0.65 = 11.05 6.2.6 (3): η may be conservatively taken
equal to 1.0
p
40 · 23.5 / 3 6.1 (1): Partial factor γM0 = 1.00 is
Vp,Rd,y = = 542.70 kN recommended
1.00
p
18.08 · 23.5 / 3
Vp,Rd,z = = 245.30 kN
1.00
a) Finite Element Method:
• Case :
According to FEM analysis:
Vp,Rd,y = 611.85 kN
Vp,Rd,z = 228.38 kN
we have:
VEd = Vy = 200 kN, Mz = 20 kNm

1 The sections mentioned in the margins refer to EN 1993-1-1:2005 [7] unless other-
wise specified.

VEd 200
= = 0.3268 < 0.5
Vp,Rd,y 611.85
→ no reduction of moment resistance due to shear

Wp,z · ƒy 203.8 · 23.5
6.2.8 (5): Eq. 6.30: The reduced design Mz,V,Rd = = = 4789 kNcm = 47.89 kNm
plastic resistance moment (for ρ = 0) γM0 1
Mz 20
= = 0.418
Mz,V,Rd 47.89
• Case :
VEd 300
= = 0.490 < 0.5
Vp,Rd,y 611.85

Wp,z · ƒy
Mz,V,Rd =
γM0
Mz,V,Rd = 47.89kNm
Mz 20
= = 0.418
Mz,V,Rd 47.89
b) EC3 Tables:
Vp,Rd,y = 542.71 kN
Vp,Rd,z = 245.32 kN
• Case :
VEd 200
= = 0.368 < 0.5
Vp,Rd,y 542.71

Wp,z · ƒy 203.8 · 23.5
6.2.8 (5): Eq. 6.30: The reduced design Mz,V,Rd = = = 4789 kNcm = 47.89 kNm
plastic resistance moment (for ρ = 0) γM0 1
Mz 20
= = 0.418
Mz,V,Rd 47.89
• Case :
VEd 300
= = 0.552 > 0.5
Vp,Rd,y 542.71
6.2.8 (3): The reduced moment resis- → reduction of moment resistance due to shear
tance should be taken as the design re-
sistance of the cross-section, calculated
using a reduced yield strength (1 − ρ) ·
ƒy for the shear area
2
2 · VEd

ρ= −1
Vp,Rd,y
2
2 · 300

= −1
542.71
= 0.011143
Wp,z · ƒy
Mz,V,Rd = (1 − ρ) ·
γM0
Mz,V,Rd = (1 − 0.0111435) · 47.89 = 47.35 kNm
Mz 20
= = 0.4223
Mz,V,Rd 47.356

16.5 Conclusion
This example shows the calculation of the resistance of steel cross-section for bending and shear. It has
y Vy Vy
a) FEM Analysis (SOFiSTiK) a) Reference
Figure 16.2: Visualisation of areas and approach for calculating the Vp,Rd,y
Vz Vz
a) FEM Analysis (SOFiSTiK) a) Reference
Figure 16.3: Visualisation of areas and approach for calculating the Vp,Rd,z
By using FEM analysis the Vp,Rd,y and Vp,Rd,z values are deviating from the reference values. The
reason behind this difference is shown in Fig. 16.2, 16.3, 16.4 and 16.5.
FEM analysis represents a real physical behaviour, because as shown in Fig. 16.2 and 16.3 the calcu-
lated area is taken approximately for the reference Vp,Rd,y and Vp,Rd,z values. The results by using
FEM analysis are more accurate in reality than the reference example.

SOFiSTiK AG * Bruckmannring 38 * 85764 Oberschleißheim SOFiSTiK AG * Bruckmannring 38 * 85764 Oberschleißheim Page 1 Page 1
SOFiSTiK 2018 WINGRAF - GRAPHICS FOR FINITE ELEMENTS (V 19.00) SOFiSTiK 2018 WINGRAF - GRAPHICS FOR FINITE ELEMENTS2016-06-03
(V 19.00) 2016-06-03
0.375
0.366
0.356
0.347
0.337
0.328
0.319
0.309
0.300
-0.05
0.291
-0.05
0.281
0.272
0.262
0.253
0.244
0.234
0.225
0.216
0.206
0.197
0.00
0.00
0.187
0.178
0.169
0.159
0.150
0.141
0.131
0.122
0.112
0.103
0.05
0.05
0.094
0.084
0.075
0.066
0.056
0.047
0.037
0.028
0.019
0.009
0.15 0.10 0.05 0.00 -0.05 0.15 -0.10 0.10 -0.15 0.05 m 0.00 -0.05 -0.10 m
0.000
Shear stress of the Cross section in Element, Loadcase 2 Vy = 1.0 , 1 cm 3D = 0.866 MPa (Max=0.377)
Shear stress of the Cross section from middle of element, LoadcaseM21Vy
: 1.23
Y X
Z
Figure 16.4: Vp,Rd,y - SOFiSTiK Results (FEM) Y X
Z
= 1.0 , from 1.6442e-04 to 0.375 step 0.0094 MPa M 1 : 1.23
SOFiSTiK AG * Bruckmannring 38 * 85764 Oberschleißheim SOFiSTiK AG * Bruckmannring 38 * 85764 Oberschleißheim Page 1 Page 1
SOFiSTiK 2018 WINGRAF - GRAPHICS FOR FINITE ELEMENTS (V 19.00) SOFiSTiK 2018 WINGRAF - GRAPHICS FOR FINITE ELEMENTS 2016-06-03
(V 19.00) 2016-06-03
0.895
0.870
0.848
0.825
0.803
0.781
0.759
0.736
0.714
-0.05
0.692
-0.05
0.669
0.647
0.625
0.602
0.580
0.558
0.535
0.513
0.491
0.469
0.00
0.00
0.446
0.424
0.402
0.379
0.357
0.335
0.312
0.290
0.268
0.245
0.05
0.05
0.223
0.201
0.178
0.156
0.134
0.112
0.089
0.067
0.045
0.022
0.15 0.10 0.05 0.00 0.15
-0.05 0.10
-0.10 0.05
-0.15 m 0.00 -0.05 -0.10 m
0.002
Y X
Z
Shear stress of the Cross section in Element, Loadcase 3 Vz = 1.0 , 1 cm 3D = 2.16 MPa
Figure 16.5: Vp,Rd,z - SOFiSTiK Results (FEM) Y X
Z
Shear stress of the Cross section from middle of element, Loadcase M
(Max=0.895) 3 Vz
1 : =1.23
1.0 , from 0.0024 to 0.895 step 0.0223 MPa M 1 : 1.23
16.6 Literature
[8] Schneider. Bautabellen für Ingenieure. 21th. Bundesanzeiger Verlag, 2014.


DCE-EN14: Classification of Steel Cross-sections
17 DCE-EN14: Classification of Steel Cross-sections
Overview

Module(s): AQB
Input file(s): class steel.dat

The problem consists of a steel I- section, as shown in Fig. 17.1. The cross-section is classified for
bending and compression.
tƒ
r
t
h y

This example is concerned with the classification of steel cross-sections. Section classification is a vital
step in checking the suitability of a section to sustain any given design actions. It is concerned with the
local buckling susceptibility and is invovled on the resistance checks of the section. The content of this
problem is covered by the following parts of EN 1993-1-1:2004 [7]:
• Classification of cross-sections (Section 5.5)
• Cross-section requirements for plastic global analysis (Section 5.6)
• Buckling resistance of members (Section 6.3)

A diagrammatic representation of the four classes of section is given in Fig. 17.2, where a cross-section
is subjected to an increasing major axis bending moment until failure [9].
Bending Moment
Class 1: Fullly plastic moment is reached

Fully Plastic
Moment
Class 2: Fullly plastic moment reached but unloading occurs
Class 3: Partial yielding occurs, parts of section still elastic
Class 4: Local buckling causes unloading in the elastic range
Curvature
Figure 17.2: Idealized Moment Curvature Behaviour for Four Classes of Cross-sections

The I-section, a UB 457x152x74, with properties as defined in Table 17.1, is to be classified for bending
and compression, with respect to EN 1993-1-1:2005 [7]. For the compression case, an axial load of N =
3000 kN is applied and for the bending case a moment of My = 500 kNm. In AQB the classification
of the cross-sections is done taking into account the stress levels and the respective design request.
Thus, a Class 1 cross-section can be reached, only if a nonlinear design (plastic-plastic) is requested
and if the loading is such as to cause the yield stress to be exceeded. Therefore, in order to derive the
higher Class possible for this cross-section, we consider these loads, which will cause higher stresses
than the yield stress. The calculation steps are presented below and the results are given in Table 17.2.
S 275 UB 457x152x74 N = −3000 kN

b = 154.4 mm My = 500 kNm
h = 462.0 mm
tƒ = 17.0 mm
t = 9.6 mm
r = 10.2 mm

Table 17.2: Results
Case Part Result SOF. Ref.

Flange 3.66 3.66
c/ t
Web 42.46 42.46
Flange 1 1
Bending Class
Web 1 1
Flange 1 1
Compression Class
Web 4 4


Material:

Tab. 3.1 : Nominal values of yield
strength ƒy and ultimate tensile strength ƒy = 275 N/ mm2 for maximum thickness ≤ 40 mm
ƒ for hot rolled structural steel.
ε = 235/ ƒy = 0.924
Æ
Tab. 5.2: Maximum width-to-thickness
ratios for compression parts
The role of cross-section classification is to identify the extent to which
the resistance and rotation capacity of cross-sections is limited by its
Tab. 5.5.1(1): Classification of cross- local buckling resistance.
section basis
• Bending:
Tab. 5.2 (sheet 2): Outstand flanges For the flange: c = b/ 2 − t / 2 − r

5.5.2 (3): The classification depends on
the width to thickness ratio of the parts c / t = (154.4/ 2 − 9.6/ 2 − 10.2) / 17 = 3.66
subject to compression
Tab. 5.2 (sheet 2): Outstand flanges - c / t ≤ 9 ε ≤ 8.32
part subject to compression
→ Flange classification: Class 1
Tab. 5.2 (sheet 1): Internal compres- For the web: c = h − 2tƒ − 2r
sion parts
c / t = (462 − 2 · 17 − 2 · 10.2) / 9.6 = 42.46
Tab. 5.2 (sheet 1): Internal compres- c / t ≤ 72 ε ≤ 66.53

sion parts - part subject to bending
→ Web classification: Class 1
Overall classification for bending: Class 1
Class 1 cross-sections are those which can form a plastic hinge with
the rotation capacity required from plastic analysis without reduction of
5.5.2 (1): Classification the resistance.
• Compression:
For the flange as above
→ Flange classification: Class 1
For the web as above : c / t = 42.46
Tab. 5.2 (sheet 1): Internal compres- Class 3: c / t ≤ 42 ε ≤ 38.8

sion parts - part subject to compression
c / t = 42.46 > 38.8
Tab. 5.5.2 (8): A part which fails to sat-
isfy the limits of Class 3 should be taken
as Class 4
→ Web classification: Class 4
Tab. 5.5.2 (6): A cross-section is clas- Overall classification for bending: Class 4
sified according to the highest least
favourable class Class 4 cross-sections are those in which local buckling will occur be-
fore the attainment of yield stress in one or more parts of the cross-
5.5.2 (1): Classification section.
wise specified.

17.5 Conclusion
This example shows the classification of steel cross-sections for bending and compression. It has been
shown that the results are reproduced with excellent accuracy.
17.6 Literature
[9] Structural Eurocodes - Extracts from the structural Eurocodes for students of structural design.
BSI - British Standards Institution. 2007.


DCE-EN15: Buckling Resistance of Steel Members
18 DCE-EN15: Buckling Resistance of Steel Members
Overview

Module(s): BDK
Input file(s): buckling steel.dat

The problem consists of a simply supported beam with a steel I-section subject to uniform end moments,
as shown in Fig. 18.1. The cross-section is checked against buckling.
My
b
tƒ
r
t
h y
My

This example is concerned with the buckling resistance of steel members. Lateral torsional buckling
occurs in unrestrained, or inadequately restrained beams bent about the major axis and this causes the
compression flange to buckle and deflect sideways, thus inducing twisting of the section. The content of


The I-section, a UB 457x152x74, with properties as defined in Table 18.1, is to be ckecked for buckling,
with respect to EN 1993-1-1:2005 [7]. The calculation steps [9] are presented below and the results are
given in Table 18.2.
S 275 L=8m My = 150 kNm
E = 210000 N/ mm2 UB 457x152x74

h = 462.0 mm
b = 154.4 mm
tƒ = 17.0 mm
t = 9.6 mm
r = 10.2 mm
A = 94.48 cm2
z = 1046.5 cm4
T = 66.23 cm4
 = 516297.12 cm6
Table 18.2: Results
SOF. Ref.
Mcr [kNm] 154.05 154.26
λLT 1.704 1.703
LT 1.908 1.907
χLT 0.321 0.321
MEd / Mb,Rd (BDK) 1.046 1.045


Material:

Tab. 3.1 : Nominal values of yield
ƒy = 275 N/ mm2 for maximum thickness ≤ 40 mm strength ƒy and ultimate tensile strength
ƒ for hot rolled structural steel.
ε = 235/ ƒy = 0.924
Æ
Tab. 5.2: Maximum width-to-thickness
ratios for compression parts
Design Load:
MEd = 150kNm
The cross-section is classified as Class 1, as demonstrated in Bench-

mark DCE-EN14. Tab. 5.5: Classification of cross-section
Wp,y · ƒy
Mc,Rd = Mp,Rd,y = = 447.31 kNm 6.2.5 (2):Eq. 6.13: Bending resistance
γM0 Mc,Rd for Class 1 cross-section
p v 6.1 (1): γM0 = 1.00
π 2 E

π Ez GT u
Mcr = 1+
t
6.3.2.2 (2): Mcr , the elastic critical mo-
L GT L2 ment for ltb is based on gross cross sec-
tional properties
p v
3.142 · 108.42

3.14 · 2197.74 · 53.496 u Various empirical or approximate formu-
Mcr = 1+
t
lae exist for the determination of Mcr
8 53.496 · 82
Mcr = 154.26 kNm

v v
uW ƒ t 447.31
t y y
λLT = = = 1.703 6.3.2.2 (1): λLT non dimensional slen-
Mcr 154.26 derness for lateral torsional buckling
2
h i
LT = 0.5 1 + αLT λLT − λLT,0 + βλLT 6.3.2.3 (1): LT for rolled sections in
bending. Recommended values:
λLT,0 = 0.4 (maximum value)
h / b = 462/ 154.4 = 2.99 > 2
β = 0.75 (minimum value)
6.3.2.3 (1): Table 6.5: Recommenda-
for rolled I-sections and h / b > 2 → buckling curve c tion for the selection of ltb curve for
cross-sections using Eq. 6.57
for buckling curve c → αLT = 0.49 6.3.2.2 (2): Table 6.5: Recommenda-
tion values for imperfection factors αLT
LT = 0.5 1 + 0.49 1.703 − 0.4 + 0.75 · 1.7032 = 1.907

for ltb curves
1
χLT = r = 0.321 6.3.2.3 (1): Eq. 6.57: χLT reduction fac-
2
LT + 2LT − β λLT tor for ltb
1
but χLT = 0.321 ≤ 1.0 and χLT = 0.321 ≤ 2
= 0.345
λLT
ƒy
Mb,Rd = χLT Wy = 143.587 kNm 6.3.2.1 (3): Eq. 6.55: Mb,Rd The design
γM1 buckling resistance moment of laterally
unrestrained beam
MEd For Class 1 section Wy = Wp,y
= 1.045 → Beam fails in LTB
Mb,Rd 6.1 (1): γM1 = 1.00 recommended
value
wise specified.

18.5 Conclusion
This example shows the ckeck for lateral torsional buckling of steel members. It has been shown that
the results are reproduced with excellent accuracy.
18.6 Literature
[9] Structural Eurocodes - Extracts from the structural Eurocodes for students of structural design.
BSI - British Standards Institution. 2007.

DCE-EN17: Stress Calculation at a Rectangular Prestressed Concrete CS
19 DCE-EN17: Stress Calculation at a Rectangular Pre-

stressed Concrete CS
Overview

Module(s): AQB, TENDON
Input file(s): stress prestress.dat

The problem consists of a rectangular cross-section of prestressed concrete, as shown in Fig. 19.1. The
stresses developed at the section due to prestress and bending are verified.
h d My
Np
zp
Ap

This example is concerned with the design of prestressed concrete cs, subject to bending and prestress
force. The content of this problem is covered by the following parts of DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 [1]:
• Stress-strain curves for concrete and prestressing steel (Section 3.1.7, 3.3.6)
• Verification by the partial factor method - Design values (Section 2.4.2)
• Prestressing force (Section 5.10.2, 5.10.3)

NP / A NP · zp / W2 M/ W2
+ + =
zp
Ap
NP / A NP · zp / W1 M/ W1
Figure 19.2: Stress Distribution in Prestress Concrete Cross-section
In rectangular cs, which are prestressed and loaded, stress conditions are developed, as shown in Fig.
19.2, where the different contributions of the loadings can be seen. The design stress-strain diagrams
for prestressing steel is presented in Fig. 19.3, as defined in DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 [1] (Section 3.3.6).
A
σp
ƒpk
ƒp0,1k
ƒpd = ƒp0,1k / γs
B A Idealised
B Design
εp
Figure 19.3: Idealised and Design Stress-Strain Diagram for Prestressing Steel

The simply supported beam of Fig. 19.4, consists of a rectangular cross-section with properties as
defined in Table 19.1 and is prestressed and loaded with its own weight. A verification of the stresses is
performed in the middle of the span with respect to DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 (German National Annex) [1],
[2]. The geometry of the tendon can be visualised in Fig. 19.5. The calculation steps [4] are presented
below and the results are given in Table 19.2.
Material Properties Geometric Properties Loading (at  = 10 m)
C 35/ 45 h = 100.0 cm Mg = 1250 kNm
Y 1770 b = 100.0 cm Np = −3651.1 kN
d = 95.0 cm
L = 20.0 m

0.916
0.973
0.000
1
0.916 0.00
3572.3 0.057
0.917
3574.2
0.917 0.057
1.00
3576.1 0.057
0.918
3578.1
0.918 0.114
2.00
3580.2 0.057
0.919
3582.6
0.920 0.171
3.00
3585.6 0.055
0.920
3588.9
0.223
Material Properties
0.921 4.00
3592.4 0.050
0.922
3596.1
0.923 0.271
5.00
3600.0 0.045
0.924
3604.2
0.926 0.313
6.00
3608.5 0.038
0.927
3613.1
0.928 0.347
7.00
3618.0 0.031
0.929
3623.0
0.931 0.374
8.00
3628.3 0.022
0.932
3633.8
0.933 0.390
9.00
3639.5 0.011
0.935
10001 1001 10002 1002 10003 1003 10004 1004 10005 1005 10006 1006 10007 1007 10008 1008 10009 1009 10010
3645.4
0.396
2
0.937 10.00
L
3651.6 0.000
0.938
3657.8
0.940 0.390
11.00
Ap = 28.5 cm2
3663.8 -0.011
0.941
SOFiSTiK 2018 | VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks

3669.6
0.943 0.374
1.000 = 1368 N/mm2

12.00
3675.1 -0.022
0.944
Geometric Properties
3680.5 0.944
0.944 0.347
3682.2 13.00
3678.8 -0.031
0.942
3673.9
0.941 0.313
14.00
3669.2 -0.038
Figure 19.5: Tendon Geometry

0.940
3664.8
0.939 0.271
15.00
3660.6 -0.045
Figure 19.4: Simply Supported Beam
0.938
3656.6
0.937 0.223
16.00
-0.050
Figure 19.6: Prestress Forces and Stresses

3652.8
0.936
3649.2
0.935 0.171
17.00
3645.9 -0.055
0.934
3642.9
0.934 0.115
18.00
3640.4 -0.057
0.933
3638.2
0.933 0.057
19.00
3636.3 -0.057
0.932
10011 1010 10012 1011 10013 1012 10014 1013 10015 1014 10016 1015 10017 1016 10018 1017 10019 1018 10020
3634.3
0.000
3
20.00
-0.057
Loading (at  = 10 m)
0.944
0.932
117
Table 19.2: Results
Case CS Result SOF. Ref.

 0 σc,b [MP] −12.47 −12.47
My [kNm] −1435.91 −1435.91
 0 −4.82 −4.82
My [kNm] −185.91 −185.91
 1 −11.76 −11.76

My [kNm] −1406.11 −1406.11
V 1 −4.51 −4.51
My [kNm] −156.11 −156.11


Material:
Concrete: C 35/ 45 3.1: Concrete
Ecm = 34000 N/ mm2 3.1.2: Tab. 3.1: Ecm for C 35/ 45
Prestressing Steel: Y 1770 3.3: Prestressing Steel
Ep = 195000 N/ mm2 3.3.6 (3): Ep for wires
ƒpk = 1770 N/ mm2 3.3.2, 3.3.3: ƒpk Characteristic tensile

strength of prestressing steel
ƒp0,1k = 1520 N/ mm2
3.3.2, 3.3.3: ƒp0,1k 0.1% proof-stress of
prestressing steel, yield strength
Prestressing system: BBV L19 150 mm2
19 wires with area of 150 mm2 each, giving a total of Ap = 28.5 cm2
Cross-section:
Ac = 1.0 · 1.0 = 1 m2
Diameter of duct ϕdct = 97 mm
Ratio αE,p = Ep / Ecm = 195000 / 34000 = 5.74
Ac,netto = Ac − π · (ϕdct / 2)2 = 0.9926 m2
Ade = Ac + Ap · αE,p = 1.013 m2
The force applied to a tendon, i.e. the force at the active end during
tensioning, should not exceed the following value 5.10.2.1 (1)P: Prestressing force during
tensioning - Maximum stressing force
Pm = Ap · σp,m 5.10.2.1 (1)P: Eq. 5.41: Pm maximum
stressing force
where σp,m = min 0.80ƒpk ; 0.90ƒp0,1k

(NDP) 5.10.2.1 (1)P: σp,m maximum
stress applied to the tendon
Pm = Ap · 0.80 · ƒpk = 28.5 · 10−4 · 0.80 · 1770 = 4035.6 kN
Pm = Ap · 0.90 · ƒp0,1k = 28.5 · 10−4 · 0.90 · 1520 = 3898.8 kN
→ Pm = 3898.8 kN and σp,m = 1368 N/ mm2
The value of the initial prestress force at time t = t0 applied to the

concrete immediately after tensioning and anchoring should not exceed
the following value 5.10.3 (2): Prestress force
Pm0 () = Ap · σp,m0 () 5.10.3 (2): Eq. 5.43: Pm0 initial pre-
stress force at time t = t0
defined in [1] 3.3.6: Fig. 3.10, which can be seen in Fig 19.3.

where σp,m0 () = min 0.75ƒpk ; 0.85ƒp0,1k

(NDP) 5.10.3 (2): σp,m0 () stress in the
tendon immediately after tensioning or
transfer Pm0 = Ap · 0.75 · ƒpk = 28.5 · 10−4 · 0.75 · 1770 = 3783.4 kN
Pm0 = Ap · 0.85 · ƒp0,1k = 28.5 · 10−4 · 0.85 · 1520 = 3682.2 kN
→ Pm0 = 3682.2 kN and σp,m0 = 1292 N/ mm2
Further calculations for the distribution of prestress forces and stresses

along the beam are not in the scope of this Benchmark and will not
be described here. The complete diagram can be seen in Fig. 19.5,
after the consideration of losses at anchorage and due to friction, as
calculated by SOFiSTiK. There the values of σp,m = 1368 N/ mm2
and Pm0 = 3682.2 kN can be visualised.
Load Actions:
Self weight per length: γ = 25 kN/ m
→ g1 = γ · A = 25 · 1 = 25 kNm
DIN EN 1990/NA [10]: (NDP) A.1.3.1 Safety factors at ultimate limit state
(4): Tab. NA.A.1.2 (B): Partial factors
for actions
(NDP) 2.4.2.2 (1): Partial factors for pre-
Actions (unfavourable) Safety factor at final state
stress • permanent γG = 1.35
• prestress γP = 1.00
Combination coefficients at serviceability limit state
g1 = 25 kNm: for rare, frequent and quasi-permanent combination

(for stresses)
At  = 10.0 m middle of the span:
Mg = g1 · L2 / 8 = 1250 kNm
Np = Pm0 ( = 10.0 m) = −3653.0 kN (from SOFiSTiK)
The concrete stresses may be deter- Calculation of stresses σc,b at  = 10.0 m middle of the span:
mined for each construction stage un-
der the total quasi-permanent combina- Position of the tendon: z = 0, 3901 m
tion σc {G + Pm0 + ψ2 · Q}
In this Benchmark no variable load Q is
• Case : Prestress at construction stage section 0 (P cs0)
examined
−σc
Mp
Np
zp
Pm0,=10
+σc
Np = −3653.0 kN

Mp1 = NP · z = −3653.0 · 0.3901 = −1425.04 kNm

zs the new position of the center of the
Mp2 = NP · zs = −3653.0 · 0.002978 = −10.879 kNm cross-section for cs0
zp = z + zs
Mp = −1425.04 − 10.879 = −1435.91 kNm = My Mp bending moment caused by pre-

stressing
Np My
σc,b = + W1,cs0 cross-section moduli for con-
Ac,netto W1,cs0 truction stage 0 at the bottom left and
right point
−3653.0 −1435.91 σc,b stress at the concrete at the bottom
σc,b = + = −12.47 MP of the cross section
0.9926 0.1633
• Case : Prestress and self-weight at con. stage sect. 0 (P+G cs0)
−σc
Mg + Mp
Np
zp
Pm0,=10
+σc
Np = −3653.0 kN and Mg = 1250 kNm
As computed above: Mp = −1435.91 kNm
My = 1250 − 1435.91 = −185.91 kNm
−3653.0 −185.91
σc,b = + = −4.82 MP
0.9926 0.1633
• Case : Prestress at con. stage sect. 1 (P cs1)
Np = −3653.0 kN and Mp1 = −1425.04 kNm (as above)
Mp2 = NP · zs = −3653.0 · (−0.00518) = 18.92 kNm
Mp = −1425.04 + 18.92 = −1406.11 kNm = My
Np My
σc,b = + W1,cs1 cross-section moduli for con-
Ade W1,cs1 truction stage 1
−3653.0 −1406.11
σc,b = + = −11.76 MP
1.013 0.172
• Case V: Prestress and self-weight at con. stage sect. 1 (P+G cs1)
Np = −3653.0 kN and Mg = 1250 kNm
As computed above: Mp = −1406.11 kNm
My = 1250 − 1406.11 = −156.11 kNm
−3653.0 −156.11
σc,b = + = −4.51 MP
1.013 0.172

19.5 Conclusion
This example shows the calculation of the stresses, developed in the concrete cross-section due to
prestress and bending. It has been shown that the results are reproduced with excellent accuracy.
19.6 Literature
[10] DIN EN 1990/NA: Eurocode: Basis of structural design, Nationaler Anhang Deutschland DIN EN
1990/NA:2010-12. CEN. 2010.

DCE-EN18: Creep and Shrinkage Calculation of a Rectangular Prestressed
Concrete CS
20 DCE-EN18: Creep and Shrinkage Calculation of a

Rectangular Prestressed Concrete CS
Overview

Module(s): AQB, CSM
Input file(s): creep shrinkage.dat

The problem consists of a simply supported beam with a rectangular cross-section of prestressed con-
crete, as shown in Fig. 20.1. The time dependent losses are calculated, considering the reduction of
stress caused by the deformation of concrete due to creep and shrinkage, under the permanent loads.
h My
Np
zp
Ap

This example is concerned with the calculation of creep and shrinkage on a prestressed concrete cs,
subject to bending and prestress force. The content of this problem is covered by the following parts of
DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 [1]:
• Creep and Shrinkage (Section 3.1.4)
• Annex B: Creep and Shrinkage (Section B.1, B.2)
• Time dependent losses of prestress for pre- and post-tensioning (Section 5.10.6)
The time dependant losses may be calculated by considering the following two reductions of stress [1]:
• due to the reduction of strain, caused by the deformation of concrete due to creep and shrinkage,
under the permanent loads
• the reduction of stress in the steel due to the relaxation under tension.
In this Benchmark the stress loss due to creep and shrinkage will be examined.

Concrete CS

Benchmark 17 is here extended for the case of creep and shrinkage developing on a prestressed con-
crete simply supported beam. The analysed system can be seen in Fig. 20.2, with properties as defined
in Table 20.1. Further information about the tendon geometry and prestressing can be found in Bench-
mark 17. The beam consists of a rectangular cs and is prestressed and loaded with its own weight. A
calculation of the creep and shrinkage is performed in the middle of the span with respect to DIN EN
1992-1-1:2004 (German National Annex) [1], [2]. The calculation steps [4] are presented below and
the results are given in Table 20.2 for the calculation with AQB. For CSM only the results of the creep
coefficients and the final losses are given, since the calculation is performed in steps.
Material Properties Geometric Properties Loading (at  = 10 m) Time
C 35/ 45 h = 100.0 cm Mg = 1250 kNm t0 = 28 dys
Y 1770 b = 100.0 cm Np = −3653.0 kN ts = 0 dys
RH = 80 L = 20.0 m teƒ ƒ = 1000000 dys
Ap = 28.5 cm2
Table 20.2: Results
Result AQB CSM+AQB Ref.
εcs −18.85 · 10−5 - −18.85 · 10−5
ε −31.58 · 10−5 - −31.58 · 10−5

ϕ0 1.463 1.463 1.463
ϕ(t, t0 ) 1.393 1.393 1.393
Δσp,c+s [MP] −66.63 −67.30 −68.45
ΔPc+s [kN] 189.9 191.8 195.11

Concrete CS

Material:
Ecm = 34077 N/ mm2 3.1.2: Tab. 3.1: Ecm , ƒck and ƒcm for
C 35/ 45
ƒck = 35 N/ mm2
ƒcm = 43 N/ mm2

Cross-section:
Ac = 1.0 · 1.0 = 1 m2
Ratio αE,p = Ep / Ecm = 195000 / 34077 = 5.7223
Ade = Ac + Ap · αE,p = 1.013 m2
Load Actions:
Self weight per length: γ = 25 kN/ m
Mg = g1 · L2 / 8 = 1250 kNm
Np = Pm0 ( = 10.0 m) = −3653.0 kN (from SOFiSTiK)
Calculation of stresses at  = 10.0 m midspan:
Position of the tendon: zcp = 0, 3901 m
Prestress and self-weight at con. stage sect. 0 (P+G cs0)
Np = −3653.0 kN and Mg = 1250 kNm

defined in [1] 3.3.6: Fig. 3.10


Concrete CS
−σc
Mg + Mp
Np
zp
Pm0,=10
+σc
Mp1 = NP · zcp = −3653.0 · 0.3901 = −1425.04 kNm

zs the new position of the center of the
cross-section for cs0 Mp2 = NP · zs = −3653.0 · 0.002978 = −10.879 kNm
zp = zcp + zs
Mp bending moment caused by pre- Mp = −1425.04 − 10.879 = −1435.91 kNm

stressing
My = 1250 − 1435.91 = −185.91 kNm
−3653.0 −185.91
σc,QP stress in concrete σc,QP = + = −4.82 MP
0.9926 0.1633
Calculation of creep and shrinkage at  = 10.0 m midspan:
t0 minimun age of concrete for loading t0 = 28 days

ts age of concrete at start of drying
shrinkage ts = 0 days
t age of concrete at the moment consid-
ered
t = teƒ ƒ + t0 = 1000000 + 28 = 1000028 days
3.1.4 (6): Eq. 3.8: εcs total shrinkage εcs = εcd + εc
strain
3.1.4 (6): Eq. 3.9: εcd drying shrinkage εcd (t) = βds (t, ts) · kh · εcd,0
strain
The development of the drying shrinkage strain in time is strongly de-
pends on βds (t, ts) factor. SOFiSTiK accounts not only for the age at
start of drying ts but also for the influence of the age of the prestressing
t0 . Therefore, the calculation of factor βds reads:
3.1.4 (6): Eq. 3.10: βds βds = βds (t, ts ) − βds (t0 , ts )
(t − ts ) (t0 − ts )
3.1.4 (6): h0 the notional size (mm) of βds = Ç − Ç
the cs h0 = 2Ac /  = 500 mm (t − ts ) + 0.04 · h30 (t0 − ts ) + 0.04 · h30
(1000028 − 0) (28 − 0)
βds = p − p
(1000028 − 0) + 0.04 · 5003 (28 − 0) + 0.04 · 5003
βds = 0.99955 − 0.05892 = 0.94063
3.1.4 (6): Tab. 3.3: kh coefficient de- kh = 0.70 for h0 ≥ 500 mm

pending on h0
ƒcm
Annex B.2 (1): Eq. B.11: εcd,0 basic εcd,0 = 0.85 (220 + 110 · αds1 ) · exp −αds2 · ƒcmo
· 10−6 · βRH
drying shrinkage strain
3 3
RH 80

Annex B.2 (1): Eq. B.12: βRH βRH = 1.55 1 − = 1.55 1 − = 0.7564
RH the ambient relative humidity (%) RH0 100

43
Annex B.2 (1): αds1 , αds1 coefficients εcd,0 = 0.85 (220 + 110 · 4) · exp −0.12 · 10
· 10−6 · 0.7564
depending on type of cement.
For class N αds1 = 4, αds2 = 0.12

Concrete CS
εcd,0 = 2.533 · 10−4
εcd = 0.94063 · 0.70 · 2.533 · 10−4 = 0.0001668
εcd = 1.668 · 10−4 = 0.1668 ◦ /◦◦
εc (t) = βs (t) · εc (∞) 3.1.4 (6): Eq. 3.11: εc autogenous
shrinkage strain
εc (∞) = 2.5 (ƒck − 10) · 10−6 = 2.5 (35 − 10) · 10−6 3.1.4 (6): Eq. 3.12: εc (∞)
εc (∞) = 6.25 · 10−5 = 0.0625 ◦ /◦◦
Proportionally to βds (t, ts), SOFiSTiK calculates factor βs as follows:
βs = βs (t) − βs (t0 ) 3.1.4 (6): Eq. 3.13: βs
p p p p
βs = 1 − e−0.2· t − 1 − e−0.2· t0 = e−0.2· t0 − e−0.2· t
βs = 0.347
ε = εcd,0 + εc (∞) = 2.533 · 10−4 + 6.25 · 10−5
ε = −31.58 · 10−5 ε absolute shrinkage strain

negative sign to declare losses
εc = 0.347 · 6.25 · 10−5 = 2.169 · 10−5 = 0.02169 ◦ /◦◦
εcs = 1.668 · 10−4 + 2.169 · 10−5 = −18.85 · 10−5 negative sign to declare losses
ϕ(t, t0 ) = ϕ0 · βc (t, t0 ) Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.1: ϕ(t, t0 ) creep

coefficient
ϕ0 = ϕRH · β(ƒcm ) · β(t0 ) Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.2: ϕ0 notional
creep coefficient
1 − RH/ 100

ϕRH = 1 + p · α1 · α2 Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.3: ϕRH factor for
0.1 · 3 h0 effect of relative humidity on creep
16.8 p
β(ƒcm ) = p = 16.8/ 43 = 2.562 Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.4: β(ƒcm ) factor
ƒcm for effect of concrete strength on creep
0.7
35

α1 = ≤ 1 = 0.8658 Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.8c: α1 , α2 , α3
ƒcm coefficients to consider influence of con-
crete strength
0.2
35

α2 = ≤ 1 = 0.9597
ƒcm
0.5
35

α3 = ≤ 1 = 0.9022
ƒcm
1 − 80/ 100

ϕRH = 1+ p
3
· 0.8658 · 0.9597 = 1.1691
0.1 · 500
1
β(t0 ) = Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.5: β(t0 ) factor
0.1 + t00.20 for effect of concrete age at loading on
creep
!α
9
t0 = t0,T · 1.2
+1 ≥ 0.5 Annex B.1 (2): Eq. B.9: t0,T tempera-
2 + t0,T ture adjusted age of concrete at loading
adjusted according to expression B.10

Concrete CS
e−(4000/ [273+T(Δt )]−13.65) · Δt

Pn
Annex B.1 (3): Eq. B.10: tT temper- tT = =1
ature adjusted concrete age which re-
places t in the corresponding equations
t0,T = 28 · e−(4000/ [273+20]−13.65) = 28 · 1.0 = 28.0
0
9

Annex B.1 (2): Eq. B.9: α a power ⇒ t0 = 28.0 · +1 = 28.0
which depends on type of cement 2 + 28.01.2
For class N α = 0
1
β(t0 ) = = 0.48844
0.1 + 28.00.20
0.3
(t − t0 )

Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.7: βc (t, t0 ) co- βc (t, t0 ) =
efficient to describe the development of (βH + t − t0 )
creep with time after loading
βH = 1.5 · 1 + (0.012 · RH)18 · h0 + 250 · α3 ≤ 1500 · α3

Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.8: βH coefficient
depending on relative humidity and no-
βH = 1.5 · 1 + (0.012 · 80)18 · 500 + 250 · 0.9022

tional member size
βH = 1335.25 ≤ 1500 · 0.9022 = 1353.30
⇒ βc (t, t0 ) = 0.9996
ϕ0 = 1.1691 · 2.562 · 0.48844 = 1.463
Annex B.1 (3): The values of ϕ(t, t0 ) ϕ(t, t0 ) = 1.463 · 0.9996/ 1.05 = 1.393
given above should be associated with
the tangent modulus Ec According to EN, the creep value is related to the tangent Young’s
3.1.4 (2): The values of the creep coef-
modulus Ec , where Ec being defined as 1.05 · Ecm . To account for
ficient, ϕ(t, t0 ) is related to Ec , the tan-
gent modulus, which may be taken as this, SOFiSTiK adopts this scaling for the computed creep coefficient
1.05 · Ecm (in SOFiSTiK, all computations are consistently based on Ecm ).
Ep
εcs · Ep + 0.8Δσpr + ϕ(t, t0 ) · σc,QP
Ecm
ΔPc+s+r = Ap ·Δσp,c+s+r = Ap
Ep Ap Ac

1+ 1+ 2
zcp [1 + 0.8ϕ(t, t0 )]
5.10.6 (2): Eq. 5.46: ΔPc+s+r time de- Ecm Ac c
pendent losses of prestress
In this example only the losses due to creep and shrinkage are taken
into account, the reduction of stress due to relaxation (Δσpr ) is ignored.
−0.1885 · 10−3 · 195000 + 5.7223 · 1.393 · (−4.82)

Δσp,c+s =
28.5 · 10−4 0.9926

1 + 5.7223 1+ 0.3901 [1 + 0.8 · 1.393]
2
Δσp,c+s variation of stress in tendons 0.9926 0.08214
due to creep and shrinkage at location
, at time t Δσp,c+s = −68.46 MP
ΔPc+s = Ap · Δσp,c+s = 28.5 · 10−4 · 68.46 · 103 = 195.11 kN

Concrete CS
20.5 Conclusion
This example shows the calculation of the time dependent losses due to creep and shrinkage. It has
been shown that the results are in very good agreement with the reference solution.
20.6 Literature

Concrete CS

DCE-EN19: Fatigue of a Rectangular Reinforced Concrete CS
21 DCE-EN19: Fatigue of a Rectangular Reinforced Con-

crete CS
Overview

Module(s): AQB
Input file(s): fatigue.dat

The problem consists of a simply supported box girder beam of reinforced concrete, as shown in Fig.
21.1. The structure’s resistance to fatigue shall be verified.
b
t t
t As2
C
SC
h
t As1

This example is concerned with the verification to fatigue. The content of this problem is covered by the
following parts of DIN EN 1992-1-1/NA [11] [2]:
• Verification conditions (Section 6.8.1)
• Internal forces and stresses for fatigue verification (Section 6.8.2)
• Combination of actions (Section 6.8.3)
• Verification procedure for reinforcing and prestressing steel (Section 6.8.4)
• Verification using damage equivalent stress range(Section 6.8.5)
• Verification of concrete under compression or shear (Section 6.8.7)

The properties of the simply supported beam of reinforced concrete with a box cross-section are defined
in Table 21.1. The beam is loaded with three combinations of load cases with calculatoric forces and
moments, as presented in Table 21.1. A verification of its resistance to fatigue is performed at  = 5 m

with respect to DIN EN 1992-1-1/NA [11] [2]. The results are given in Table 21.2.
Material Geometry Loading (at  = 5 m)
C 35/ 45 h = 200.0 cm LC 911:

S 500 b = 600.0 cm Vz = 610 kN, My = 4575 kNm, Mt = −0.19 kNm
t = 400.0 cm LC 912:
L = 20.0 m Vz = 660 kN, My = 4950 kNm, Mt = −50.20 kNm
As1 = 60 cm2 LC 913:
As2 = 60 cm2 Vz = 710 kN, My = 5325 kNm, Mt = 99.78 kNm
Table 21.2: Results
Result SOF (FEM). Ref.
Δσs,eq (N∗ ) [MP] 71.74 76.98
ƒcd,ƒ t [MP] 17.06 17.0567
σcd,m,eq0 TOP0 [MP] ≤ 14.33 ≤ 14.33
σcd,m,eqsher ct [MP] ≤ 10.42 ≤ 10.34
ΔσRsk (N∗ )
[MP] 152.17 152.2
γs,ƒ t


Design with respect to DIN EN 1992-1-1/NA [11] [2]:2
STEP 1: Material
ƒck = 35 N/ mm2 Tab. 3.1: Strength for concrete
γc = 1.50 (NDP) 2.4.2.4: (1), Tab. 2.1DE: Partial

STEP 2: Cross-section
1/ WVz = 0.8177 1/ m2 1/ WV : Shear force resistance, calcu-

lated by using BEM
1/ WVy = 0.371 1/ m2 1/ WT : Torsional resistance, calculated
by using BEM
1/ WT = 0.3448 1/ m3
Minimun reinforcements:
As1 = As2 = 6 · 10 = 60 cm2 As : Longitudinal

As : Shear links
As = 8.22 cm2 / m
STEP 3: Load Actions:
Permanent: Loadcase 1
Variable: Loadcase 2, 3
For the determination of the combination calculatoric forces and mo-

ments the following superposition types are chosen: 6.8.3: (2)P: Fatigue
The basic combination of the non-cyclic
• Quasi permanent combination for serviceability - MAXP load is similar to the definition of the fre-
quent combination for serviceability:
+ P 00 + 00 ψ1,1 Qk,1 00 + 00
00 00
P
j≥1 GP
k,j
• Frequent combination for serviceability - MAXF 00
+ 00 >1 ψ 2, Q k,
The following combination of actions scenario is investigated for ser-

viceability:
• LC 911 G
MAXP + MY : 1.00 * G
• LC 912 G+2
MAXF + MY : 1.00 * G + ψ1 * LC 2
• LC 913 G+3
MAXF + MY : 1.00 * G + ψ1 * LC 3
defined in [2] 3.3.6: Fig. 3.10

2 The sections mentioned in the margins refer to DIN EN 1992-1-1/NA [11], [2], unless
otherwise specified.

Combination calculatoric forces and moments at  = 5.0 m:
LC Vy [kN] Vz [kN] My [kNm] Mt [kNm]
911 0 610 4575 −0.189

912 0 660 4950 −50.20
913 0 710 5325 99.78
STEP 4: Calculation of stresses at  = 5.0 m :
The resistance of structures to fatigue shall be verified in special cases.

6.8.1 (1)P: Verification conditions
This verification shall be performed separately from concrete and steel.
The following calculation corresponds to LC 911.
τQ : shear stresses resulting from shear τQ = 1/ WVy · Qy + 1/ WVz · Qz

force
where Qy and Qz are calculated through a proportionate factor ƒV , de-
pending on the lever arm of internal forces and the elastic part of Vy
and Vz .
Qy = ƒV · Vy = 0.8576 · 0.0 = 0.0 kN
Qz = ƒV · Vz = 0.8576 · 610 = 523.149 kN
τQ = 0.371 · 0.0 + 0.8177 · 523.149 = 427.770 · 10−3 MP
τT : shear stresses resulting from tor- τT = −1/ WT · Mt = −0.34484 · 0.189 = 0.065 · 10−3 MP
sion
τ = τQ + τT = 427.770·10−3 + 0.065·10−3 = 427.835·10−3 MP
τ = τQ + τT · 1.0 + cot2 θ

τ , σ : principal stresses
τ
θ: angle of compression struts σ =
α: angle of shear reinforcement cot θ + cot α
α = 90o ⇒ sin α = 1.0, cot α = 0.0
A rather nasty problem is the evaluation of the shear. The DIN design
6.8.2(3): In the design of shear rein- code allows a simple solution based on a corrected value for the incli-
forcement the inclination of the com- nation of the compressive struts:
pressive struts θƒ t may be calculated
by Eq. 6.65 p
tn θƒ t = tn θ
6.8.2(3): Eq. 6.65: tn θƒ t
Unfortunately it is nearly impossible to keep this value from the shear

design for all individual shear cuts or transform it to different load com-
binations and reinforcement distributions for the fatigue stress check.
AQB uses instead a fixed value of 4/ 7 for the tangents. The user may
overwrite this value however with any desired value.
tn θ = 4/ 7 ⇒ cot θ = 7/ 4 = 1.75

p
tn θƒ t = 4/ 7 = 0.756
p
cot θƒ t = 7/ 4 = 1.3229

τ = (427.770 · 10−3 + 0.065 · 10−3 ) · (1.0 + 1.752 )
τ = 1740.048 · 10−3 MP
1740.048 · 10−3
σ = = 994.313 · 10−3 MP
1.75 + 0.0
ƒQ · τQ ƒT · τT
σs = + σs : steel stresses
(cot θƒ t + cot α) · sin α cot θƒ t
B0 · ƒr Bb · ƒr
ƒT = , and ƒQ = As/ ct = As / 2 = 4.11 cm2 / m
As/ ct As/ ct
where ƒT and ƒQ are factors expressing the shear links reinforcement

ratios. They are depending on ƒr , a factor for total reinforcement, B0 ,
the width of the cut and Bb , the total width of the cut. Since in this case
it is a box cross-section and taking into account the position of the cut,
we get that B0 = Bb = 0.4 m.
B0
Figure 21.2: Cross-section Overview
0.4 · 1.0 0.4 · 1.0

ƒT = = 973.532 and ƒQ = = 973.532
4.11 · 10−4 4.11 · 10−4
973.532 · 427.770 · 10−3 973.532 · 0.065 · 10−3
σs = +
(1.3229 + 0.0) · 1.0 1.3229
σs = 314.882 MP
Accordingly, we calculate the stresses for the rest of the loadcases. For
each loadcase the stresses are calculated for two cases, for τT and for
−τT , in order to determine the most unfavorable case. The results are
presented in Table 21.4
Table 21.4: Calculation of Stresses by using BEM
LC Qz τQ τT · 10-3 τ τ σ σs
[kN] [MP] [MP] [MP] [MP] [MP] [MP]
911 523.14 0.428 0.065 0.427 1.740 0.993 314.88

-0.065 0.427 1.739 0.993 314.78
912 566.03 0.463 17.31 0.480 1.952 1.115 353.38
-17.31 0.4455 1.8120 1.0346 327.90

LC Qz τQ τT · 10-3 τ τ σ σs
[kN] [MP] [MP] [MP] [MP] [MP] [MP]
913 608.911 0.498 -34.41 0.4635 1.8851 1.0764 341.12

34.41 0.5323 2.1649 1.2362 391.7
From the table, the minimum and maximum value of the steel stress is
determined:
• Max. σs = 391.77 MP
• Min. σs = 314.79 MP
As the exact fatigue stress check is not available, the simplified methods
according to DIN EN 1992-1-1/NA (Sect. 6.8, Fatigue) are selected via
λ : Coeff. equiv. stress range shear the coefficients λs , λt , λ , λc .
links, here input as 1.0
The admissible sways of the damage equivalent stress range for the
6.8.2 (2): Eq. 6.64: η factor for effect of shear links are obtained, as follows:
different bond behaviour
As + Ap
η= , since Ap = 0 Δσs,eq (N∗ ) = λ · (σs,m − σs,mn ) = 1.0 · (391.77 − 314.79)
As + Ap ξ · ϕs / ϕp
Æ
(no prestress) ⇒ η = 1.0, thus no in-

crease of calculated stress range in the Δσs,eq (N∗ ) = 76.98 MP
reinforcing steel
For reinforcing steel adequate fatigue resistance should be assumed, if
6.8.5 (3): Eq. 6.71: Verification using the following is satisfied:
damage equivalent stress range
(NDP) 6.8.4 (6): Table 6.3DE: Param- ΔσRsk (N∗ )
eters for fatigue strength curves for re- γF,ƒ t · Δσs,eq (N∗ ) ≤
inforcing steel ΔσRsk (N∗ ) = 175 for γs,ƒ t
straight/bent bars and N∗ = 106 cycles
(NDP) 2.4.2.3 (1): Partial factor for fa- 175
tigue loads γF,ƒ t = 1.0
1.0 · 76.98 ≤
1.15
(NDP) 2.4.2.4 (1): Partial factors for ma-
terials γs,ƒ t = 1.15 Δσs,eq (N∗ ) = 76.98 ≤ 152.2 MP
If a coefficient λ = 2.0 is input for the shear links, resulting in a stress

range of Δσs,eq (N∗ ) = 2 · 76.98 = 153.97 MP, a star (∗ ) will be
printed in the output next to the shear link stress range, denoting that
the limit value of 152.2 MP has been exceeded.
(NDP) 6.8.7 (1): Eq. 6.76: ƒcd,ƒ t The design fatigue strength of concrete is determined by:
k1 = 1.0
3.1.2 (6): Eq. 3.2: βcc (t0 ) ƒck

p
βcc (t0 ) = es·(1− 28/ t = 1.0 ƒcd,ƒ t = k1 · βcc (t0 ) · ƒcd · 1 −
250
35

ƒcd,ƒ t = 1.0 · 1.0 · 19.83 · 1 − = 17.0567 MP
250
In the case of the compression struts of members subjected to shear,
the concrete strength ƒcd,ƒ t should be reduced by the strength reduc-
(NDP) 6.8.7 (3): Verification of concrete tion factor ν1 according to 6.2.3(3).
under compression or shear
(NDP) 6.2.3 (3): ν1 , ν2 ν2 = 1 for ≤ C50/ 60

ν1 = 0.75 · ν2 = 0.75
⇒ ƒcd,ƒ t,red = 0.75 · 17.0567 = 12.7925 MP
A satisfactory fatigue resistance may be assumed, if the following con-

dition is fulfilled:
Ecd,m,eq + 0.43 · 1 − Req ≤ 1

Æ
6.8.7 (1): Eq. 6.72 - 6.75
v
σcd,m,eq u σcd,mn,eq
+ 0.43 · 1− ≤1
t
ƒcd,ƒ t,red σcd,m,eq
v !
u σcd,mn,eq
σcd,m,eq ≤ ƒcd,ƒ t,red · 1.0 − 0.43 · 1−
t
σcd,m,eq
v
t 0.9933
σcd,m,eq ≤ 12.7925 · 1.0 − 0.43 · 1−
1.2362
σcd,m,eq = 1.2362 ≤ 10.35 MP
Accordingly the above verification is done for the minimum and maxi-
mum nonlinear stresses of concrete, as calculated from AQB Fig. 21.3,
at the defined 0 TOP0 point of the cross-section.
v !
u σcd,mn,eq
σcd,m,eq ≤ ƒcd,ƒ t · 1.0 − 0.43 · 1 −
t
σcd,m,eq
v
t 5.69
σcd,m,eq ≤ 17.0567 · 1.0 − 0.43 · 1−
6.60
σcd,m,eq = 6.60 ≤ 14.33 MP
Stress limitation
σm,t = k3 · ƒyk 7.2 (5)
σm,t = 0.80 · 500 MP
σm,t = 400 MP

-5.69
-4.30
-2.90
-1.47 -5.69
-0.02
-9.37
-9.37
-9.37
-9.37 -5.69
-9.37 -4.30
-9.37
-2.90
-1.47
-0.02
411.74
411.74
411.74
411.74
411.74
411.74
-6.60
-5.00
-3.37
-1.71 -6.60
-0.02
-10.97
-10.97
-10.97 -6.60
-10.97
-10.97 -5.00
-10.97
-3.37
-1.71
-0.02
479.20
479.20
479.20
479.20
479.20
479.20
Figure 21.3: Min/Max. Nonlinear Stresses of Concrete at ”TOP” Point

(BEM)

21.5 Conclusion
This example shows the verification of a reinforced concrete beam to fatigue. It has been shown that
AQB follows the fatigue verification procedure, as proposed in DIN EN 1992-1-1/NA [11] [2]. The in-
significant deviation arises from the fact that the benchmark (reference) results have been calculated by
using the BEM analysis. By introducing the FEM analysis, AQUA calculates now the 1/ WVz , 1/ WVy
and 1/ WT values more accurate.
21.6 Literature
[11] DIN EN 1992-1-1/NA:2013-04: Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures, Part 1-1/NA: Gen-
eral rules and rules for buildings - Nationaler Anhang Deutschland, Ersatz für DIN EN 1992-1-
1/NA:2011-01 und DIN EN 1992-1-1/NA Berichtigung 1:2012-06. DIN. 2013.


DCE-EN20: Design of a Steel I-section for Bending, Shear and Axial Force
22 DCE-EN20: Design of a Steel I-section for Bending,

Shear and Axial Force
Overview

Module(s): AQB
Input file(s): usage interact.dat

The problem consists of a steel I section, as shown in Fig. 22.1. The cross-section is loaded with
bending, shear and axial force. The required result is the utilization of the ultimate bearing capacity. The
formulas provided in the Eurocode for that purpose are not generally applicable for all types of sections
and do not allow a direct evaluation of this value, so it is common, that software implementations will
deviate in some parts from the suggested procedure.
First it will be shown that a loading below the ultimate capacity will be covered by selected software even
if deviations in the applied formulas will affect the expected results slightly. Then it will be demonstrated
that an advanced analysis using additional features within the provisions of the design code allows a
better approach to the ultimate capacity.
b
tƒ
r
t
Vz
My
h y
S 235 HEM 500 Vz = 1400 kN
γM0 = 1.00 b = 306 mm My = 450 kNm
h = 524 mm N = −5000 kN
tƒ = 40 mm, t = 21 mm
r = 27 mm

A = 344.298 cm2 Sectional Class 1

As significant shear and axial forces are present allowance should be made for the effect of both shear
force and axial force on the resistance moment. The content of this problem is covered by the following
parts of EN 1993-1-1:2005 [7]:

The section, a HEM 500, with properties as defined in Table 22.1, is to be designed for an ultimate
moment My , a shear force Vz and an axial force N, with respect to EN 1993-1-1:2005 [7]. The utilisation
level of allowable plastic forces are calculated and compared to software results. The results are given
in Table 22.2.
Table 22.2: Results
Result SOF. Ref.

Util. level N 0.618 0.618
Util. level NEd / NV,Rd 0.712 0.712
Util. level Vz 0.797 0.797
Util. level My 0.270 0.270
Total util. level My,red (EN 1993-1-1) 0.952 0.846


The calculation steps of the reference solution are presented below.
Neither the axial force (see EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.9.1 (4)) nor the shear
force (see EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.10) can be neglected.
Material:
ƒy = 235 N/ mm2
Cross-sectional properties:
Wp,y = 7094.2 cm2 Plastic section modulus of HEM 500

w.r.t. y-
AV,z = A − 2 · b · tƒ + (t + 2 · r) · tƒ but not less than η · h · t 6.2.6 (3)a: The shear area AV,z may be
taken as follows for rolled I-sections with
h = h − 2 · tƒ = 44.4 cm load parallel to the web
η may be conservatively taken equal to
AV,z = 129.498 cm2 > 1 · 44.4 · 2.1 = 93.24 1.0
Partial factor γM0 = 1.0
AV,z 129.5
V,z = = = 0.376
A 344.3
A = A − 2 · b · tƒ = 99.498 cm2
AV 99.5 A − 2 · b · tƒ
= = = 0.289 6.2.9.1 (5):  =
A 344.3 A
p
129.498 · 235/ 3
Vp,Rd,z = = 1757 kN 6.2.6 (3)a: The shear area AVz may be
1.00 taken as follows for rolled I - sections
with load parallel to the web
Wp,y · ƒy
Mc,Rd = = 1667 kNm 6.2.5 (2), Eq. 6.13: The design resis-
γM0 tance for bending, for Class 1 cross-
section
Where the shear and axial force are present allowance should be made
for the effect of both shear force and axial force on resistance moment. 6.2.10 (1): Bending, shear and axial
force
Provided that the design value of the shear force VEd does not exceed
the 50% of the design plastic shear resistance Vp,Rd no reduction of
the resistances for bending and axial force need to be made.
VEd ≤ 0.5 · Vp,Rd 6.2.10 (2)
VEd
= 0.797 > 0.5
Vp,Rd,z
→ shear resistance limit exceeded 6.2.10 (3): Bending shear and axial
force
Provided that the design value of the shear force VEd exceeds the 50%
of the design plastic shear resistance Vp,Rd,z , the design resistance
of the cross-section to combinations of moment and axial force should
be calculated using a reduced yield strength (1 − ρ) · ƒy for the shear
area. Therefore all following formulas will be modified for the shear force
allowance.
wise specified.

2
2 · VEd

6.2.10 (3) the design resistance should ρ= −1 = 0.352
be calculated using a reduced yield Vp,Rd,z
strength (1 − ρ) · ƒy for the shear area
ρ · A2

Wp,y − · ƒy
4 · t
6.2.8 (5): Eq. 6.30: The reduced de- My,V,Rd = = 1581 kNm
sign plastic resistance moment allowing γM0
for shear force may alternatively be ob-
tained for I-sections with equal flanges My
and bending about major axis = 0.277
My,V,Rd
My
= 0.270 with no reduction
Mc,Rd
A · ƒy
6.2.4 (2), Eq. 6.10: The design resis- Np,Rd = = 8091 kN
tance for compression γM0
NV,Rd = Np,Rd · (1 − V,z · ρ)
NV,Rd = 7018.6 kN
NEd
n = = 0.712
NV,Rd
NEd
= 0.618 with no reduction
Np,Rd
Where an axial force is present, allowance should be made for its effect
6.2.9.1 (1): Bending and axial force - on the plastic moment resistance.
Class 1 and 2 cross-sections

 0.25 · NV,Rd
6.2.9.1 (4): For doubly symmetrical NEd > mn 0.5 · h · t · ƒy · (1 − ρ)
I-sections, allowance need not to be 
made for the effect of the axial force on γM0
the plastic resistance moment about the (
y-y axis when the criteria are satisfied. 1754.7 kN
NEd = 5000 > mn
709.5 kN
→ consideration of axial force in interaction

1−n
6.2.9.1 (5): Eq. 6.36-6.38: reduced de- MN,y,Rd = MV,y,Rd ·
sign plastic resistance moment allow- 1 − 0.5 · α ∗
ing for I-sections with equal flanges and
bending about major axis. and MN,y,Rd ≤ MV,y,Rd
NEd
n= = 0.712
NV,Rd
 A − 2 · b · tƒ = 344.4 − 2 · 30.6 · 4 = 0.289


∗ = mn A 344.4
0.5

∗ = 0.289
1 − 0.712
MN,y,Rd = 1581 · = 531 kNm
1 − 0.5 · 0.289
My,Ed 450
= = 0.846
MNV,y,Rd 531

Alternative solution (see evaluation below):
0.352 · 129.52

My,V,Rd = 7094 − · ƒy Using A = A = AVz insead of
4 · 2.1 three different values: 93.2 6= 99.5 6=
129.5
My,V,Rd = 1501.8 kNm Hit: The reduction by the plastic bend-
ing resistance of the web may be ob-
1 − 0.712 tained with a better precision.
MN,y,Rd = · 1501 = 532 kNm
1 − 0.5 · 0.376
MEd 450
= = 0.846
MNV,y,Rd 532

22.5 Conclusion
Interaction formulas are not expected to be true for all cases [12]. Thus deviations are unavoidable.
The first reason of the deviation is that the interaction formulas are not linear. Thus an utilisation factor
of 0.5 does not mean that the ultimate load is twice the current loading. If the utilisation factor of the
normal force or the shear force become 1.0 or larger then the formulas are not applicable any more. So
the utilisation formula should be rewritten from the original form of:
M 1 − 0.5 · 
· ≤ 1.00 (22.1)
My,V,Rd N
1−
NV,Rd
to the completely equivalent form:
M N
· (1 − 0.5 · Vz ) + ≤ 1.00 (22.2)
My,V,Rd NV,rd
These are two different curves intersecting for the critical value of 1.0, but the singularity for the utilisation
N/ NV,Rd = 1 is avoided. The second formula yields a value of 0.956 with the EN reference data.
The simplified interaction according to equation 6.2 of EN 1993-1-1 yields an utilisation value of 1.04.
Program RUBSTAHL QST-I [12] yields an utilisation of 1.00.
The second reason for the deviations is that the software follows a more general principle and uses only
a single value for the shear capacity as indicated in the last row of table 22.2. Thus the software has to
select either the web only or the dog-bone-shape including parts of the flanges, as can be visualized in
Fig. 22.2.
AV AVz
Figure 22.2: Different shear areas for steel section
These deviations become larger, if we try to find the true capacity of the section. It has to be noted,
that most interaction formulas for shear and normal stress are working with partial areas and are not
accounting for the true interaction of stresses. There are different possibilities in the literature and there
are some numerical procedures by Katz [13] or Osterrieder [14] allowing for more detailed evaluations.
The solution with the optimization process from Osterrieder [14] yields a true utilisation factor of 0.93 for
the given forces. Thus the true ultimate plastic force combination is: N = 5380 kN, Vz = 1505 kN,
My = 483.9 kNm. The software provides for these forces with the modified interaction formulas an
utilisation of 1.08. If one follows strictly the design code, much higher values of about 2.7 are obtained,
showing the strong non proportionality of those formulas.

The solution according to Katz [13] uses a non-linear analysis, thus we have finite strains and the hard-
ening effect of the steel strain law is used, as indicated in EN 1993-1-5:2006 Appendix C.6 [15]. Then it
is no problem to obtain even higher ultimate forces: N = 5800 kN, Vz = 1624 kN, My = 522 kNm,
giving a utilisation factor of 0.86 for the given loading. The normal and shear stress distribution in Figure
22.3 is obtained with a maximum compressive strain of −1.61%◦ .
-22
-19
5.7
1.3
19
22
0
7.3
6.6
5
7
.89
52
17
.98
0.3
61
6
-53
.53
1 8
0.2 4.9
12 21
4
3.8
8 5.5
13 23
0
1.5
3 7.3
14 24
AV
-94
6
6.4
1 4.6
.01
14 25
94
16
.24
23
13
8.5
3.9
2.4
6
5
Non linear Axial Stress, f = 1.080 Non linear Shear Stress, f = 1.080 Non linear von Mises stress, f = 1.080
Figure 22.3: Non-linear normal and shear stress distribution
22.6 Literature
[12] R. Kindmann and U. Krüger. Stahlbau, Teil 1: Grundlagen. Ernst & Sohn, 2015.
[13] C. Katz. “Fließzonentheorie mit Interaktion aller Stabschnittgrößen bei Stahltragwerken”. In:
Stahlbau (1997).
[14] P. Osterrieder. “Plastic Bending and Torsion of Open Thin-Walled Steel Members”. In: Proceedings
of EUROSTEEL 2005, 4th European Conference on Steel and Composite Structures (Maastricht,
2005).
[15] DIN EN 1993-1-5: Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures, Part 1-5: Plated structural elements -
German version EN 1993-1-1:2006 + AC:2009. CEN. 2010.


DCE-EN21: Real Creep and Shrinkage Calculation of a T-Beam Prestressed CS
23 DCE-EN21: Real Creep and Shrinkage Calculation of

a T-Beam Prestressed CS
Overview

Module(s): CSM
Input file(s): real creep shrinkage.dat

The problem consists of a simply supported beam with a T-Beam cross-section of prestressed concrete,
as shown in Fig. 23.1. The nodal displacement is calculated considering the effects of real creep and
shrinkage, also the usage of custom (experimental) creep and shrinkage parameters is verified, the
custom (experimental) parameter is taken from fib Model Code 2010 [16].
beƒ ƒ
hƒ
VEd
h d
As1 As1
d1

subject to horizontal prestressing force. The content of this problem is covered by the following parts of
EN 1992-1-1:2004 [6]:
• Creep and Shrinkage (Section 3.1.4)
• Annex B: Creep and Shrinkage (Section B.1, B.2)
The time dependant displacements are calculated by multiplying the length of the beam with the creep
(εcc ) and shrinkage (εcs ) strain:
• the creep deformation of concrete is calculated according to (EN 1992-1-1, 3.1.4, Eq. 3.6)
• the total shrinkage strain is calculated according to (EN 1992-1-1, 3.1.4, Eq. 3.8)

The benchmark 21 is here to show the effects of real creep on a prestressed concrete simply supported
beam. The analysed system can be seen in Fig. 23.4 with properties as defined in Table 23.1. The

tendon geometry is simplified as much as possible and modelled as a horizontal force, therefore tendons
are not subject of this benchmark. The beam consists of a T-Beam cs and is loaded with a horizontal
prestressing force from time t1 = 100 days to time t2 = 300 days. The self-weight is neglected. A
calculation of the creep and shrinkage is performed in the middle of the span with respect to EN 1992-
1-1:2004 [6]. The calculation steps are presented below and the results are given in Table 23.2 for the
calculation with CSM. For calculating the real creep and shrinkage (RCRE) an equivalent loading is
used, see Fig. 23.2 and Fig. 23.3.
The time steps for the calculation are:

t0 = 7 days, t1 = 100 days, t2 = 300 days, t∞ = 30 years
Equivalent loading used by CSM

 [mm]
Real loading
shrinkage
loading
creep
t [days]
ts t0 t1 = 100 t2 = 300 t∞ = 30 yr.
Figure 23.2: Creep, shrinkage and loading displacements
Equivalent loading used by CSM

 [mm]
Real loading
+creep +shrinkage → ←+shrinkage -creep

-loading →
+loading →
← +shrinkage
t [days]
ts t0 t1 = 100 t2 = 300 t∞ = 30 yr.
Figure 23.3: Equivalent loading and displacement for real creep and shrinkage (RCRE)

The benchmark contains next calculation steps:
1. Calculating the shrinkage displacements before loading.
2. Calculating the displacements when loading occurs at time t1 = 100 days.
3. Calculating the displacements (creep and shrinkage) at time before the loading is inactive (t2 ≈
300 and t2 < 300 days).
4. Calculating the displacements at time when the loading is inactive (t2 ≈ 300 and t2 > 300 days).
5. Calculating the displacements at time t3 = 30 years.
C 35/ 45 h = 120 cm Np = −900.0 kN t0 = 7 days
Y 1770 beƒ ƒ = 280.0 cm ts = 3 days
RH = 80 hƒ = 40 cm
b = 40 cm
L = 20.0 m
Table 23.2: Results
Result CSM [mm] Ref [mm].
Δ4015 -0.69 -0.688
Δ4020 -0.849 -0.8431
Δ4025 -1.455 -1.45314
Δ4030 -1.298 -1.29814
Δ4035 -2.166 -2.08


Design with respect to EN 1992-1-1:2004 [6]:2
Material:
3.1: Concrete Concrete: C 35/ 45
3.1.2: Tab. 3.1: Ecm , ƒck and ƒcm for Ecm = 34077 N/ mm2
C 35/ 45
ƒck = 35 N/ mm2
ƒcm = 43 N/ mm2
3.3: Prestressing Steel Prestressing Steel: Y 1770
Load Actions:
Self weight per length is neglected: γ = 0 kN/ m (to simplify the exam-
ple as much as possible)
NEd = −900 kN
A = 280 · 40 + 60 · 80 = 16000 cm2
Calculation of stresses at  = 10.0 m midspan:

NEd −900
σc stress in concrete σc = = = −0.05625 kN/ cm2 = −0.5625 N/ mm2
A 16000
1) Calculating the shrinkage displacements before loading
• Calculating creep:
According to EN 1992-1-1 the creep deformation of concrete for a con-

stant compressive stress σc applied at a concrete age t0 is given by:
εcc = ϕ(t, t0 ) · (σc / Ecs )
Because σc = 0 (before loading), creep deformation is neglected and

εcc = 0.
• Calculating shrinkage:
t0 minimum age of concrete for loading t0 = 7 days

ered
t = 100 days
teƒ ƒ = t − t0 = 100 − 7 = 93 days
strain
3.1.4 (6): Eq. 3.9: εcd drying shrinkage εcd (t) = βds (t, ts ) · kh · εcd,0
strain
defined in [6] 3.3.6: Fig. 3.10

2 The sections mentioned in the margins refer to EN 1992-1-1:2004 [6], [2], unless


pends on βds (t, ts ) factor. SOFiSTiK accounts not only for the age at
βds = βds (t, ts ) − βds (t0 , ts ) 3.1.4 (6): Eq. 3.10: βds
(t − ts ) (t0 − ts )
βds = Ç − Ç 3.1.4 (6): h0 the notional size (mm) of
(t − ts ) + 0.04 · h30 (t0 − ts ) + 0.04 · h30 the cs h0 = 2Ac /  = 500 mm
(100 − 3) (7 − 3)
βds = p − p
(100 − 3) + 0.04 · 4003 (7 − 3) + 0.04 · 4003
βds = 0.232 − 0.01235 = 0.22026
kh = 0.725 for h0 = 400 mm 3.1.4 (6): Tab. 3.3: kh coefficient de-

pending on h0
ƒcm

εcd,0 = 0.85 (220 + 110 · αds1 ) · exp −αds2 · ·10−6 ·βRH
ƒcmo
Annex B.2 (1): Eq. B.11: εcd,0 basic
3 3
RH 80

βRH = 1.55 1 − = 1.55 1 − = 0.7564 Annex B.2 (1): Eq. B.12: βRH
RH0 100 RH the ambient relative humidity (%)
43

εcd,0 = 0.85 (220 + 110 · 4) · exp −0.12 · · 10−6 · 0.7564
10
Annex B.2 (1): αds1 , αds1 coefficients
εcd,0 = 2.533 · 10−4 For class N αds1 = 4, αds2 = 0.12
εcd = βds · kh · εcd,0
εcd = 0.22026 · 0.725 · 2.533 · 10−4 = −4.04 · 10−5
Drying shrinkage:
εcd = −4.04 · 10−5
shrinkage strain
εc (∞) = 2.5 (ƒck − 10) · 10−6 = 2.5 · (35 − 10) · 10−6 3.1.4 (6): Eq. 3.12: εc (∞)
εc (∞) = 6.25 · 10−5 = 0.0625 ◦ /◦◦
βs = βs (t) − βs (t0 ) 3.1.4 (6): Eq. 3.13: βs
p p p p
βs = 1 − e−0.2· t − 1 − e−0.2· t0 = e−0.2· t0 − e−0.2· t
βs = 0.4537
εc (t) = βs (t) · εc (∞)
εc (t) = 0.45377 · 6.25 · 10−5
Autogenous shrinkage:

εc (t) = −2.84 · 10−5
Total shrinkage:
εcs = εc + εcd
ε absolute shrinkage strain εcs = −2.84 · 10−5 + (−4.04) · 10−5 = −6.881 · 10−5
Calculating displacement:
Δ1,cs = εcs · L/ 2
Δ1,cs = −6.881 · 10−5 · 10000 mm
Δ1,cs = −0.6881 mm
2) Calculate displacement when loading occurs at time t1 = 100

days at  = 10.0 m midspan
Ecs calculated ”ideal” cross section σc = Ecs · ε

modulus of elasticity for concrete and
reinforcement steel As
Ecs = Ecm + · Es
Ac
178.568
Ecs = 3407.7 + · 20000
16000 − 178.568
Ecs = 3407.7 + 225.729
Ecs = 3633.42 kN/ cm2 = 36334.29 N/ mm2

σc −0.5625
ε= = = −1.55 · 10−5
Ecs 36334.29
Δ2
ε= → Δ2 = ε · L/ 2

Δ2 = −1.55 · 10−5 · 10000 mm = −0.155 mm
3) Calculating the displacement (creep and shrinkage) at time be-

fore the loading is inactive (t2 ≈ 300 and t2 < 300 days)

ered
t = 300 days
teƒ ƒ = t − t0 = 300 − 100 = 200 days
strain
strain

βds = βds (t, ts ) − βds (t0 , ts ) 3.1.4 (6): Eq. 3.10: βds
(t − ts ) (t0 − ts )
βds = Ç − Ç 3.1.4 (6): h0 the notional size (mm) of
(t − ts ) + 0.04 · h30 (t0 − ts ) + 0.04 · h30 the cs h0 = 2Ac /  = 500 mm
(300 − 3) (100 − 3)
βds = p − p
(300 − 3) + 0.04 · 4003 (100 − 3) + 0.04 · 4003
βds = 0.2487
kh = 0.725 for h0 = 400 mm 3.1.4 (6): Tab. 3.3: kh coefficient de-

pending on h0
ƒcm

ƒcmo
3 3
RH 80

βRH = 1.55 1 − = 1.55 1 − = 0.7564 Annex B.2 (1): Eq. B.12: βRH
RH0 100 RH the ambient relative humidity (%)
43

εcd,0 = 0.85 (220 + 110 · 4) · exp −0.12 · · 10−6 · 0.7564
10
εcd,0 = 2.533 · 10−4 For class N αds1 = 4, αds2 = 0.12
εcd = 0.24874 · 0.725 · 2.533 · 10−4 = −4.57 · 10−5
Drying shrinkage:
εcd = −4.57 · 10−5
shrinkage strain
εc (∞) = 2.5 · (ƒck − 10) · 10−6 = 2.5 (35 − 10) · 10−6 3.1.4 (6): Eq. 3.12: εc (∞)
εc (∞) = 6.25 · 10−5 = 0.0625 ◦ /◦◦
βs = βs (t) − βs (t0 ) 3.1.4 (6): Eq. 3.13: βs
p p p p
βs = 1 − e−0.2· t − 1 − e−0.2· t0 = e−0.2· t0 − e−0.2· t
βs = 0.104
εc (t) = βs (t) · εc (∞)
εc (t) = 0.1040 · 6.25 · 10−5
εc (t) = −6.502136 · 10−6
Total shrinkage:

εcs = −6.502136 · 10−6 + (−4.57) · 10−5
εcs = −5.218 · 10−5

ε absolute shrinkage strain
Δ3,cs = εcs · L/ 2
Δ3,cs = −5.218 · 10−5 · 10000 mm
Δ3,cs = −0.5218 mm
Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.1: ϕ(t, t0 ) creep ϕ(t, t0 ) = ϕ0 · βc (t, t0 )

coefficient
Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.2: ϕ0 notional ϕ0 = ϕRH · β(ƒcm ) · β(t0 )
creep coefficient
1 − RH/ 100

Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.3: ϕRH factor for ϕRH = 1 + p · α1 · α2
effect of relative humidity on creep 0.1 · 3 h0
16.8 p
Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.4: β(ƒcm ) factor β(ƒcm ) = p = 16.8/ 43 = 2.562
for effect of concrete strength on creep ƒcm
0.7
35

Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.8c: α1 , α2 , α3 α1 = = 0.8658 ≤ 1
coefficients to consider influence of con- ƒcm
crete strength
0.2
35

α2 = = 0.9597 ≤ 1
ƒcm
0.5
35

α3 = = 0.9022 ≤ 1
ƒcm
1 − 80/ 100

ϕRH = 1 + p
3
· 0.8658 · 0.9597 = 1.1852
0.1 · 400
1
Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.5: β(t0 ) factor β(t0 ) =
for effect of concrete age at loading on 0.1 + t00.20
creep
!α
9
Annex B.1 (2): Eq. B.9: t0,T tempera- t0 = t0,T · 1.2
+1 ≥ 0.5
ture adjusted age of concrete at loading 2 + t0,T
e−(4000/ [273+T(Δt )]−13.65) · Δt
Pn
t0,T = 100 · e−(4000/ [273+20]−13.65) = 100 · 1.0 = 100.0
0
9

Annex B.1 (2): Eq. B.9: α a power ⇒ t0 = 100 · +1 = 100
which depends on type of cement 2 + 1001.2
For class N α = 0
1
β(t0 ) = = 0.383
0.1 + 1000.20
The coefficient to describe the development of creep with time after

loading can be calculated according to EN 1992-1-1, Eq. B.7.:

0.3
(t − t0 )

βc (t, t0 ) = Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.7: βc (t, t0 ) co-
(βH + t − t0 ) efficient to describe the development of
In SOFiSTiK it is possible to modify and use custom creep and shrink-
age parameters, for more details see AQUA and AQB Manual. In our
case we are using the equation from fib Model Code 2010[16] (to verify
and show the MEXT feature in SOFiSTiK):
γ(t0 )
(t − t0 )

βc (t, t0 ) = fib Model Code 2010; Eq. 5.1-71a
(βH + t − t0 )
where:
1 1 1
γ(t0 ) = = = = 0.3773 fib Model Code 2010; Eq. 5.1-71b
3.5 3.5 2.65
2.3 + p 2.3 + p
t0 100
With MEXT NO 1 EIGE VAL 0.3773 the exponent 0.3 can be modified to
0.3773.
0.3773
(t − t0 )

βc (t, t0 ) = Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.7: βc (t, t0 ) co-
(βH + t − t0 ) efficient to describe the development of
βH = 1.5 · 1 + (0.012 · RH)18 · h0 + 250 · α3 ≤ 1500 · α3

βH = 1.5 · 1 + (0.012 · 80)18 · 400 + 250 · 0.9022

tional member size
βH = 1113.31 ≤ 1500 · 0.9022 = 1353.30
⇒ βc (t, t0 ) = 0.4916
ϕ0 = ϕRH · β(ƒcm ) · β(t0 )
ϕ0 = 1.1852 · 2.5619 · 0.383 = 1.1629
ϕ(t, t0 ) = ϕ0 · βc (t, t0 )
ϕ(t, t0 ) = 1.1629 · 0.4916 = 0.57
ϕeƒ ƒ (t, t0 ) = 0.57/ 1.05 = 0.5445 Annex B.1 (3): The values of ϕ(t, t0 )
According to EN, the creep value is related to the tangent Young’s the tangent modulus Ec
this, SOFiSTiK adopts this scaling for the computed creep coefficient gent modulus, which may be taken as
(in SOFiSTiK, all computations are consistently based on Ecm ). 1.05 · Ecm
Calculating the displacement:

σc
εcc (t, t0 ) = ϕ(t, t0 ) ·
Ecs
−0.5625
εcc (t, t0 ) = 0.57 · = −8.82430 · 10−6
36334.29
Δ
ε= → Δ3,cc = εcc · L/ 2


Δ3,cc = −8.82430 · 10−6 · 10000 mm = −0.08824 mm
4) Calculating the displacement at time when the loading is inac-

tive (t2 ≈ 300 and t2 > 300 days).
At this step the loading disappears therefore:
Δ4 = −Δ2 = 0.155 mm
5) Calculating the displacement at time t3 = 30 years.

ered
t = 11250 days
teƒ ƒ = t − t0 = 11250 − 300 = 11950 dys
→ 11950/ 365 = 30 yers
strain
strain
3.1.4 (6): Eq. 3.10: βds βds = βds (t, ts ) − βds (t0 , ts )
(t − ts ) (t0 − ts )
3.1.4 (6): h0 the notional size (mm) of βds = Ç − Ç
the cs h0 = 2Ac /  = 500 mm (t − ts ) + 0.04 · h30 (t0 − ts ) + 0.04 · h30
(11250 − 3) (300 − 3)
βds = p − p
(11250 − 3) + 0.04 · 4003 (300 − 3) + 0.04 · 4003
βds = 0.49097
3.1.4 (6): Tab. 3.3: kh coefficient de- kh = 0.725 for h0 = 400 mm

pending on h0
ƒcm

ƒcmo
drying shrinkage strain 3 3
RH 80

Annex B.2 (1): Eq. B.12: βRH βRH = 1.55 1 − = 1.55 1 − = 0.7564
RH the ambient relative humidity (%) RH0 100
43

εcd,0 = 0.85 (220 + 110 · 4) · exp −0.12 · · 10−6 · 0.7564
10
For class N αds1 = 4, αds2 = 0.12 εcd,0 = 2.533 · 10−4
εcd = βds (t, ts ) · kh · εcd,0

εcd = 0.49097 · 0.725 · 2.533 · 10−4 = −9.02 · 10−5
Drying shrinkage:
εcd = −9.02 · 10−5
shrinkage strain
εc (∞) = 2.5 · (ƒck − 10) · 10−6 = 2.5 (35 − 10) · 10−6 3.1.4 (6): Eq. 3.12: εc (∞)
εc (∞) = 6.25 · 10−5 = 0.0625 ◦ /◦◦
βs = βs (t) − βs (t0 ) 3.1.4 (6): Eq. 3.13: βs
p p p p
βs = 1 − e−0.2· t − 1 − e−0.2· t0 = e−0.2· t0 − e−0.2· t
βs = 0.03130
εc (t) = βs (t) · εc (∞)
εc (t) = 0.03130 · 6.25 · 10−5
εc (t) = −1.95632 · 10−6
Total shrinkage:
εcs = −1.95632 · 10−6 + (−9.02) · 10−5
εcs = −9.212 · 10−5

ε absolute shrinkage strain
Δ5,cs = εcs · L/ 2
Δ5,cs = −9.212 · 10−5 · 10000 mm
Δ5,cs = −0.9212 mm
ϕ(t, t0 ) = ϕ0 · βc (t, t0 ) Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.1: ϕ(t, t0 ) creep

coefficient
ϕ0 = ϕRH · β(ƒcm ) · β(t0 ) Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.2: ϕ0 notional
creep coefficient
1 − RH/ 100

ϕRH = 1 + p · α1 · α2 Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.3: ϕRH factor for
0.1 · 3 h0 effect of relative humidity on creep

16.8 p
Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.4: β(ƒcm ) factor β(ƒcm ) = p = 16.8/ 43 = 2.562
for effect of concrete strength on creep ƒcm
0.7
35

Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.8c: α1 , α2 , α3 α1 = = 0.8658 ≤ 1
coefficients to consider influence of con- ƒcm
crete strength
0.2
35

α2 = = 0.9597 ≤ 1
ƒcm
0.5
35

α3 = = 0.9022 ≤ 1
ƒcm
1 − 80/ 100

ϕRH = 1+ p
3
· 0.8658 · 0.9597 = 1.1852
0.1 · 400
1
Annex B.1 (1): Eq. B.5: β(t0 ) factor β(t0 ) =
for effect of concrete age at loading on 0.1 + t00.20
creep
!α
9
Annex B.1 (2): Eq. B.9: t0,T tempera- t0 = t0,T · 1.2
+1 ≥ 0.5
ture adjusted age of concrete at loading 2 + t0,T
e−(4000/ [273+T(Δt )]−13.65) · Δt
Pn
t0,T = 300 · e−(4000/ [273+20]−13.65) = 300 · 1.0 = 300.0
0
9

Annex B.1 (2): Eq. B.9: α a power ⇒ t0 = 300 · +1 = 300
which depends on type of cement 2 + 3001.2
For class N α = 0
1
β(t0 ) = = 0.3097
0.1 + 3000.20
The coefficient to describe the development of creep with time after

loading can be calculated according to EN 1992-1-1, Eq. B.7.:
0.3
(t − t0 )

In SOFiSTiK it is possible to modify and use custom creep and shrink-
age parameters, for more details see AQUA and AQB Manual. In our
case we are using the equation from fib Model Code 2010[16] (to verify
and show the MEXT feature in SOFiSTiK).
With MEXT NO 1 EIGE VAL 0.3773 the exponent 0.3 can be modified to
0.3773.
0.3773
(t − t0 )

βH = 1.5 · 1 + (0.012 · RH)18 · h0 + 250 · α3 ≤ 1500 · α3

βH = 1.5 · 1 + (0.012 · 80)18 · 400 + 250 · 0.9022

tional member size
βH = 1113.31 ≤ 1500 · 0.9022 = 1353.30
⇒ βc (t, t0 ) = 0.9641

ϕ0 = ϕRH · β(ƒcm ) · β(t0 )
ϕ0 = 1.1852 · 2.5619 · 0.3097 = 0.94067
ϕ(t, t0 ) = ϕ0 · βc (t, t0 )
ϕ(t, t0 ) = 0.94067 · 0.9641 = 0.91
ϕeƒ ƒ (t, t0 ) = 0.91/ 1.05 = 0.8637 Annex B.1 (3): The values of ϕ(t, t0 )
According to EN, the creep value is related to the tangent Young’s the tangent modulus Ec
this, SOFiSTiK adopts this scaling for the computed creep coefficient gent modulus, which may be taken as
(in SOFiSTiK, all computations are consistently based on Ecm ). 1.05 · Ecm
σc
εcc (t, t0 ) = ϕ(t, t0 ) ·
Ecs
−0.5625
εcc (t, t0 ) = 0.91 · = −1.4087 · 10−5
36334.29
Δ
ε= → Δ5,cc = εcc · L/ 2

Δ5,cc = −1.4087 · 10−5 · 10000 mm = −0.1408 mm
CALCULATING THE DISPLACEMENT:
- 4010 stripping concrete
Δ4010 = 0 mm
- 4015 K creep step
Δ4015 = Δ1,cs
Δ4015 = −0.688 mm
- 4020 Start loading A
Δ4020 = Δ1,cs + Δ2
Δ4020 = −0.6881 − 0.155
Δ4020 = −0.8431 mm
- 4025 K creep step
Δ4025 = Δ1,cs + Δ2 + Δ3,cs + Δ3,cc
Δ4025 = −0.6881 − 0.155 − 0.08824 − 0.5218
Δ4025 = −1.45314 mm
- 4030 Stop loading A
Δ4030 = Δ1,cs + Δ2 + Δ3,cs + Δ3,cc − Δ4
Δ4030 = −0.6881 − 0.155 − 0.08824 − 0.5218 + 0.155

Δ4030 = −1.29814 mm
- 4035 K creep step
Δ4035 = Δ4030 + Δ5,cs − Δ5,cc
Δ4035 = −1.29814 − 0.9212 + 0.140
Δ4035 ≈ −2.08 mm

23.5 Conclusion
This example shows the calculation of the time dependent displacements due to creep and shrinkage.
It has been shown that the results are in very good agreement with the reference solution.
23.6 Literature
[16] fib Model Code 2010. fib Model Code for Concrete Structures 2010. International Federation for
Structural Concrete (fib). 2010.


DCE-EN22: Stress Relaxation of Prestressing Steel - EN 1992-1-1
24 DCE-EN22: Stress Relaxation of Prestressing Steel -

EN 1992-1-1
Overview

Input file(s): relaxation en1992.dat

stress caused by the deformation of prestressing steel due to steel-relaxation, under the permanent
loads.
h My
Np
zp
Ap

This example is concerned with the calculation of relaxation losses on a prestressed concrete cs, subject
to bending and prestress force. The content of this problem is covered by the following parts of EN 1992-
1-1:2004 [6]:
• Properties (Section 3.3.2)
• Annex D: Detailed calculation method for prestressing steel relaxation losses (Section D.1)
• Strength (Section 3.3.3)
In this Benchmark the stress loss due to relaxation will be examined, creep and shrinkage losses are
neglected and disabled.

Benchmark 17 is here extended for the case of steel relaxation losses developing on a prestressed
concrete simply supported beam. The analysed system can be seen in Fig. 24.2, with properties as
defined in Table 24.1. Further information about the tendon geometry and prestressing can be found

in benchmark 17. The beam consists of a rectangular cs and is prestressed and loaded with its own
weight. A calculation of the relaxation stress losses is performed in the middle of the span with respect
to EN 1992-1-1:2004 [6]. The calculation steps are presented below and the results are given in Table
24.2 for the calculation with AQB.
C 35/ 45 h = 100.0 cm Mg = 1250 kNm t = 1000 h
Y 1770 b = 100.0 cm Np = −3653.0 kN
RH = 80 L = 20.0 m
Ap = 28.5 cm2
Table 24.2: Results
Result AQB Ref.

Δσpr,tot 14.38 MP 14.38 MP
ΔPpr 40.95 kN 40.95 kN
ΔPpr
[%] 1.12% 1.12%
P0


Design with respect to EN 1992-1-1:2004 [6]
• Material:
C 35/ 45
ƒck = 35 N/ mm2
ƒcm = 43 N/ mm2

ƒp0,1k = 1520 N/ mm2 3.3.2, 3.3.3: ƒp0,1k 0.1% proof-stress of
• Cross-section:
Ac = 1.0 · 1.0 = 1 m2
Ratio αE,p = Ep / Ecm = 195000 / 34077 = 5.7223
Ade = Ac + Ap · αE,p = 1.013 m2
• Prestressing forces and stresses
tensioning, should not exceed the following value
Pm = Ap · σp,m
where σp,m = mn(0.8 · ƒpk ; 0.90 · ƒp0,1k )
Pm = Ap · 0.80 · ƒpk = 28.5 · 10−4 · 0.80 · 1770 = 4035.6 kN
Pm = Ap · 0.90 · ƒp0,1k = 28.5 · 10−4 · 0.90 · 1520 = 3898.8 kN
→ Pm = 3898.8 kN and σp,m = 1368 N/ mm2

defined in [6] 3.3.6: Fig. 3.10

5.10.3 (2): Eq. 5.43: Pm0 initial pre- Pm0 () = Ap · σp,m0 ()

Pm0 = Ap · 0.85 · ƒp0,1k = 28.5 · 10−4 · 0.85 · 1520 = 3682.2 kN
→ Pm0 = 3682.2 kN and σp,m0 = 1292 N/ mm2

along the beam are not in the scope of this benchmark and will not be
described here. The complete diagram can be seen in benchmark 17,
In this benchmark the beam number 10010 is analysed therefore the

prestressing force is obtained from TENDON:
P0 = 3653 kN
σp,0 = 1281.755 MP
Calculating the prestressing losses due relaxation
According to EN 1992-1-1, 3.3.2 (5), the value of ρ1000 is expressed

as a percentage ratio of the initial stress and is obtained for an initial
stress equal to 0.7 · ƒp , where ƒp is the actual tensile strength of the
prestressing steel samples. For design calculations, the characteristic
tensile strength (ƒpk ) is used.
σp0 1281.755
μ= = = 0.724155 ≥ μmn = 0.55
ƒpk 1770
The relaxation loss may be obtained from the manufactures test certifi-
cates or defined as percentage ratio of the variation of the prestressing
stress over the initial prestressing stress, should be determined by ap-
EC2-1-1, 3.3.2 (7): Eq. 3.29 plying next expression:
0.75·(1−μ)
Δσpr t

= 0.66 · ρ1000 · e9.1·μ · · 10−5
σp 1000
0.75·(1−μ)
t

t = 1000 h → = 1.00
1000
The values for ρ1000 can be either assumed equal to 8% for Class 1,
EC2-1-1, 3.3.2 (6) 2.5% for Class 2, and 4% for Class 3, or taken from the certificate.
For prestressing steel Y 1570/1770 → ρ1000 = 2.5 %
The relaxation is checked for μ = 0.7 and for μ = 0.72415

Δσpr
= 0.66 · ρ1000 · e9.1·0.70 · 10−5 · 100 = 0.963695 %
σp
Δσpr
= 0.66 · ρ1000 · e9.1·0.724155 · 10−5 · 100 = 1.200616 %
σp

Δσpr = σp · 1.200616 %
Δσpr = 1281.755 · 1.200616 % = 15.388 MP
AQB reduces the initial stress according to DIN 1045-1: DIN 1045-1 8.7.3 (6)
Ep
εcs · Ep + Δσpr + · ϕ(t, t0 ) · σc,QP
Ecm
ΔPc+s+r = Ap DIN 1045-1 8.7.3 (6): ΔPc+s+r time de-
Ep Ap Ac

1+ · 1+ · zcp [1 + 0.8 · ϕ(t, t0 )]
2
Ecm Ac c
Creep and shrinkage is not taken into account therefore we have:
εcs · Ep = 0
Ep
· ϕ(t, t0 ) · σc,QP = 0
Ecm
1 + 0.8 · ϕ(t, t0 ) = 1
15.388
Δσp,c+s+r =
195000 28.5 · 10−4 0.9926

1+ · · 1+ · 0.3901 2
34077 0.9926 0.08214
15.388
Δσp,c+s+r = = 14.70 MP
1.046644
Now we have:
σp0 = σpg0 − 0.3 · Δσp,c+s+r
σp0 = 1281.755 − 0.3 · 14.70 = 1277.345 MP DIN 1045-1 8.7.3 (6)
Now with the reduced stress the μ value is calculated again (iteration):
σp0 1277.345
μ= = = 0.72166 ≥ μmn = 0.55
ƒpk 1770
Δσpr
= 0.66 · ρ1000 · e9.1·0.72166 · 10−5 · 100 = 1.1736 %
σp
Δσpr = 1281.755 · 1.1736% = 15.043 MP
The total loss:
Δσpr,tot = Δσpr,t + Δσpr,c
Δσpr,t = Δσpr = 15.043 MP
Δσpr,c = (εk0 + εky · zcp − εkz · ycp ) · Ep εk0 , εky and εkz - tendon strain
Δσpr,c = (1.212 · 10−6 + 5.673 · 10−6 · 0.39) · 1.95 · 108 / 1000
Δσpr,c = 0.667968 MP
Δσpr,tot = 15.043 − 0.667968 = 14.37 MP
ΔPpr = Δσpr,tot · Ap = 14.37 · 28.5 · 10−4 = 40.9545 kN
Prestress force loss in [%]:

ΔPpr
ΔPpr [%] =
P0
40.9545
ΔPpr [%] = = 0.01120 · 100% = 1.12 %
3653

24.5 Conclusion
This example shows the calculation of the time dependent losses due to relaxation. It has been shown
that the reference solution and the AQB solution are in very good agreement.
24.6 Literature


DCE-EN23: Stress Relaxation of Prestressing Steel - DIN EN 1992-1-1
25 DCE-EN23: Stress Relaxation of Prestressing Steel -

DIN EN 1992-1-1
Overview

Input file(s): relaxation din en1992.dat

stress caused by the deformation of prestressing steel due to steel-relaxation, under the permanent
loads.
h My
Np
zp
Ap

This example is concerned with the calculation of relaxation losses on a prestressed concrete cs, subject
to bending and prestress force. The content of this problem is covered by the following parts of DIN EN
1992-1-1:2004 [1] [2]:
• Properties (Section 3.3.2)
• Annex D: Detailed calculation method for prestressing steel relaxation losses (Section D.1)
• Strength (Section 3.3.3)
• DIN-HB, ”Zulassung Spannstahl” [17]
In this Benchmark the stress loss due to relaxation will be examined, creep and shrinkage losses are
neglected and disabled.

Benchmark 17 is here extended for the case of steel relaxation losses developing on a prestressed
concrete simply supported beam. The analysed system can be seen in Fig. 25.2, with properties as

defined in Table 25.1. Further information about the tendon geometry and prestressing can be found
in benchmark 17. The beam consists of a rectangular cs and is prestressed and loaded with its own
weight. A calculation of the relaxation stress losses is performed in the middle of the span with respect
to DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 [1] [2]. The calculation steps are presented below and the results are given in
Table 25.2 for the calculation with AQB.
C 35/ 45 h = 100.0 cm Mg = 1250 kNm t = 1000 h
Y 1770 b = 100.0 cm Np = −3653.0 kN
RH = 80 L = 20.0 m
Ap = 28.5 cm2
Table 25.2: Results
Result AQB Ref.

Δσpr,tot 29.15 MP 29.15 MP
ΔPpr 83.071 kN 83.071 kN
ΔPpr
[%] 2.274% 2.274%
P0


Design with respect to DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 [1] [2]
• Material:
C 35/ 45
ƒck = 35 N/ mm2
ƒcm = 43 N/ mm2

ƒp0,1k = 1520 N/ mm2 3.3.2, 3.3.3: ƒp0,1k 0.1% proof-stress of
• Cross-section:
Ac = 1.0 · 1.0 = 1 m2
Ratio αE,p = Ep / Ecm = 195000 / 34077 = 5.7223
Ade = Ac + Ap · αE,p = 1.013 m2
• Prestressing forces and stresses
tensioning, should not exceed the following value
Pm = Ap · σp,m
where σp,m = mn(0.8 · ƒpk ; 0.90 · ƒp0,1k )
Pm = Ap · 0.80 · ƒpk = 28.5 · 10−4 · 0.80 · 1770 = 4035.6 kN
Pm = Ap · 0.90 · ƒp0,1k = 28.5 · 10−4 · 0.90 · 1520 = 3898.8 kN
→ Pm = 3898.8 kN and σp,m = 1368 N/ mm2

defined in [1] 3.3.6: Fig. 3.10

5.10.3 (2): Eq. 5.43: Pm0 initial pre- Pm0 () = Ap · σp,m0 ()

Pm0 = Ap · 0.85 · ƒp0,1k = 28.5 · 10−4 · 0.85 · 1520 = 3682.2 kN
→ Pm0 = 3682.2 kN and σp,m0 = 1292 N/ mm2

along the beam are not in the scope of this benchmark and will not be
described here. The complete diagram can be seen in benchmark 17,
In this benchmark the beam number 10010 is analysed therefore the

prestressing force is obtained from TENDON:
P0 = 3653 kN
σp,0 = 1281.755 MP
Calculating the prestressing losses due relaxation
According to DIN EN 1992-1-1, 3.3.2 (5), the value of ρ1000 is ex-

pressed as a percentage ratio of the initial stress and is obtained for
an initial stress equal to 0.7 · ƒp , where ƒp is the actual tensile strength
of the prestressing steel samples. For design calculations, the charac-
teristic tensile strength (ƒpk ) is used.
σp0 1281.755
μ= = = 0.724155 ≥ μmn = 0.55
ƒpk 1770
The formulas in section DIN EN 1992-1-1, 3.3.2 (7) are not used
for the calculation, according to DiBt [17] for DIN EN 1992-1-1 [6] the
relaxation values are obtained from Table 25.3.
Please refer to Fig. 25.3 to see the differences between DIN EN 1992-
1-1 and EN 1992-1-1 (for t=500000 h).
Table 25.3: Relaxation values per hour
μ = R/Rn 1 10 200 1000 5000 5 · 105 1 · 106
0.45 <1%
0.50 -
0.55 - 1.0 1.2
0.60 - 1.2 2.5 2.8
0.65 - 1.3 2.0 4.5 5.0
0.70 - 1.0 2.0 3.0 6.5 7.0
0.75 - 1.2 2.5 3.0 4.5 9.0 10.0

μ = R/Rn 1 10 200 1000 5000 5 · 105 1 · 106
0.80 1.0 2.0 4.0 5.0 6.5 13.0 14.0
25 %
CLASS R1 new (old R1)
Relaxation losses Δσpr / σp for t=500000 h
20 %
15 %
13.0 % abZ
CLASS R2 new (old R3)
10 %
9.0 %
old R2
6.5 %
5% 4.5 %
2.5 %
0%
0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80
μ = σp / ƒpk
Figure 25.3: The relaxation loss differences according to EC2 and abZ
(DiBt)
t = 1000 h
AQB is interpolating the values from Table 25.3.
Δσpr (3 − 2) · (0.724 − 0.7)

= + 2.0 = 2.483
σp 0.75 − 0.7
Δσpr = σp · 2.483 % = 1281.75 · 2.483% = 31.82 MP
AQB reduces the initial stress according to DIN 1045-1: DIN 1045-1 8.7.3 (6)
Ep
εcs · Ep + Δσpr + · ϕ(t, t0 ) · σc,QP
Ecm
ΔPc+s+r = Ap DIN 1045-1 8.7.3 (6): ΔPc+s+r Time de-
Ep Ap Ac

1+ · 1+ 2
· zcp [1 + 0.8 · ϕ(t, t0 )]
Ecm Ac c
Creep and shrinkage is not taken into account therefore we have:
εcs · Ep = 0
Ep
· ϕ(t, t0 ) · σc,QP = 0
Ecm
1 + 0.8 · ϕ(t, t0 ) = 1

31.82
Δσp,c+s+r =
195000 28.5 · 10−4 0.9926

1+ · · 1+ · 0.39012
34077 0.9926 0.08214
31.82
Δσp,c+s+r = = 30.402 MP
1.046644
Now we have:
σp0 = σpg0 − 0.3 · Δσp,c+s+r
DIN 1045-1 8.7.3 (6) σp0 = 1281.755 − 0.3 · 30.4020 = 1272.631 MP
Now with the reduced stress the μ value is calculated again (iteration):
σp0 1272.631
μ= = = 0.719 ≥ μmn = 0.55
ƒpk 1770
Interpolating the relaxation values from Table 25.3:
Δσpr (3 − 2) · (0.719 − 0.7)

= + 2.0 = 2.38 %
σp 0.75 − 0.7
Δσpr = 1281.755 · 2.38% = 30.50 MP
The total loss:
Δσpr,tot = Δσpr,t + Δσpr,c
Δσpr,t = Δσpr = 30.5093 MP
εk0 , εky and εkz - tendon strain Δσpr,c = (εk0 + εky · zcp − εkz · ycp ) · Ep
Δσpr,c = (2.457 · 10−6 + 1.15 · 10−5 · 0.39) · 1.95 · 108 / 1000
Δσpr,c = 1.354 MP
Δσpr,tot = 30.5 − 1.354 = 29.15 MP
ΔPpr = Δσpr,tot · Ap = 29.15 · 28.5 · 10−4 · 1000 = 83.071 kN
Prestress-force loss in [%]:

ΔPpr
ΔPpr [%] =
P0
83.08
ΔPpr [%] = = 0.02274 · 100% = 2.274 %
3653

25.5 Conclusion
This example shows the calculation of the time dependent losses due to relaxation. It has been shown
that the reference solution and the AQB solution are in very good agreement.
25.6 Literature
[17] DiBt. Allgemeine bauaufsichtliche Zulassung. Deutsches Institut für Bautechnik. 2015.


DCE-EN24: Lateral Torsional Buckling
26 DCE-EN24: Lateral Torsional Buckling
Overview

Module(s): BDK
Input file(s): eccs 119 example 5.dat

The problem consists of a simply supported beam with a steel I-section, which is subjected to com-
pression and biaxial bending, as shown in Fig. 26.1. The beam is checked against lateral torsional
buckling.
NEd
My,Ed
qz
My,Ed
NEd
Mz,Ed

This example is concerned with the buckling resistance of steel members. It deals with the spatial
behavior of the beam and the occurrence of lateral torsional buckling as a potential mode of failure. The
content of this problem is covered by the following parts of EN 1993-1-1:2005 [7]:

• Method 1: Interaction factors kj for interaction formula in 6.3.3(4) (Annex A)

The I-section, an IPE 500, with properties as defined in Table 26.1, is to be checked for lateral torsional
buckling, with respect to EN 1993-1-1:2005 [7]. The calculation steps are presented below. The results
are tabulated in Table 26.2 and compared to the results of reference [18].
S 235 IPE 500 My,Ed = 100 kNm
E = 210000 N/ mm2 L = 3.750 m Mz,Ed = 25 kNm
γM1 = 1.0 h = 468 mm qz = 170 kN/ m
bƒ = 200 mm NEd = 500 kN
tƒ = 16.0 mm
t = 10.2 mm
A = 115.5 cm2
y = 48197 cm4
z = 2142 cm4
T = 88.57 cm4
 = 1236 × 103 cm6
Wp,y = 2194 cm3
Wp,z = 335.9 cm3
We,y = 1927.9 cm3
We,z = 214.2 cm3
Table 26.2: Results
SOF. Ref. [18]
λy 0.195 0.195
χy 1.0 1.0
λz 0.927 0.927
ϕz 1.054 1.054

SOF. Ref. [18]
χz 0.644 0.644
μy 1.000 1.000
μz 0.937 0.937
y 1.138 1.138
z 1.500 1.500
Cmy,0 1.001 0.999
Cmz,0 0.771 0.771
Cmy 1.001 1.000
Cmz 0.771 0.771
λ0 0.759 0.757
C1 1.194 1.2
CmLT 1.139 1.137
λLT 0.695 0.691
LT 0.825 0.822
χLT 0.787 0.789
χLT,mod 0.821 0.826
Cyy 0.981 0.981
Cyz 0.862 0.863
Czy 0.842 0.843
Czz 1.013 1.014
nm − y (Eq.6.61 [7]) 0.966 0.964
nm − z (Eq.6.62 [7]) 0.868 0.870


Design Load:
MzE d = 25 kNm
MyE d = −100 kNm at the start and end of the beam
MyE d = 199 kNm at the middle of the beam
NEd = 25 kNm
Tab. 5.5: Classification of cross-section The cross-section is classified as Class 1, as demonstrated in [18].
π 2 Ey
6.3.1.2 (1): Ncr is the elastic critical Ncr,y = = 71035 kN
force for the relevant buckling mode L2
v
uAƒ
y
λy = = 0.195
t
6.3.1.2 (1): λ non dimensional slender-
ness for class 1 cross-sections Ncr,y
6.3.1.2 (4): λ ≤ 0.2 buckling effects λy < 0.2 thus χy = 1.0

may be ignored
π 2 Ez
Ncr,z = = 3157 kN
L2
v
uAƒ
y
λz = = 0.927
t
Ncr,z
2
h i
z = 0.5 1 + αz λz − 0.2 + λz
for rolled I-sections with h / b > 1.2 and buckling about z-z axis →
buckling curve b
6.3.1.2 (2): Table 6.1: Imperfection fac- for buckling curve b → αz = 0.34
tors for buckling curves
z = 1.054
1
6.3.1.2 (1): Eq. 6.49: χz reduction fac- χz = r = 0.644 ≤ 1.0
2
tor for buckling
z + 2z − λz
The stability verification will be done according to Method 1-Annex A

of EN 1993-1-1:2005 [7]. Therefore we need to identify the interaction
factors according to tables A.1-A.2 of Annex A, EN 1993-1-1:2005 [7].
Auxiliary terms:
NEd
1−
Ncr,y
Annex A: Tab. A.1: Interaction factors μy = = 1.0
kj (6.3.3(4)), Auxiliary terms NEd
1 − χy
Ncr,y
wise specified.

NEd
1−
Ncr,z
μz = = 0.937
NEd
1 − χz
Ncr,z
Wp,y
y = = 1.138 ≤ 1.5
We,y
Wp,z
z = = 1.568 > 1.5 → z = 1.5
We,z
Determination of Cm,0 factors
The general formula for combined end moments and transverse loads
is used here.
π 2 Ey |δz |

NEd
Cmy,0 = 1 + −1 Annex A: Tab. A.2: Equivalent uniform
2
L My,Ed,rght Ncr,y moment factors Cm,0

δz = 3.33 mm
Cmy,0 = 1.001
The formula for linearly distributed bending moments is used here.

Mz,ED,rght
ψz = = 0/ 25 = 0
Mz,Ed,eƒ t
NEd
Cmz,0 = 0.79 + 0.21ψz + 0.36(ψz − 0.33) = 0.771
Ncr,z
Cmz = Cmz,0 = 0.771
Resistance to lateral torsional buckling
Because T = 8.857 × 10−7m4 < y = 4.820 × 10−4m4 , the cross-

section shape is such that the member may be prone to lateral torsional
buckling.
The support conditions of the member are assumed to be the so-called

”fork conditions”, thus LLT = L.
v
u π 2 E π 2 E

z
Mcr,0 = GT + = 895kNm
t
L2LT L2LT
v
uW
t p,y ƒy
λ0 = = 0.759 Annex A: Tab. A.1: λ0 : non-
Mcr,0 dimensional slenderness for lateral-
torsional buckling due to uniform bend-
π 2 E

A ing moment
Ncr,T = GT + = 5822kN
y + z L2LT
C1 = 1.194 determined by eigenvalue analysis

v
NEd NEd

p u
λ0m = 0.2 C1 4
1− 1− = 0.205
t
Annex A: Tab. A.1: Auxiliary terms
Ncr,z Ncr,T

λ0 = 0.759 >= λ0m = 0.205
Lateral torsional buckling has to be taken into account.

T
Annex A: Tab. A.1: Auxiliary terms LT = 1 − = 0.998 >= 0
y
My,Ed,rght A
Annex A: Tab. A.1: εy for class 1 cross- εy = = 2.383
section NEd We,y
p
αLT εy
Cmy = Cmy,0 + 1 − Cmy,0 = 1.001

1 + αLT εy
p
αLT
CmLT = C2my v = 1.139 ≥ 1.0
NEd NEd
u
1− 1−
t
Ncr,z Ncr,T
thus CmLT = 1.0.
6.3.2.2: Lateral torsional buckling The general case method is chosen here.
curves - General case
Mcr = 1068 kNm, determined by eigenvalue analysis
v v
uW
t p,y ƒy t 2194 · 10−6 · 235 · 106
u
6.3.2.2 (1): λLT non dimensional slen- λLT = = = 0.695
derness for lateral torsional buckling Mcr 1079 · 103
2
h i
LT = 0.5 1 + αLT λLT − 0.2 + λLT
6.3.2.2 (1): Table 6.4: Recommenda- for rolled I-sections and h / b > 2 → buckling curve b
tion for the selection of ltb curve for
cross-sections using Eq. 6.56 for buckling curve b → αLT = 0.34
6.3.2.2 (2): Table 6.4: Recommenda-
tion values for imperfection factors αLT
LT = 0.825
for ltb curves
1
6.3.2.2 (1): Eq. 6.56: χLT reduction fac- χLT = r
2
tor for ltb
LT + 2LT − λLT
χLT = 0.787 ≤ 1.0
kc = 0.907 determined by eigenvalue analysis through the C1 factor.

2
6.3.2.3 (2): For taking into account the ƒ = 1 − 0.5 (1 − kc ) 1 − 2 λLT − 0.8 = 0.959 ≤ 1.0
moment distribution between the lateral
restraints of members the reduction fac-
χLT
tor χLT may be modified χLT,mod = = 0.821 ≤ 1.0
ƒ
Elastic-plastic bending resistances Nc,Rk = A · ƒy = 2715 kN
Mp,y,Rk = Wp,y · ƒy = 516 kNm
Mp,z,Rk = Wp,z · ƒy = 78.9 kNm

λm = λz = 0.927 Annex A: Tab. A.1: Auxiliary terms:

λm = m(λy , λz )
2 My,Ed Mz,Ed
bLT = 0.5 · αLT · λ0 = 0.428 Annex A: Tab. A.1: Auxiliary terms
Mp,y,Rk Mp,z,Rk
χLT,mod
γM1 γM1
1.6 1.6

2
Cyy = 1 + y − 1 · C2my λm · C2my λm

2− −
y y

NEd 
· − bLT 
Nc,Rk 
γM1
We,y
Cyy = 0.981 ≥ = 0.879
Wp,y
2
λ0 My,Ed
cLT = 10 · αLT · 4
= 0.471
Mp,y,Rk
5 + λz C
my · χLT,mod
γM1
 
2
 
Cmy λm 2
 NEd 
Cyz = 1 + (z − 1) 
 2 − 14
  − c LT

z5 Nc,Rk 
γM1
v
u z We,z
Cyz = 0.862 ≥ 0.6 = 0.439
t
y Wp,z
λ0 My,Ed Mz,Ed
dLT = 2 · αLT · 4 Mp,y,Rk Mp,z,Rk
0.1 + λz C
my · χLT,mod Cmz
γM1 γM1
= 0.348
 
2
 
 C2my λm NEd 
Czy = 1 + y − 1 
 2−
 14  − dLT 
y5 Nc,Rk 
γM1
t y We,y
v
Czy = 0.842 ≥ 0.6 = 0.459
z Wp,y
λ0 My,Ed
eLT = 1.7 · αLT · 4
= 0.721
Mp,y,Rk
0.1 + λz C
my · χLT,mod
γM1

1.6 1.6

2
Czz = 1 + (z − 1) 2− · C2mz λm − · C2mz λm − eLT
z z

NEd 
· 
Nc,Rk 
γM1
We,z
Czz = 1.013 ≥ = 0.667
Wp,z

Verification 6.3.3 Uniform members in bending and

axial compression
According to 1993-1-1:2005, 6.3.3 (4), members which are subjected to
combined bending and axial compression should satisfy:
NEd  C
 mLT Cmy · My,Ed
+ μy 
Nc,Rk NEd Mp,y,Rk

 χLT,mod
χy 1− Cyy ·
γM1 Ncr,y γM1

v
u Cmz Mz,Ed
t z

+0.6

NEd Mp,z,Rk

y 
1− Cyz
Ncr,z γM1
6.3.3 (4): Eq. 6.61: Members which are
subjected to combined bending and ax-
 ial compression should satisfy:
500  1.139 1.001 · 198.9

+ 1.0 
2715  0.821 500 516

1.0 1− 0.981
1.0 71035 1.0

v
t 1.500 0.771 · 25
u

+0.6 
500 78.9 

1.138
1− 0.862
3157 1.0
= 0.966 ≤ 1.00
→ Satisfactory

v
NEd  u
t y CmLT Cmy · My,Ed
+ μz 0.6

Nc,Rk NEd Mp,y,Rk

 z χLT,mod
χz 1− Czy
γM1 Ncr,y γM1

Cmz Mz,Ed 
+

NEd Mp,z,Rk


1− Czz
Ncr,z γM1
6.3.3 (4): Eq. 6.62: Members which are
subjected to combined bending and ax-
 ial compression should satisfy:
v
500 t 1.138 1.139
u
+ 0.937 +0.6
2715 1.500 0.821
0.644
1.0 
1.001 · 198.9 0.771 · 25 

· + 
500 516 500 78.9 

1− 0.842 1− 1.013
71035 1.0 3157 1.0

= 0.868 ≤ 1
→Satisfactory

26.5 Conclusion
This example shows the ckeck for lateral torsional buckling of steel members. The small deviations
that occur in some results come from the fact that there are some small differences in the sectional
values between SOFiSTiK and the reference solution. Therefore, these deviations are of no interest for
the specific verification process. In conclusion, it has been shown that the results are reproduced with
excellent accuracy.
26.6 Literature
[18] ECCS Technical Committee 8 Stability. Rules for Member Stability in EN 1993-1-1, Background
documentation and design guidelines. Tech. rep. No 119. European Convention for Constructional
Steelwork (ECCS), 2006.


DCE-EN25: Shear between web and flanges of Hollow CS acc. DIN EN 1992-2
27 DCE-EN25: Shear between web and flanges of Hollow

CS acc. DIN EN 1992-2
Overview

Design Code(s): DIN EN 1992-1-1, DIN EN 1992-2
Module(s): AQB
Input file(s): hollow shear web flange.dat

The problem consists of a Hollow section, as shown in Fig. 27.1. The cs is designed for shear, the shear
between web and flanges of the Hollow CS is considered and the required reinforcement is determined.
hh
h
d d1
bh

This example is concerned with the shear design of Hollow-sections, for the ultimate limit state. The
content of this problem is covered by the following parts of DIN EN 1992-2:2010 [19] and DIN EN 1992-
1-1:2004 [1]:

A
σ
ƒtk,c = 525N/ mm2
ƒyk
ƒyd = ƒyk / γs
B A Idealised
B Design
εd = 25 0 /00

The Hollow-section, with properties as defined in Table 27.1, is to be designed for shear, with respect to
DIN EN 1992-2:2010 (German National Annex) [19]. The structure analysed, consists of a single span
beam with a distributed load in gravity direction. The cross-section geometry, as well as the shear cut
under consideration can be seen in Fig. 27.3.
25 110 25
1 1
20
75
35
1 1
20
160
Figure 27.3: Cross-section Geometry, Properties and Shear Cuts in cm
C 30/ 37 hh = 35 cm, h = 75.0 cm Pg = 155 kN/ m
B 500B hƒ = 20 cm Mt = 100 kN/ m
d1 = 5.0 cm
bh = 110 cm, b = 160 cm

Single span beam
Single span 155.0
beam 155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0
The system with its loading as well as the moment and shear force are shown in Fig. 27.4-27.7. The
0.00
reference calculation steps are presented in the next section and the results are given in Table 27.2.
155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0 155.0
SOFiSTiK AG - www.sofistik.de SOFiSTiK AG - www.sofistik.de
0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00 m
0.00
Y X
kN/m ) (Max=155.0)
Z
Figure 27.4: Loaded Structure (Pg )
0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00 m
0.00
1001 1002Loadcase 1 sum_PZ=1550.0
All loads (in components), 1003 kN 1004
. , (1 cm 3D = unit)1005 1006
Beam line load (force) 1007
in global Z (Unit=160.2 1008 1009 1010 M 1 : 41
SOFiSTiK YAGX * Bruckmannring
kN/m 38 * 85764 Oberschleißheim
) (Max=155.0) Page 1
SOFiSTiK Z2016-3 WINGRAF - GRAPHICS FOR FINITE ELEMENTS (V 18.03) 2016-02-17
697.5
697.5
1240
1240
SINGLE SPAN BEAM
1628
1628
1860
1860
1938
0.00
1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010
697.5
697.5
Figure 27.5: Resulting Bending Moment My
1240
1240
2.00
-2.00
1628
1628
0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00 m
1860
1860
1938

Y X
Z
-500.0
-400.0
-300.0
-200.0
-100.0
0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00 m

Y X
Z
0.00
1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010
100.0

200.0
300.0

400.0
500.0
SINGLE SPAN BEAM
Figure 27.6: Resulting Torsional Moment Mt
-2.00
2.00
775.0
620.0
465.0
310.0
0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00 m

155.0
Beam Elements , Torsional moment Mt, Loadcase 1 sum_PZ=1550.0 kN . , 1 cm 3D = 500.0 kNm (Min=-500.0) (Max=500.0) M 1 : 41
Y X
Number of element, Beam Elements(Max=1010), Nodal sequences
Z
0.00
1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010
-155.0
-310.0
-465.0
-620.0
-775.0
Figure 27.7: Resulting Shear Force Vz

2.00
Table 27.2: Results

0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00 m
Y X
At beam 1001
Beam Elements , Shear force Vz, Loadcase 1 sum_PZ=1550.0 kN . , 1 cm 3D = 500.0 kN (Min=-775.0) (Max=775.0) SOF. Ref. M 1 : 41
Number of element, Beam Elements(Max=1010), Nodal sequences
Z
As1 [cm2 ] at  = 1.0 m 22.49 22.52
VRd,c [kN] 91.91 91.91


VRd,m [kN] 1098.43 1098.461
cot θ 1.75 1.75

z [cm] at  = 1.0 m 63.00 67.00
VEd = ΔFd [kN] 350.13 352.35
sƒ , [cm2 ] 8.23 8.42
sƒ ,r [cm2 ] 0.81 0.83


Design with respect to DIN EN 1992-2:2010 (NA) [19] :2
Material:

Steel: γs = 1.15

ƒcd = cc · ƒck / γc = 0.85 · 30/ 1.5 = 17 MP 3.1.6: (1)P, Eq. (3.15): cc = 0.85 con-
ƒyd = ƒyk / γs = 500/ 1.15 = 434.78 MP MP
3.2.7: (2), Fig. 3.8
σsd = 456.52 MP
Design loads
MEd,=0.0 m = 0.0 kNm
MEd,=1.0 m = 697.5 kNm
Calculating the longitudinal reinforcement:
• For beam 1001, x=0.0 m
MEds 0.0 · 10−3

μEds = = = 0.00 μ = 0 → As1 = 0
beƒ ƒ · d2 · ƒcd 1.60 · 0.702 · 17.00
• For beam 1001, x=1.0 m
MEds 697.5 · 10−3

μEds = = = 0.0523
beƒ ƒ · d2 · ƒcd 1.60 · 0.702 · 17.00
ω ≈ 0.053973, ζ ≈ 0.9658, ξ = 0.07833 (interpolated) Tab. 9.2 [3]: ω−Table for up to C50/ 60
1
As1 = · (ω · b · d · ƒcd + NEd ) NEd = 0
σsd
1
As1 = · (0.053973 · 1.6 · 0.7 · 17.0) · 1002 = 22.52 cm2
456.52
z = ζ · d = 0.9658 · 0.70 m ≈ 67.00 cm
Calculating the shear between flange and web
The shear force, is determined by the change of the longitudinal force, at

the junction between one side of a flange and the web, in the separated
flange: 6.2.4 (3): Eq. 6.20
tional Annex) [19], unless otherwise specified.

 = 0.0738 · d = 0.07833 · 70 = 5.48 cm < hƒ = 20 cm
MEd,=1.0 MEd,=0.0 hƒ · b

ΔFd = − ·
z z hƒ · bh
For beam 1001 (x=0.00 m) → MEd = 0.00 therefore:

697.5 1.1

In AQB output ΔFd = T[kN/ m] ΔFd = −0 · = 352.35 · 2 = 704.70 kN
0.68047 1.6
The longitudinal shear stress Ed,V at the junction between one side
of a flange and the web is determined by the change of the normal
(longitudinal) force in the part of the flange considered, according to:
ΔFd
DIN EN 1992, 6.2.4 (3),Eq. 6.20: hƒ Ed,V = 2

is the thickness of flange at the junc- hƒ · Δ
tions, Δ is the length under consider-
ation, ΔFd is the change of the normal In our case Δ = 1.0 because the beam length is = 1.00 m.
force in the flange over the length Δ
Please note that AQB is outputting the results per length.
352.35
In AQB output Ed,V = τ − V Ed,V = = 0.176 kN/ m2 = 1.76 MP
20 · 100
Checking the maximum Rd,m value to prevent crushing of the
struts in the flange
To prevent crushing of the compression struts in the flange, the following

condition should be satisfied:
DIN EN 1992, 6.2.4 (4),Eq. 6.22 Ed,V ≤ Rd,m = ν · ƒcd · snθƒ · cosθƒ
Rd,m = ν · ƒcd · snθƒ · cosθƒ
According to DIN EN 1992-2, NDP 6.2.4:
ν = ν1
DIN EN 1992, NDP 6.2.3 (3),Eq. 6.22 ν1 = 0.75 · ν2

ƒck
ν2 = 1.1 − ≤ 1.0
500
30
ν2 = 1.1 − = 1.1 − 0.06 = 1.04 ≥ 1.0 → ν2 = 1.0
500
ν1 = 0.75 · 1.0 = 0.75 → ν = 0.75
The θ value is calculated:

σcd

1/ 3
DIN EN 1992-2, NDP 6.2.3 (2),Eq. VRd,cc = c · 0.48 · ƒck · 1 − 1.2 · · b · z
NA.6.bDE: σcd = NEd / AC , c=0.5 ƒcd
b → hƒ , z → Δ, c = 0.5
σcd

1/ 3
VRd,cc = c · 0.48 · ƒck · 1 − 1.2 · · hƒ · Δ
ƒcd
0

VRd,cc = 0.5 · 0.48 · 301/ 3 · 1 − 1.2 · · 0.20 · 1.0
17.00

VRd,cc = 0.14914 MN = 149.1471 kN
1.2 + 1.4 · Δσcd / ƒcd

1.0 ≤ cotθ ≤ ≤ 1.75 DIN EN 1992-2, NDP 6.2.3 (2),Eq.
1 − VRd,cc / VEd NA.6.107aDE
Because MT 6= 0.0 → τT 6= 0.0:

VRd,cc 149.1471
Rd,cc = = = 0.0745 kN/ cm2 = 0.745 MP
hƒ · Δ 20 · 100
The internal forces must be in equilibrium, see Fig. 27.8!!! If the internal
forces are not in equilibrium state, then AQB will print erroneous results.
Therefore the internal forces must be taken from the system (calculated
by using e.g. ASE or STAR2).
z
σz τy = τy
x τz = τz
y τz τyz = τzy
τzy τz
τyz
σ σ
τy
σy τy
σz
Figure 27.8: Stress equilibrium
1.2
cotθ = = 2.0807 ≥ 1.75 → 1.75
1 − 0.745/ 1.76
AQB is checking and iterating if the cotθ is less than (<) the maximum
cotθ defined in the norm. If yes, then this value will be taken by AQB.
1 1
tn θ = = = 0.5714 → θ = 29.74488◦
cotθ 1.75
Rd,m = 0.75 · 17.00 · sn29.7448 · cos29.7448 = 5.492 MP
VRd,m = Rd,m · hƒ · Δ = 5.492 · 0.20 · 1.0 = 1.098 MN
VRd,m = 1098.461 kN
Checking the value Rd,c
If Ed is less than or equal to Rd,c = k · ƒctd no extra reinforcement

above that for flexure is required.
Rd,c = k · ƒctd
For concrete C 30/37 → ƒctd = 1.15 MP
Rd,c = 0.4 · 1.15 = 0.46 MP
VRd,c = Rd,c · hƒ · Δ = 0.046 · 20 · 100 ≈ 91.91 kN
• Calculating the necessary transverse reinforcement (τ only):

Ed · hƒ
DIN EN 1992, 6.2.4 (4),Eq. 6.21 sƒ ,V =
cotθƒ · ƒyd
1.76 · 0.20
sƒ ,V = · 1002 = 4.63 cm2
1.75 · 434.78
• Calculating the necessary torsional reinforcement:
HINT: Please note that in AQB the torsional stress IS NOT calculated
by using the formula:
Mt
τt =
2 · Ak · teƒ ƒ
AQB is calculating the τt stresses by multiplying Mt with the torsional

resistance 1/ Wt (from AQUA - calculated by using FEM).
τt = Mt · 1/ Wt
From AQUA the torsional resistance value 1/ Wt is interpolated and

1/ Wt = 2.8841 1/ m3 . To see the values 1/ Wt input ECHO FULL
EXTR in AQUA and see table ”Construction and Selected Result
Points”.
τt = 2.8841 · 500 · 10−3 = 1.44 MP

τt · teƒ ƒ 1.44 · 0.20
sƒ ,T = = · 1002 = 3.79 cm2
cotθƒ · ƒyd 1.75 · 434.78
• Total reinforcement:
sƒ ,eƒ t = sƒ ,V + sƒ ,T = 4.63 + 3.79 = 8.42 cm2
sƒ ,rght = |sƒ ,V − sƒ ,T | = |4.63 − 3.79| = 0.83 cm2

27.5 Conclusion
This example is concerned with the calculation of the shear between web and flanges of a Hollow CS. It
shows partially the work-flow how AQB calculates the shear between web and flanges.
Please note that it is very difficult to show all steps how AQB calculates internally the τ and σ stresses,
therefore some steps are skipped. The reference example is just an approximation that shows the results
by using hand-calculation. It has been shown that the results calculated by using hand-calculation and
the AQB module are reproduced with very good accuracy.
The τt and τ values between cross-section points are interpolated and calculated by using Finite
Element Method.
Figure 27.9: The τt stresses (vector) calculated by using Finite Element Method
Figure 27.10: The τt stresses (fill) calculated by using Finite Element Method

27.6 Literature
[19] DIN EN 1992-2: Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures - Part 2, Part 2: Concrete Bridges -
Design of Detailing Rules - German version EN 1992-2:2005 (D), Nationaler Anhang Deutschland
- 2012. CEN. 2012.

DCE-EN27: Design of Quad Elements - Layer Design and Baumann Method
28 DCE-EN27: Design of Quad Elements - Layer Design

and Baumann Method
Overview

Module(s): BEMESS
Input file(s): layer design baumann.dat

The problem consists of a one-way slab, as shown in Fig. 28.1 . The slab is designed for bending.
This benchmark presents a procedure which uses the model based on Baumann’s criteria and the Layer
Design approach.
Slab height=19 cm
12 482 24 382 12
eƒ ƒ ,1 =500 eƒ ƒ ,2 =400
Field 1 Field 2
A B C
Figure 28.1: Problem Description (in cm)

This example is concerned with the design of a one-way slab, for the ultimate limit state. The content of
• Bending with or without axial force (Section 6.1)
The verification of the BEMESS results will be examined. A complete and detailed hand-calculation of
the results is not possible because of described BEMESS-strategy, which should be here to exhaustive.
For this reason, some results (e.g. internal forces) will be taken as outputted and further used in the
hand-calculation.
top branch, as presented in Fig. 28.2 and as defined in EN 1992-1-1:2004 [6] (Section 3.2.7).

A
σ
ƒtk,c = 525N/ mm2
ƒyk
ƒyd = ƒyk / γs
B A Idealised
B Design
εd = 25 0 /00

The slab, with properties as defined in Table 28.3, is to be designed for bending moment, with respect to
EN 1992-1-1:2004 [6]. The structure analysed, consists of one-way slab with a distributed load in gravity
direction. The loading is presented bellow:
Table 28.1: Loading and actions
Title Action Safety Factor ULS Value
Dead Load G dead load γG = 1.35 gk = 6.35 kN/ m2
Field 1 Q variable load γQ = 1.5 qk = 5.0 kN/ m2
Field 2 Q variable load γQ = 1.5 qk = 5.0 kN/ m2
gd = γG · gk = 1.35 · 6.35 = 8.57 kN/ m2
qd,ƒ 1 = γQ · qk = 1.50 · 5.00 = 7.50 kN/ m2
qd,ƒ 2 = γQ · qk = 1.50 · 5.00 = 7.50 kN/ m2
LC 1001 → gd + qd in Field 1+2
LC 1002 → gd + qd,ƒ 1 in Field 1
LC 1003 → gd + qd,ƒ 2 in Field 2
Table 28.2: Internal forces
Loadcase mEd,B mEd,F1 mEd,F2 Ed,A Ed,B, Ed,B,r Ed,C
LC 1001 -37.16 31.00 14.40 30.00 -46.80 41.00 -20.00

LC 1002 -35.20 33.60 4.03 31.30 -45.40 25.10 -7.49
LC 1003 -28.90 14.10 19.09 14.70 -26.30 37.70 -23.20

-37.2
A
B
33.6
C
19.0
Figure 28.3: mEd envelope in kNm/ m2
C 20/ 25 h = 19 cm gd = 8.57 kN/ m2
B 500B, B 500A cnom = 20 mm qd,ƒ 1 = 7.50 kN/ m2
d1 = 3.0 cm qd,ƒ 2 = 7.50 kN/ m2
Exposition class XC1
The system with its loading are shown in Fig. 28.4-28.10. The reference calculation steps are presented
in the next section and the results are given in Table 28.4.
16
.1
16.1
Field 2
Field 1
16.1
16
.1
Figure 28.4: Loadcase 1001
8.57
16
16.1
.1
Field 2
Field 1
16.1
16
8.
8.57
.1
57
QUAD 10026 over Support B:

Required Reinforcements acc. to EN 1992-1-1:2004

Grp Element LC t asu asu2 asu3 asl asl2 asl3 supp shear ass
[m] [cm2/m] [cm2/m] [cm2/m] [cm2/m] [cm2/m] [cm2/m] [-] [-] [cm2/m2]
1 10026 1001 0.190 5.58 1.13 1
Grp primary group number asu2 Cross reinforcements (2nd layer) Top
Element element number asu3 Third reinforcements Top
LC load case asl Principal reinforcements (1st layer) Bottom
t plate thickness asl2 Cross reinforcements (2nd layer) Bottom
asu Principal reinforcements (1st layer) Top asl3 Third reinforcements Bottom
supp reduction factor for the shear force near supports, punc=point in punching zone -> punching shear design
shear shear zone: 1=Ok, 1s=asu/l increased for shear, 1d=for punching, 2=required ass, 2m=minimum shear reinforcement
ass Shear reinforcement
Figure 28.6: Layer Design - Quad 10026, Loadcase 1001, st = 5.59 cm2 / m
QUAD 10726 in Field 1:

1 10726 1002 0.190 4.99 1.01 1
QUAD 80376 in Field 2:

8 80376 1003 0.190 2.73 0.58 1
Summary of results:
Maximum reinforcement: reinforcement distribution number 1

Grp Element asu asu2 asu3 asl asl2 asl3 ass
[cm2/m] [cm2/m] [cm2/m] [cm2/m] [cm2/m] [cm2/m] [cm2/m2]
1 10026 5.58 1.13
10726 4.95 1.07
8 80376 2.65 0.57
Grp primary group number
Element element number
asu Principal reinforcements (1st layer) Top
asu2 Cross reinforcements (2nd layer) Top
asu3 Third reinforcements Top
asl Principal reinforcements (1st layer) Bottom
asl2 Cross reinforcements (2nd layer) Bottom
asl3 Third reinforcements Bottom
Figure 28.9: Maximum reinforcement distribution for Quad Elements

16.1
16
.1
8.
8.57
57
Field 2
Field 1
16
16.1
.1
8. 8.57
57
Table 28.4: Results s [cm2 / m]
Quad SOFiSTiK Reference

Baumann Layer Design Baumann Tables
Support B (QUAD 10026) 5.52 5.58 5.38 5.45
Field 1 (QUAD 10726) 4.95 4.99 4.88 4.88
Field 2 (QUAD 80376) 2.65 2.73 2.70 2.70


Design with respect to EN 1992-1-1:2004 [6] :2
Material:
2.4.2.4: (1), Tab. 2.1N: Partial factors Concrete: γc = 1.50

for materials for ultimate limit states
Steel: γs = 1.15
Tab. 3.1: Strength and deformation ƒck = 20 MP

characteristics for concrete ƒcd = cc · ƒck / γc = 1.00 · 20/ 1.50 = 13.33MP
3.1.6: Eq. (3.15): cc = 1.00 consider-
ing long term effects
ƒyk = 500 MP
3.2.2: (3)P: yield strength ƒyk = 500
MP ƒyd = ƒyk / γs = 500/ 1.15 = 434.78 MP
3.2.7: (2), Fig. 3.8
σsd = 456.52 MP
1. DESIGN BY USING TABLES
To make the example more simple, the slab will be designed only for
the maximum and minimum moment mEd (Field 1, Field 2 and over the
middle support). The reduction of the moment over the middle support
will be neglected in this example.
• Design mEd over the middle support (QUAD 10026):
mEd,B = (mEd,B,1001 , mEd,B,1002 , mEd,B,1003 )
mEd,B = max(−37.16, − 35.20, − 28.90) = −37.16 kNm/ m
Calculating the μ value:
|mEd,B,Red |
μEds =
b · d2 · ƒcd
37.16 · 10−3
μEds =
1.0 · 0.162 · 13.33
μEds = 0.1089
From tables:
μ ω ξ ζ σsd [MPa]
0.108867 0.11575 0.14298 0.940522 452.69
1
s,req = ω · b · d · ƒcd ·
σsd
1
s,req = 0.11576 · 1.00 · 0.16 · 13.33 ·
452.70
s,req = 5.45 cm2 / m
• Design mEd over in Field 1 (QUAD 10726):

wise specified.

mEd,f1 = (mEd,ƒ 1,1001 , mEd,ƒ 1,1002 , mEd,ƒ 1,1003 )
mEd,f1 = max(31.00, 33.69, 14.10) = 33.69 kNm/ m
|mEd,B,Red |
μEds =
b · d2 · ƒcd
33.69 · 10−3
μEds =
1.0 · 0.162 · 13.33
μEds = 0.0987
From tables:
0.0987 0.10429 0.12882 0.9464 455.25
1
s,req = ω · b · d · ƒcd ·
σsd
1
s,req = 0.10429 · 1.00 · 0.16 · 13.33 ·
455.25
s,req = 4.88 cm2 / m
• Design mEd over in Field 2 (QUAD 80376):
mEd,f2 = (mEd,ƒ 2,1001 , mEd,ƒ 2,1002 , mEd,ƒ 2,1003 )
mEd,f2 = max(14.40, 4.03, 19.09) = 19.09 kNm/ m
|mEd,B,Red |
μEds =
b · d2 · ƒcd
19.09 · 10−3
μEds =
1.0 · 0.162 · 13.33
μEds = 0.05593
From tables:
0.05593 0.05774 0.08222 0.968533 456.52
1
s,req = ω · b · d · ƒcd ·
σsd
1
s,req = 0.05774 · 1.00 · 0.16 · 13.33 ·
456.52
s,req = 2.698 cm2 / m
2. DESIGN BY USING THE MULTI LAYER APPROACH
The design approach in BEMESS 2018 was completely changed from

Baumann Method to an exact iteration of the strain state. This itera-

tion of the stain state is called ”Layer Design” or ”Layer Approach” in
SOFiSTIK. In the layer design the 6 strain parameters (3 strains ϵ , ϵy ,
ϵy ) and 3 curvatures k , ky , ky ) are calculated iteratively to achieve
equilibrium between the 6 inner forces and the 6 internal forces n , ny ,
ny , m , my and my . Thereby non-linear work-laws are taken into
account for concrete and steel.
The iterative approach is not documented in this example, because it

takes lot of effort to document all iterational steps. Therefore only the
output is shown, see the output tables in Fig. 28.9, 28.7 and 28.8.
3. DESIGN BY USING BAUMANN METHOD
For each reinforcement layer: With the use of internal forces in local
element direction, the internal forces in main direction and the accom-
payning angle is calculted with the following equation
m + myy r
m/  = ± 0.5 · (myy − m )2 + 4 · m2y
2
my
tn 2φ0 = 2 ·
m − myy
Accompanying to the main bending moments the normal forces and

accompanying to the main normal forces the bending moments are cal-
culated by transformation.
The internal lever arm is calculated separately for the internal forces in
main moment direction and for the internal forces in main normal forces
direction. This is done with the theory explained in the paper from Prof.
Dr. Ing. Ulrich P. Schmitz [20]. The program choose the unfavorable
lever arm from both results for the next analysis step lever arm z (This
is why for each layer of reinforcement two lever arms are calculated
within the program).
This lever arm z is used to calculate the virtual panel forces N , Ny ,

Ny (in direction of the local element coordinate system) on each side
of the finite element:
QUAD 10026 over Support B:
Calculating N :
n m
N = +
2 z
0.00 37.16
N = +
2 0.1514
N = 245.442 kN/ m
Calculating Ny :
nyy myy
Ny = +
2 z
0.00 7.43
Ny = +
2 0.1514

Ny = 49.075 kN/ m
Calculating Ny :
ny ny
Ny = +
2 z
0.00 0.00
Ny = +
2 0.1514
Ny = 0.00 kN/ m
The next step is the transformation of the panel forces N , Ny , Ny into
the main forces N and N :
N + Ny r
N = + 0.5 · (Ny − N )2 + 4 · N2y
2
245.44 + 49.07 Æ
N = + 0.5 · (49.07 − 245.4)2 + 4 · 0.002
2
N = 147.256 + 98.165 = 245.421
N + Ny r
N = − 0.5 · (Ny − N )2 + 4 · N2y
2
245.44 + 49.07 Æ
N = − 0.5 · (49.07 − 245.4)2 + 4 · 0.002
2
N = 147.256 − 98.165 = 49.091
Ny
tn 2φ0 = 2 ·
N − Ny
0.00
tn 2φ0 = 2 ·
245.442 − 49.07
tn 2φ0 = 0.00 → φ = 0
N2
k=
N1
49.091
k= = 0.20
245.41
k ≥ tn(α + π/ 4) · tn α = 0
N − N
Z = N + · sin 2α · (1 − tn α)
2
245.421 − 49.091
Z = 245.421 + · sin 0 · (1 − tn 0)
2
Z = 245.421
Z
s =
σsd
245.421
s = = 5.375 cm2 / m
456.52

Field 1 (QUAD 10726):
Calculating N :
n m
N = +
z z
0.00 33.70
N = +
0.1514 0.1514
N = 222.589 kN/ m
Calculating Ny :
nyy myy
Ny = +
z z
0.00 6.74
Ny = +
0.1514 0.1514
Ny = 44.51 kN/ m
Calculating Ny :
ny ny
Ny = +
z z
0.00 0.00
Ny = +
0.1514 0.1514
Ny = 0.00 kN/ m
N + Ny r
N = + 0.5 · (Ny − N )2 + 4 · N2y
2
222.589 + 44.51 Æ
N = + 0.5 · (44.51 − 222.589)2 + 4 · 0.002
2
N = 133.5495 + 89.0395 = 222.589
N + Ny r
N = − 0.5 · (Ny − N )2 + 4 · N2y
2
222.589 + 44.51 Æ
N = − 0.5 · (44.51 − 222.589)2 + 4 · 0.002
2
N = 133.5495 − 89.0395 = 44.51
Ny
tn 2φ0 = 2 ·
N − Ny
0.00
tn 2φ0 = 2 ·
222.589 − 44.51
tn 2φ0 = 0.00 → φ = 0

N2
k=
N1
44.51
k= = 0.199
222.589
k ≥ tn(α + π/ 4) · tn α = 0
N − N
Z = N + · sin 2α · (1 − tn α)
2
222.589 − 44.51
Z = 222.589 + · sin 0 · (1 − tn 0)
2
Z = 222.589
Z
s =
σsd
222.589
s = = 4.875 cm2 / m
456.52
Field 2 (QUAD 80376):
Calculating N :
n m
N = +
z z
0.00 19.09
N = +
0.1514 0.1549
N = 123.24 kN/ m
Calculating Ny :
nyy myy
Ny = +
z z
0.00 3.86
Ny = +
0.1549 0.1549
Ny = 24.91 kN/ m
Calculating Ny :
ny ny
Ny = +
z z
0.00 0.00
Ny = +
0.1549 0.1549
Ny = 0.00 kN/ m
N + Ny r
N = + 0.5 · (Ny − N )2 + 4 · N2y
2
123.24 + 24.91 Æ
N = + 0.5 · (24.91 − 123.24)2 + 4 · 0.002
2

N = 74.075 + 49.165 = 123.24

N + Ny r
N = − 0.5 · (Ny − N )2 + 4 · N2y
2
123.24 + 24.91 Æ
N = − 0.5 · (24.91 − 123.24)2 + 4 · 0.002
2
N = 74.075 − 49.165 = 24.91
Ny
tn 2φ0 = 2 ·
N − Ny
0.00
tn 2φ0 = 2 ·
123.24 − 24.91
tn 2φ0 = 0.00 → φ = 0
N2
k=
N1
24.91
k= = 0.202
123.24
k ≥ tn(α + π/ 4) · tn α = 0
N − N
Z = N + · sin 2α · (1 − tn α)
2
123.24 − 24.91
Z = 123.24 + · sin 0 · (1 − tn 0)
2
Z = 123.24
Z
s =
σsd
123.24
s = = 2.70 cm2 / m
456.52

28.5 Conclusion
This example shows the calculation of the required reinforcement for a one-way slab under bending. It
has been shown that the results are reproduced with very good accuracy.
28.6 Literature
[20] Ulrich P. Schmitz. “Biegebemessung nach der neuen E-DIN 1045-1”. In: Bauinformatik JOURNAL
(1999), pp. 49–51.


DCE-EN28: Design of a T-section for bending and shear using Design Elements
29 DCE-EN28: Design of a T-section for bending and

shear using Design Elements
Overview

Module(s): DECREATOR, AQB
Input file(s): t-beam de.dat

This section demonstrates design elements as a solution to the problem of a member modeled out of
beam and quad elements; which is to be designed using a given cross section. An instance of a beam
having a T-section as shown in Fig. 29.2 is considered. The beam constitutes a loaded floor slab shown
in Fig. 29.1.
beƒ ƒ
2.4 m
qd + gd
0 = 14.04 m
Figure 29.1: Sketch of the slab and longitudinal system of single t-beam member

The reference inputs and results of this problem were adopted from an extended solution to a similar
problem in section 7 of [4]. The standard aspects of the design procedures are covered in the following
parts of the Eurocode DIN EN 1992-1-1 [6]:
• Concrete (Section 3.1)
• Reinforcing Steel (Section 3.2)
• Bending with or without axial force (Section 6.1)
• Shear (Section 6.2)

The beam member is assumed to be simply supported with out carrying normal force. It’s finite element
model is formed in SOFiSTiK using quad elements for the flange and an eccentrically coupled beam
element for the web. The self-weight parts of the design loads are applied separately to each element.
After analysis, a design element spanning the entire beam length is then defined using the program
DECREATOR. The design element then integrates the stresses of the quad elements at its design

sections, and superimposes these with the corresponding forces of the eccentric beam to result in the
design values of the bending moment MEd and shear force VEd .
beƒ ƒ
hƒ
Quad element
h Beam element
b0 b00

b0
Figure 29.2: Cross sectional view of the model out of quad and beam elements
The sectional properties and loadings of the member are given in table 29.1. The analysis gives results
of the individual quad and beam elements. DECREATOR is then used to integrate all forces at the
explicit design sections for use in design. Since, in this model, the centroid of the chosen cross section
lies on the design element, no transformation of forces from design element axis to the centroid takes
place during computation. However, this full cross section will be used for design. The final analysis and
design results are given in Table 29.2, the reference calculation procedures of which are presented in
the following section.
C 35/ 45 h = 60.0 cm qd = 8.85 kN/ m2
B 500B hƒ = 12.0 cm gd,ƒ nge = 6.41 kN/ m2
d = 62.20 cm gd,eb = 5.27 kN/ m
beƒ ƒ = 240 cm
b00

= 20.0 cm
b0 = 6.0 cm
b = 26.0 cm
Summarized in Table 2 are the results of the reference example in [4] (Ref.-2), those obtained based on
design tables (Ref.-1) as presented in the next section, and those from SOFiSTiK computations. For sim-
plification purposes the reference example uses rough approximate procedures in obtaining reinforce-
ment areas, while the hand calculation and the SOFiSTiK results come from iterative approximations
and are as close to the exact requirements as possible.
In this regard, in calculating the reinforcement area in Ref.-2, the full thickness of the flange was assumed
to roughly approximate the compressive zone. The moment arm is thereby reduced and hence it resulted
in a larger reinforcement area. In a similar manner, the shear reinforcements in Ref.-2 are larger since
the example selects a suitable reinforcement diameter and spacing in advance to compute the area,

which is more than the required amount.
Table 29.2: Results
SOF. Ref.-1 Ref.-2

MEd [kNm] 1085.86 1086.0 1086.0
As,req / s 39.39 41.34 44.60

[cm2 / m]
VEd [kN] 270.17 272.0 272.0
As,req / s 9.11 9.3 15.71

[cm2 / m]

29.4 Design Process

Design with respect to DIN EN 1992-1-1 [6]:1
Design of the T-beam for bending and shear are carried out using the T-
cross section, as shown in figure 29.3. References on the side margins
can be further reviewed for notations and explanations.
beff,1
b1 d
Figure 29.3: Full cross-section used for design
Material partial factors and design strengths:

Steel: γs = 1.15

MP ƒyd = ƒyk / γs = 500/ 1.15 = 434.78 MP
Design for bending:
Design section at:  = 0 / 2.0 = 14.40/ 2.0 = 7.20 m
Design bending moment: MEd = 1086.0 kNm
Effective width of flange beƒ ƒ :
beƒ ƒ = beƒ ƒ , + b ≤ b
P
5.3.2.1: (3) Eq. (5.7) and Fig. (5.3) for
notations
5.3.2.1: (3) Eq. (5.7a) beƒ ƒ , = 0.2 · b + 0.1 · 0 ≤ 0.2 · 0
b = 0.5 · (beƒ ƒ − b )
b1,2 = 0.5 · (2.4 − 0.26) = 1.07 m
beƒ ƒ 1,2 = 0.2 · 1.07 + 0.1 · 14.40 = 1.65 m ≤ 0.2 · 0
But, beƒ ƒ 1,2 > b1,2 = 1.07 m
∴ beƒ ƒ = 2 · 1.07 + 0.26 = 2.40 m

1 The sections mentioned in the margins refer to DIN EN 1992-1-1 (German National
Annex) [6], unless otherwise specified

Reinforcement depth d, for three layers of re-bars with ϕ25:
cnom = cmn + Δcde = 25 + 10 = 35 mm 4.4.1.1:(2) Eq. (4.1) Nominal concrete

cover
d = h − cnom − 2.5 · ϕ
d = 720 − 35 − 2.5 · 25 = 620 mm

Assumptions: Stirrups ϕSt ≤ 10 mm
Longitudinal reinforcement: ϕ25 in 3-
Design cross-section: layers
Reinforcement and spacing: (3 +
2)/ 2 = 2.5
beƒ ƒ / hƒ / b / h/ d = 2.40/ 0.12/ 0.26/ 0.72/ 0.62 m
Using design table for T-beams: μs - Table for T-beams (Tab. 9.4) [3]
MEds 1086.0
μEds = = = 0.0594
beƒ ƒ · d2 · ƒcd 2.4 · 0.622 · 19.83
For μEds = 0.0594 and beƒ ƒ / b = 9.23,
table 9.4 of [3] results in ω1 = 0.0609
Required bottom-reinforcement for bending at the design section:

1
As1 = (ω1 · beƒ ƒ · d · ƒcd ) = 41.34 cm2 Equation from table 9.4 in [3]
ƒyd
Design for Shear:
Design section at:  = 0.5 · 0.2 + 0.62 = 0.72 m Distance from center of elastomer sup-
port with thickness b=200 mm [4]
Design shear force: VRd,s = 272.0 kN
Vertical reinforcement from shear resistance:
VRd,s = (ASW / S) · z · ƒyd · cotθ 6.2.3:(3) Eq. (6.8)
VRd,s
(ASW / S) =
z · ƒyd · cotθ
cotθ = 1.2 6.2.3:(2), simplified for pure bending [4]
z = 0.9d = 0.9 · 0.62 = 0.558 m
Required total shear reinforcement at the design section:
272.0
(ASW / S) = = 9.33 cm2 / m
0.558 · 434.78 · 1.2

29.5 Conclusion
It has been demonstrated in this example that, using Design Elements in SOFiSTiK, a structural member
modeled out of different finite element types can be designed with a unifying full cross section. The
critical internal forces were well approximated and reasonable design results were obtained.
29.6 Literature

DCE-EN29: Design of restrained steel column
30 DCE-EN29: Design of restrained steel column
Overview

Module(s): BDK
Input file(s): design schneider example 8-41.dat

The problem consists of a simply supported beam with a steel HEA 200 section which is restrained in
the middle of the length. The column is subjecteded to compression and bending as shown in Fig. 30.1.
Z
XY N = 300 kN
q = 4 kN/ m


This example is concerned with the buckling resistance of steel members. It deals with the spatial
behavior of the beam and the occurrence of lateral torsional buckling as a potential mode of failure. The
content of this problem is covered by the following parts of DIN EN 1993-1-1:2005 [21]:
• Method 2: Interaction factors kj for interaction formula in 6.3.3(4) (Annex B)
Material Properties Cross-Section Properties Geometric Loading

Properties
S 235 h = 190 mm H = 8.0 m q = 4.00 kN/ m
E = 210000 N/ mm2 b = 200 mm
ƒy = 235 N/ mm2 c = 32 mm
ν = 0.3 r = 18 mm
G = 81000 N/ mm2 tƒ = 10 mm
γM0 = 1.0 t = 6.5 mm
γM1 = 1.1 A = 5308 mm2
y = 82.8 mm
z = 49.8 mm
y = 3690 cm4
z = 1340 cm4
t = 21 cm4
Table 30.2: Results
SOF. Ref. [8]
Lcr,y [m] 8.00 8.00
Lcr,z [m] 4.00 4.00
Np,Rd [kN] 1265.0 1264.3
Mp,y,Rd [kNm] 100.92 100.90

SOF. Ref. [8]
λy 1.029 1.029
λz 0.855 0.855
Ncr,z [kN] 1730.1 1736
Mcr [kNm] 244.53 220.9
λLT 0.643 0.676
kyy 1.292 1.304
kzy 0.935 0.936


Design Loads:
Nd = 300 kN
q = 4.0 kN/ m
My,d = q · L2 / 8 = 4.0 · 82 / 8 = 32.0 kNm
Mz,d = 0
Buckling lengths:
Lcr,y = 8.00 m
Lcr,z = 4.00 m
ξ = 1.35
Characteristic values:
NRk = Np,Rd = 1264.3 kN
My,Rk = Mp,y,Rd = 100.9 kNm
z - second moment of area z = 1340 cm4
 - warping resistance  = 108000 cm6
t - torsional moment of inertia t = 21.0 cm4
y = 8.28 cm
z = 4.98 cm
zp = −9.5 cm
Buckling around the y-y axis:
λy = 800/ (8.28 · 93.9) = 1.029 → χ = 0.58 (Curve b)
λz = 400/ (4.98 · 93.9) = 0.855 → χ = 0.63 (Curve c)
Critical loading:
Ncr - elastic critical force for the relevant Ncr,z = π 2 · 21000 · 1340/ 4002 = 1736 kN
buckling mode based on the gross cross
sectional properties c2 = (108000 + 0.039 · 4002 · 21.0)/ 1340 = 178.4 cm2
p
Mcr - elastic critical moment for lateral- Mcr = 1.35 · 1736 · 178.4 + 0.25 · 9.52 + 0.5 · (−9.5) · 102
torsional buckling
Mcr = 220.9 kNm
1 The sections mentioned in the margins refer to DIN EN 1993-1-1:2005 [21] unless

-300.0
7.00
7.00
6.00
6.00
5.00
5.00
4.00
4.00
32
.0
3.00
3.00
2.00
2.00
1.00
1.00
-300.0
0.00
0.00
Figure 30.2: Internal forces My and N
p
λLT = 100.9/ 220.9 = 0.676 λLT - non dimensional slenderness for
lateral torsional buckling
h/ b = 190/ 200 = 0.95 < 2.0 → Class b
1
χLT = r
2
LT + 2LT − β · λLT
2
h i
LT = 0.5 · 1 + αLT · (λLT − λLT,0 ) + β · λLT
χLT = 0.88 < 2.188 = 1/ 0.6762 χLT - reduction factor
χLT 1
Mb,Rd = Mp,y,Rd · ·
ƒ γM1

ƒ = 1 − 0.5 · (1 − kc ) · 1 − 2.0 · (λLT − 0.82 ) ƒ - the value f may be defined in National
Annex, see EC 3, §6.3.2.3(2)
ƒ = 1 − 0.5 · (1 − 0.94) · 1 − 2.0 · (0.676 − 0.82 )

ƒ = 0.972
0.88 1
Mb,Rd = 100.9 · ·
0.972 1.1
Mb,Rd = 83.045 kNm mb,Rd - design buckling resistance mo-
ment - EC 3, §6.3.2.1, Eq. 6.55
Equivalent uniform moment factors:

Lcr,y - buckling length for Lcr,y = 8.00 m :
αh = Mh / Ms = 0.00
ψ = 1.00
cmy = 0.95 + 0.05 · 0.00 = 0.95
Lcr,z - buckling length for Lcr,z = 4.00 m :
αh = Mh / Ms = 0.75
ψ = 0.00
cmLT = 0.2 + 0.8 · 0.75 = 0.80
4 kN/ m0 300 kN 300 kN
z y
y z
ψ · Mh ψ · Mh
ψ · Ms = 0.75 · Mh
Ms Mh
Mh
Figure 30.3: Calculating the equivalent uniform moment factors
kyy , kzy - Annex B: Method 2, inter- Interaction factors:

action factors for interaction formula in
§6.3.3(4)

1.1

kyy = 0.95 · 1 + 1.029 − 0.2) · 300 ·
0.580 · 1264.3
= 1.304
1.1

≤ 0.95 · 1 + 0.8 · 300 · = 1.292
0.580 · 1264.3
≤ 1.80
0.1 · 0.855 300 · 1.1

kzy = 1− · = 0.936
0.8 − 0.25 0.63 · 1264.3
0.1 300 · 1.1

≥ 1− · = 0.925
0.8 − 0.25 0.63 · 1264.3
1.1
≥ 0.3 · 300 · = 0.138
0.63 · 1264.3
Lateral Torsional Buckling check:

300 32.0 + 0.0
+ 1.292 · + 0.0 = 0.96 ≤ 1.0
0.58 · 1264.3/ 1.1 0.88 · 100.9/ 1.1
Lateral Torsional Buckling, §6.3.3, Eq.
6.61 and 6.62
300 32.0 + 0.0
+ 0.936 · + 0.0 = 0.79 ≤ 1.0
0.63 · 1264.3/ 1.1 0.88 · 100.9/ 1.1

30.5 Conclusion
This example shows the check for lateral torsional buckling of steel members. The small deviations that
occur in some results come from the fact that there are some small differences in the sectional values
and elastic critical loadings (Mcr , Ncr ). Therefore, these deviations are of no interest for the specific
verification process. In conclusion, it has been shown that the results are reproduced with excellent
accuracy.
30.6 Literature
[21] DIN EN 1993-1-1:2005 Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures, Part 1-1: General rules and rules
for buildings - Deutsche Fassung EN 1993-1-1:2005 + AC:2009. CEN. 2010.

DCE-EN30: Steel column with a class 4 cross-section
31 DCE-EN30: Steel column with a class 4 cross-section
Overview

Module(s): BDK, AQB, AQUA
Input file(s): scl 4 sig neff.dat, scl 4 iterative.dat

The problem consists of a simply supported beam with a box cross-section shown in Fig. 31.1. The
design element should be verified against uniform compression as shown in Fig. 31.2.
bƒ 1
tƒ 1
t
h
y T
tƒ 2
bƒ 2
Figure 31.1: Geometry of box cross-section
This benchmark example is used to verify and compare the SOFiSTiK results with the ECCS reference
example [22].

5500
17 -5500
5.5
17
5.5
17
5.5
17
5.5
17
5.5
17
5.5
17
5.5
17
5.5
17
5.5
17
5.5
17 -5500
5.5
00 Loading
0.00 My =
-4.002.00N · e
N,y -2.00 4.00 0.00 6.00
N
2 00 0 00 2 00 4 00
Figure 31.2: Model, loadings and the internal forces My , N

This example is concerned with the cross-section and buckling resistance of steel members. It deals
with the spatial behavior of the beam and the occurrence of lateral torsional buckling as a potential mode
of failure. The content of this problem is covered by the following parts of EN 1993-1-1:2005 [7]:
• Method 2: Interaction factors kj for interaction formula in 6.3.3(4) (Annex B)
and parts of EN 1993-1-5:2006 [23]
• Effective cross section (Section 4.3 )

Material Properties Cross-Section Properties Geometric Loading

Properties
S 275 h = 600 mm H = 4.0 m N = 5500 kN
E = 210000 N/ mm2 b = 600 mm
ƒy = 275 N/ mm2 tƒ1 = 10 mm
ν = 0.3 tƒ2 = 20 mm
G = 81000 N/ mm2 t = 10 mm
γM0 = 1.0 A = 29400 mm2
γM1 = 1.0 y = 174800.0 cm4
z = 153200.0 cm4
Table 31.2: Results
SOF. SOF. Ref. [8]

(Iterative) (SIG NEFF)
Aeƒ ƒ [ cm2] 257.6 244.6 247.78
y,eƒ ƒ [cm4 ] 155600.0 149700.0 154000.0
eN,y [mm] 25.78 31.90 30.1
bƒ 1,1 [mm] 218.4 211.2 210.2
bƒ 1,eƒ ƒ [mm] 143.2 167.6 159.5
bƒ 1,2 [mm] 218.4 211.2 210.2
b2,1 [mm] 229.7 210.8 209.3
b2,eƒ ƒ [mm] 110.6 163.4 151.3
b2,2 [mm] 229.7 210.8 209.3
b4,1 [mm] 229.7 210.8 209.3
b4,eƒ ƒ [mm] 110.6 163.4 151.3
b4,2 [mm] 229.7 210.8 209.3
Tottston - 0.98 0.95
λLT 1.0 1.0 1.0
λy 0.189 0.172 0.173

SOF. SOF. Ref. [8]

(Iterative) (SIG NEFF)
λz 0.202 0.184 0.185
kyy 1.077 1.085 1.084
kzy 0.862 0.868 0.867
nm − y 0.792 0.995 0.973
nm − z 0.770 0.960 0.940


Design Loads
NEd = 5500 kN
1. CROSS-SECTION RESISTANCE
STEP 1: Cross-Section class check
bƒ 1 = bƒ 2 = b − 2 · t = 600 − 2 · 10 = 580 mm
h = h − tƒ 1 − tƒ 2 = 600 − 10 − 20 = 570 mm
Upper flange (compression):

v
u 235 v t 235
ϵ= = = 0.924
t
ƒy 275
bƒ 1 580
= = 58.0 > 42 · ϵ = 42 · 0.924 = 38.8 (Class 4)
tƒ 1 10
Lower flange (compression):
bƒ 2 580
= = 29.0 < 42 · ϵ = 38.8 (Class 3)
tƒ 2 20
Class 3 - but it also fulfils requirements for Class 1 (33 · ϵ)
Web (compression):
h 570
= = 57.0 > 42 · ϵ = 38.8 (Class 4) Cross-section classification, EN 1993-
t 10 1-1, Table 5.2
The cross-section is classified as Class 4.
STEP 2: Calculating the effective properties under uniform axial com-

pression
1 The sections mentioned in the margins refer to DIN EN 1993-1-1:2005 [21] unless

1 1 1
2
4
2
4
2
4
3
Figure 31.3: Effective area for uniform compression
Determination of the characteristics of the gross cross section
tƒ 1 + tƒ 1 h + tƒ 2

Sy = b · tƒ 1 · h − + 2 · h · t ·
2 2
1 10 + 20

Sy = 600 · 10 · 600 − +2
29400 2
570 + 20

· 570 · 10 · 600 −
2
Sy = 6.873 · 106 mm3
Sy 6.873 · 106
rt = = = 233.8 mm
A 29400.0
where:
Sy is the first moment of area of the gross cross section with respect to
the centroid of the lower flange (y-y axis),
rt is the distance from the centroid of the lower flange to the centroid
of the gross cross-section
Calculation of effectivep width of the upper flange
ψ = 1.0 → kσ = 4.0
bƒ 1 580
Plate elements without longitudinal stiff- λp = p = p = 1.105
eners, EN 1993-1-5, 4.4 tƒ 1 · 28.4 · ϵ · kσ 10 · 28.4 · 0.924 · 4.0
p
λp = 1.105 > 0.5 + 0.085 − 0.055 · Ψ
p
= 0.5 + 0.085 − 0.055 · 1 = 0.673

λp − 0.055 · (3 + Ψ) 1.105 − 0.055 · (3 + 1)

ρ= 2
= = 0.725
λp 1.1052
beƒ ƒ ,ƒ = ρ · bƒ 1 = 0.725 · 580 = 420.5 mm
be1,ƒ = be2,ƒ = 0.5 · beƒ ƒ ,ƒ = 0.5 · 420.5 = 210.2 mm
Calculation of effectivep width of the web
ψ = 1.0 → kσ = 4.0
h 570
λp = p = p = 1.086 Plate elements without longitudinal stiff-
t · 28.4 · ϵ ·
kσ 10 · 28.4 · 0.924 · 4.0 eners, EN 1993-1-5, 4.4
λp = 1.086 > 0.5 + 0.085 − 0.055 · φ

p
p
λp = 1.086 > 0.5 + 0.085 − 0.055 · 1 = 0.673
λp − 0.055 · (3 + φ) 1.086 − 0.055 · (3 + 1)

ρ= 2
= = 0.734
λp 1.0862
beƒ ƒ , = ρ · h = 0.734 · 570 = 418.7 mm
be1, = be2, = 0.5 · beƒ ƒ , = 0.5 · 418.7 = 209.3 mm
Determination of characteristics of effective cross section consid-

ering effective widths of the upper flange and webs in uniform
compression
ƒ = bƒ 1 − beƒ ƒ ,ƒ = 580.0 − 420.5 = 159.5 mm
 = h − beƒ ƒ , = 570.0 − 418.7 = 151.3 mm
Aeƒ ƒ = A − (ƒ · tƒ 1 + 2 ·  · t )

Aeƒ ƒ = 29400 − (159.5 · 10 + 2 · 151.3 · 10) = 24778.1 mm2
tƒ 1 + tƒ 2 10 + 20
rƒ = h − − rt = 600 − = 351.2 mm
2 2
tƒ 2 
r = h + − rT − be1, −
2 2
10 151.3
r = 570 + − 233.8 − 209.3 − = 61.2 mm
2 2
2 · r ·  · t + rƒ · ƒ · tƒ 1
eN,y =
Aeƒ ƒ
2 · 61.2 · 151.3 · 10 + 351.2 · 159.5 · 10

eN,y = = 30.1 mm
24778.1
rTeƒ ƒ ,N = rT − eN,y = 233.8 − 30.1 = 203.7 mm
where:
eN,y is the shift of centroid of the effective area relative to the centre
of gravity of the gross cross section determined assuming uniform

axial compression.
rTeƒ ƒ ,N is the distance from the centroid of the bottom flange to the
centroid of the effective cross-section under uniform compression.
STEP 3: Calculating the effective properties assuming the cross-

section is subject only to bending stresses
The effective section modulus Weƒ ƒ ,y is determined on the cross-

section subject only to bending moment.
Cross section class check
Upper flange (compression the same as in 1): Class 4
1 1 1
3
Figure 31.4: Effective area for bending
Determination of characteristics of effective cross section consider-

ing effective widths of the upper flange (calculation of effective width of
the upper flange is already done in section 1) and gross cross section
of the web:
Aeƒ ƒ = A − ƒ · tƒ 1
Aeƒ ƒ = 29400 − 159.5 · 10 = 27804.9 mm
rƒ · ƒ · tƒ 1 351.2 · 159.5 · 10
ΔrT,m = = = 20.1 mm
Aeƒ ƒ 24778.1
rTeƒ ƒ ,M = rT − ΔrT,M = 233.8 − 20.1 = 213.6 mm
ƒ · tƒ3
!

eƒ ƒ ,y
= y + Aeƒ ƒ · ΔrT,M
2 − + ƒ · tƒ · (rƒ + ΔrT,M )2
12
159.5 · 103


eƒ ƒ ,y
= 1.748 · 109 + 27804.9 · 20.12 − +
12

159.5 · 10 · (351.2 + 20.1)2 = 1.539 · 109 mm4

where:

eƒ is the effective second moment of area (cross section under pure
ƒ ,y
bending) with respect to y-y considering the effective width of the
upper flange.
The effective section moduli at the upper and lower edge of the girder’s
web, Weƒ 
and Weƒ are, respectively:
ƒ ,y,1 ƒ ,y,2

eƒ ƒ ,y

Weƒ =
ƒ ,y,1 tƒ 2
h + − rTeƒ ƒ ,M
2
1.540 · 109

Weƒ ƒ ,y,1
= = 4.20 · 106 mm3
20
570 − − 213.6
3

eƒ ƒ ,y

Weƒ =
ƒ ,y,2 tƒ 2
rTeƒ ƒ ,M −
2
1.540 · 109

Weƒ ƒ ,y,2
= = 7.558 · 106 mm3
20
213.6 −
2
Web (bending):
 
σ2 My,Ed / Weƒ ƒ ,y,2
Weƒ ƒ ,y,1 4.20 · 106
Ψ = = = =
σ1 
My,Ed / Weƒ ƒ ,y,1

Weƒ ƒ ,z,2
7.558 · 106
Ψ = −0.56 > −1
h 570 42 · ϵ 42 · 0.924
= = 57.0 > =
t 10 0.67 + 0.33 · Ψ 0.67 − 0.33 · 0.56
h
= 57.0 > 79.8 (Class 3)
t
The web is at least of Class 3.
In case of a slender web, the effectivep width should be determined on

the basis of stress ration Ψ .
The effective section modulus Weƒ ƒ ,y for the design resistance to uni-
form bending is defined as the smallest value of the effective section
moduli at the centroid of the upper and lower flange, Weƒ ƒ ,y, and
Weƒ ƒ ,y,2 , respectively:

eƒ ƒ ,y 1.540 · 109
Weƒ ƒ ,y,1 = =
tƒ 1 + tƒ 2 10 + 20
h + − rTeƒ ƒ ,M 570 − − 213.6
2 2
Weƒ ƒ ,y,1 = 4.144 · 106 mm3


eƒ ƒ ,y 1.540 · 109
Weƒ ƒ ,y,2 = = = 7.205 · 106 mm3
zTeƒ ƒ 213.6
Here, Weƒ ƒ ,y,1 governs.
STEP 4: Cross section resistance check
Additional bending moment NEd ·eN,y causes compression at the upper

flange (+compression).
NEd NEd · eN,y
Class 4-sections, EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.9.3, +
Eq. 6.44 Aeƒ ƒ · ƒy / γM0 Weƒ ƒ ,y,1 · ƒy / γM0
5.5 · 106 5.5 · 106 · 30.1

= +
24778.1 · 275/ 1.0 4.144 · 106 · 275/ 1.0
= 0.807 + 0.145
= 0.95 < 1.0 Satisfactory
2. STABILITY CHECK
In this example Method 2 is applied. Since the member has a rectangu-

lar hollow cross-section, the member is not susceptible to torsional de-
formation, so flexural buckling constitutes the relevant instability mode
and χLT = 1.00
STEP 1: Characteristic resistance of the section
NRk is calculated assuming that the NRk = A · ƒy = 24778.1 · 275 = 6813977.5 N = 6813.97 kN
cross-section is subject only to stresses
due to uniform axial compression, EN My,Rk = Wp,y · ƒy = 4.144 · 106 · 275 = 1139.6 · 10−6 Nm
1993-1-5, 4.3(4).
My,Rk is calculated assuming the cross
My,Rk = 1139.6 kNm
section is subject only to bending
stresses, EN 1993-1-5, 4.3(4)
STEP 2: Reduction coefficients due to flexural buckling, χy and χz
Plane xz (buckling about y)
Lcr,y = β · L = 4.00 m
v
t Aeƒ ƒ
Lcr,y A
EN 1993-1-1, Eq. 6.51 λy = ·
y λ1
v v
t y t 174700.00
y = = = 24.38 cm
A 294.00
λ1 = 93.9 · ϵ
v
u 235 v t 235
ϵ= = = 0.9244
t
ƒy 275
v
t 247.78
400 294.00
EN 1993-1-1, Eq. 6.51 λy = ·
24.38 93.9 · 0.9244
λy = 0.173

α = 0.34 Curve b Buckling curves, EN 1993-1-1, Table

6.2
2
h i
ϕ = 0.5 · 1 + α · (λy − 0.2) + λy
ϕ = ·0.5 1 + 0.34 · (0.173 − 0.2) + 0.1732

ϕ = 0.51
1
χy = s ≤ 1.0 χ, ϕ, EN 1993-1-1, Eq. 6.49
2
ϕ+ ϕ2 − λy
1
χy = p
0.51 + 0.512 − 0.1732
χy = 1.01 ≤ 1.0 → χy = 1.0
Plane xy (buckling about z):
Lcr,z = β · L = 4.00 m
v
t Aeƒ ƒ
Lcr,z A
λz = · EN 1993-1-1, Eq. 6.51
z λ1
v v
t z t 153200.00
z = = = 22.82 cm
A 294.00
v
t 247.78
400 294.00
λz = · EN 1993-1-1, Eq. 6.51
22.82 93.9 · 0.9244
λz = 0.185
α = 0.34 Curve b Buckling curves, EN 1993-1-1, Table

6.2
2
h i
ϕ = 0.5 · 1 + α · (λz − 0.2) + λz
ϕ = ·0.5 1 + 0.34 · (0.185 − 0.2) + 0.1852

ϕ = 0.51
1
χz = r ≤ 1.0 χ, ϕ, EN 1993-1-1, Eq. 6.49
2
ϕ+ ϕ2 − λz
1
χz = p
0.51 + 0.512 − 0.1732
χz = 1.01 ≤ 1.0 → χz = 1.0
STEP 3: Calculating of the interaction factors kyy and kzy
ψy = My,Ed,bse / MEd,top = 175.5/ 175.5 = 1.0
Table B.3 of EN 1993-1-1 gives:
Cmy = 0.6 + 0.4 · ψy ≥ 0.4 Interaction factors k,j for members not
susceptible to torsional deformations,
Annex B, Table B.1

Cmy = 0.6 + 0.4 · 1.0 = 1.0
NEd NEd

kyy = Cmy · 1 + 0.6 · λy · ≤ Cmy · 1 + 0.6 ·
χy · NRk χy · NRk
5500

kyy = 1.0 · 1 + 0.6 · 0.173 ·
1.0 · 6813.97
5500

≤ 1.0 · 1 + 0.6 ·
0.173 · 6813.97
kyy = 1.0837 ≤ 1.484
kzy = 0.8 · kyy = 1.084 · 0.8 = 0.867
Final expression
Check for y-y

NEd My,Ed
Uniform members in bending and axial + kyy · ≤ 1.0
compression, EN 1993-1-1, 6.3.3, Eq. NRk My,Rk
6.61
χy · χLT ·
γM1 γM1
5500 175
+ 1.084 · ≤ 1.0
6813.9 1139.6
1.0 · 1.0 ·
1.0 1.0
0.807 + 0.166 = 0.973 ≤ 1.0 → Satisfied
Check for z-z

NEd My,Ed
Uniform members in bending and axial + kzy · ≤ 1.0
compression, EN 1993-1-1, 6.3.3, Eq. NRk My,Rk
6.62
χz · χLT ·
γM1 γM1
5500 175
+ 0.867 · ≤ 1.0
6813.9 1139.6
1.0 · 1.0 ·
1.0 1.0
0.807 + 0.133 = 0.94 ≤ 1.0 → Satisfied

31.5 Conclusion
In the reference example, the effective area Aeƒ ƒ is determined assuming that the cross-section is sub-
jected only to stresses due to uniform axial compression (EN 1993-1-5, 4.3(3)) Ac,eƒ ƒ = ρ · Ac . The
effective section modulus Weƒ ƒ is determined assuming the cross-section is subject to only bending
stresses (EN 1993-1-5, 4.3(3)).
By using the NEFF SIG SMIN input it is possible to define only one effective cross-section for the de-
sign and stability check, therefore the effective section modulus is determined assuming that the cross-
section is subject only to stresses due uniform axial compression. The Aeƒ ƒ as well as Weƒ ƒ ,y and
Weƒ ƒ ,z values are calculated in SOFiSTiK for the effective cross-section as shown in Fig. 31.3. This
approach checks the MOST UNFAVOURABLE case where all plates are under compression.
By using the iterative method (EN 1993-1-5, Annex E) for calculating the effective cross-section proper-
ties, the effective CS properties will be calculated for the current stress state, so it gives more realistic
and economical results as shown in table 31.2. The iterative method can be used ONLY for the THIN-
WALLED cross-sections. In Fig. 31.5 you will find the comparison between ”SIG NEFF”, ”Iterative
approach” and the reference.
1 1
2
SOF. Iterative 4
SOF. SIG NEFF
REF.
2
4
3
Figure 31.5: Comparison of the b,eƒ ƒ values
31.6 Literature
[21] DIN EN 1993-1-1:2005 Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures, Part 1-1: General rules and rules
for buildings - Deutsche Fassung EN 1993-1-1:2005 + AC:2009. CEN. 2010.

[22] D. Beg et al. Design of plated structures. Ernst & Sohn and ECCS, 2010.
[23] EN 1993-1-5: Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures, Part 1-5: Plated structural elements. CEN.
2006.

DCE-EN31: Punching of flat slab acc. DIN EN 1992-1-1
32 DCE-EN31: Punching of flat slab acc. DIN EN 1992-1-

1
Overview
Design Code Family(s): DIN EN

Module(s): BEMESS
Input file(s): punching din en 1992.dat

The problem consist of a flat slab of a multi-story building as shown in Fig. 32.1. The design of slab
against punching at the columns is discussed in the following.
For the concrete, strength class C35/45 (ƒck = 35 MP, γc = 1.5) is assumed, for the reinforcing steel,
grade B500B (ƒyk = 500 MP, Es = 205 GP, γs = 1.15, ductility class B). The factored design load
accounting for self-weight, dead load and imposed load is ed = 14.67 kN/ m2 .
Column Slab
450/450 mm h=240 mm
3
eƒ ƒ , = 6.75 m
eƒ ƒ ,y = 6.75 m
1
C B A
Figure 32.1: Model


This example is concerned with the punching of flat slabs. The content of this problem is covered by the
following parts of DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 + AC:2010 [1]:
• Construction materials (Section 3)
• Punching (Section 6.4)
19
ot 1 1 ot
VEd
As, = ks, · As,crt
Figure 32.2: Punching

The goal of the preliminary design is to check if the dimensions of the structure are reasonable with
respect to the punching shear strength and if punching shear reinforcement is required.
In the reference example the reaction forces are estimated by using contributive areas, therefore the
example has been splitted into three models to show the punching for
• the inner column B2,
• the edge column A2/B1,
• wall at position B2.
The SOFiSTiK and reference results are given in Table 32.3.
Table 32.1: Results
Result SOF. Ref.

Inner column B2 (Node 1)
VEd [kN] 808.0 809.0
VEd,red [kN] 803.0 −
Ed [N/ mm2 ] 1.11 1.12

Result SOF. Ref.
Rd,c [N/ mm2 ] 0.93 0.93
Rd,m [N/ mm2 ] 1.30 1.30
ot [m] 6.01 6.05
1 [m] 4.188 4.19
β 1.10 1.10
d [m] 0.19 0.19
Edge column B1/A2 (Node 2)
VEd [kN] 317.7 319
VEd,red [kN] 312.7 −
Ed [N/ mm2 ] 0.91 0.925
Rd,c [N/ mm2 ] 0.86 0.86
Rd,m [N/ mm2 ] 1.21 1.204
ot [m] 3.21 3.28
1 [m] 2.539 2.54
β 1.40 1.40
d [m] 0.19 0.19
Wall B2 (Node 1014)
VEd [kN] 347.1 381.0
VEd,red [kN] − −
Ed [N/ mm2 ] 1.10 1.208
Rd,c [N/ mm2 ] 0.88 0.878
Rd,m [N/ mm2 ] 1.23 1.229
ot [m] 3.37 3.28
1 [m] 2.244 2.24
β 1.35 1.35
d [m] 0.19 0.19


32.4.1 Material
3.1 Concrete Concrete 35/45
Characteristic value of cylinder com- ƒck = 35 N/ mm2

pressive strength
ƒck
ƒcd = αcc ·
γc
35
ƒcd = 0.85 · = 19.80 N/ mm2
1.5
3.2 Reinforcing steel Steel B500B (flexural and transverse reinforcement)
3.2.2 ƒyk = 500 MP
ƒyk
ƒyd = = 435.00 N/ mm2
γs
Es = 205000 MP
Ductility class: B
32.4.2 Actions and Loads
Table 32.2: Characteristic actions
Action Characteristic value kN/ m2
Dead-weight (gk ) 7.25
Variable load (qk ) 3.25
Combined loads for design:
gd = γG · gk = 1.35 · 7.25 = 9.79 kN/ m2
qd = γQ · qk,1 = 1.50 · 3.25 = 4.88 kN/ m2
ed = gd + qd = 9.79 + 4.88 = 14.67 kN/ m2
32.4.3 Punching check for inner Column

Calculating effective depth d in  direction:
d = h − c, − 0.5 · ϕ
= 240 − 30 − 10
= 200 mm
1 The sections mentioned in the margins refer to DIN EN 1992-1-1 [1] unless otherwise
specified.

Calculating effective depth d in y direction:
dy = d − ϕ
= 200 − 20
= 180 mm
The columns will be checked for punching check:
Rd,c without punching reinforcement
Rd,s with punching reinforcement
Rd,m check the maximum value of shear
The position of columns is shown in Fig 32.3.
0.5 ·  
0.5 · y
0.5 · y
0.5 ·  0.5 ·  0.6 ·  0.4 · 
3
0.5 · y
y
0.5 · y
2
0.6 · y
y
0.4 · y
1
C B A
Figure 32.3: Load distribution - columns
Table 32.3: Load distribution per column
Column Type Axis Area [m2 ] VEd [kN]
Inner column C/3 45.56 700.60

Inner column B/3, C/2 50.12 745.80
Corner column B/2 55.13 749.20

Edge column A/3, C/1 19.74 298.60
Edge column A/2, B/1 21.72 305.60

Column Type Axis Area [m2 ] VEd [kN]
Corner column A/1 8.56 139.90
Effective depth d
d + dy
d=
2
0.2 + 0.18
d=
2
d = 0.19 m
24
19
45
2d
Figure 32.4: Punching - inner column
Perimeter 0 and 1
0 = 4 · 0.45 = 1.80 m
1 = 2 · (2 · 0.45 + π · 2.0 · 0.19)
1 = 4.19 m
Max. shear force (column B/2):
β · VEd
6.4.3, Eq. 6.38 Ed =
 · d
VEd = 809 kN
BEMESS is reducing the VEd value by dead load of the slab.

VEd,red = VEd − Vred
Vred = 1.35 · γc · rco,eƒ

2
ƒ
· π · hsb
Where:
rco,eƒ ƒ is the effective radius of the column
γc is the nominal weight of the concrete in kN/ m3

2
rco,eƒ · π is the effective area
ƒ
hsb height of the slab
Aco =  · b or Aco = 2 (if a=b)

v
t Aco
rco,eƒ ƒ =
π
β = 1.10 NDP, 6.4.3(6), β = 1.1 for inner

columns
In BEMESS the β value is limited to βm = 1.8.
Min. value is taken as βmn = 1.1
1.1 ≤ β ≤ 1.8
MEd
β=1+k· 1
VEd ·
W1
R 
The W value is calculated acc. W = 0
|e|d
6.4.3, Eq. 6.39 and Eq. 6.40
0.809 · 1.10
Ed = = 1.118 MN/ m2
4.19 · 0.19
Shear resistance without punching reinforcement
0 1.80
for = = 9.5 > 4
d 0.19
0.18
Rd,c = · k · (100 · ρ · ƒck )1/ 3 + 0.1 · σcp ≥ mn + 0.10 · σcp NDP, 6.4.4(1), Eq. 6.47, slabs without
γc punching reinforcement
with:
k = 1 + (200/ d)1/ 2 ≤ 2.0
k = 1 + (200/ 190)1/ 2 = 2.0 k > 2.0, because d = 190 mm <

200 mm
1/ 2
mn = (0.0525/ γc ) · k 3/ 2 · ƒck NCI, 6.2.2, Eq. 6.3DE for d ≤ 600
mn = (0.05252/ 1.5) · 2.03/ 2 · 351/ 2 = 0.586 MN/ m2
Reinforcement ratio for longitudinal reinforcement
over column B/2 - width of the strip
b = 0.4 · 6.75 m = 2.70 m > bp = 0.45 + 2 · 3.0 · 0.19 = 1.59 m
Reinforcement ratio

31.42
ρ, = = 0.0157
100 · 20
31.42
ρ,y = = 0.0175
100 · 18
ρ = (ρ, · ρ,y )1/ 2

= (0.0157 · 0.0175)1/ 2
= 0.0166
≤ 0.02
ƒcd 19.8
≤ 0.50 · = 0.5 · = 0.023
ƒyd 435
0.18
Rd,c = · 2.0 · (100 · 0.0166 · 35)1/ 3
1.5
Rd,c = 0.928 MN/ m2 > mn
< Ed = 1.118 MN/ m2
⇒ Punching reinforcement is required!
Slab with punching reinforcement
Rd,m = 1.4 · Rd,c

= 1.4 · 0.928 = 1.299 MN/ m2
> Ed = 1.118 MN/ m2
Rd,m ⇒ Ed the punching reinforcement can be used

(NDP) 6.4.5(3) Eq.(NA.6.53.1)
Punching reinforcement α = 90◦
VEd
(NCI) for 6.4.5 (4): For ot → Rd,c ot = β ·
is used according to 6.2.2 (1), CRd,c = Rd,c · d
0.15/ γc and not 0.18/ γc
0.809
ot = 1.10 ·
0.15
0.928 · · 0.19
0.18
ot = 6.05 m
Loaded area perimeter Aod
ot − 0
ot =
2·π
6.05 − 1.80
=
2·π
= 0.67 m ⇒≈ 3.52 · d
The punching reinforcement is required until (3.52 − 1.5) · d = 2.02 · d
As · ƒyed,eƒ · snα

VRd,cs = 0.75 · rd,c + 1.5 · (d/ sr ) ·
1 · d

with:
ƒyd,eƒ = 250 + 0.25 · d ≤ ƒyd
ƒyd,eƒ = 250 + 0.25 · 190 = 297 MN/ m2 < 435 MN/ m2
sr = 0.75 · d
(Ed − 0.75 · Rd,c ) · 1 · d
As =
d
1.5 · · ƒyd,eƒ
sr
(1.118 − 0.75 · 0.928) · 4.19 · 0.19
As = · 104
1
1.5 · · 297
0.75
As = 5.66 cm2
Reinforcement in perimeter 1 - As,1
req As,1 = ks · As
req As,1 = 2.5 · 5.66 = 14.10 cm2
req As,2 = 1.4 · 5.66 = 7.92 cm2
Detailing of reinforcement
The spacing of link legs around a perimeter should not exceed 1.5 · d
within the first control perimeter (2 · d from loaded area), and should not
exceed 2 · d for perimeters outside the first control perimeter where that
part of the perimeter is assumed to contribute to the shear capacity.
2.40
s1 = 2.40 m ⇒ min n = =9
1.5 · 0.19
3.29
s2 = 3.29 m ⇒ min n = = 12
1.5 · 0.19
Min. punching reinforcement:
p
0.08 ƒck
As,mn = · · sr · st (NCI), 9.4.3: Eq. (9.11DE)
1.5 ƒyk
p
35
As,mn = 0.05333 · · 0.75 · 1.5 · 1.92
500
As,mn = 0.26 cm2
32.4.4 Punching check for edge column

The punching check for columns (A2/B1) is verified:
Slab: C35/45, d = 0.19 m

24
19
45
2d
2d
Edge
Figure 32.5: Punching - edge column B1/A2
Critical perimeter
1 = 3 · 0.45 + π · 2.0 · 0.19
1 = 2.54 m
For edge and corner columns the effective perimeter is reduced based
by using the Sector Method (See Fig. 32.6). The Sector Method de-
livers the effective perimeter  of the punching round cut. The ratio
/ 0 is output in % in the result list.
BOUNDARY OF SLAB
2d
s
OPENING
Control perimeter
6·d
Figure 32.6: Calculating the control perimeter near opening by using

”Sector Method”
Maximal shear force:

VEd = 319 kN
β · VEd
Ed = Ed , 6.4.3, Eq. 6.38
 · d
β = 1.4 NDP, 6.4.3(6),
β = 1.4 for edge columns
1.40 · 0.319
Ed =
2.54 · 0.19
Ed = 0.925 MN/ m2

0.18
Rd,c = · k · (100 · ρ · ƒck )1/ 3 ≥ mn NDP, 6.4.4(1), Eq. 6.47, slabs without
γc punching reinforcement
with
k = 2.0
mn = 0.586 MN/ m2 mn , NCI, 6.2.2,

Eq. 6.3DE for d ≤ 600
Reinforcement ration ρ :
(Parallel over the edge of column B/1)
20.11
ρ = = 0.01
100 · 20
31.42
ρy = = 0.0175
100 · 18
ρ = (0.01 · 0.0175)1/ 2 = 0.0132

≤ 0.02
ƒcd
≤ 0.50 · = 0.023
ƒyd
0.18
Rd,c = · 2.0 · (100 · 0.0132 · 35)1/ 3
1.5
Rd,c = 0.860 MN/ m2 > mn
< 0.925 MN/ m2
⇒ punching reinforcement is required!
Maximum shear force
Rd,m = 1.4 · Rd,c = 1.4 · 0.860

= 1.204 MN/ m2 > VEd = 0.925 MN/ m2
Rd,m
(NDP) 6.4.5(3) Eq.(NA.6.53.1)
⇒ the punching reinforcement can bear the shear force Ed !

VEd
(NCI) for 6.4.5 (4): For ot → Rd,c ot = β ·
is used according to 6.2.2 (1), CRd,c = Rd,c · d
0.15/ γc and not 0.18/ γc
0.319
ot = 1.4 ·
0.15
0.860 · · 0.19
0.18
ot = 3.28 m
ot − o
ot =
π
3.28 − 3 · 0.45
= = 0.61 m →≈ 3.21 · d
π
Punching reinforcement is required until (3.21 − 1.5) · d = 1.71 · d
d As · ƒyd,eƒ · snα

Rd,s = 0.75 + Rd,c + 1.5 · ·
sr 1 · d
with
ƒyd,eƒ = 297 MN/ m2
sr = 0.5 · d
1 · d
As = (Ed − 0.75 · R,dc ) ·
d
1.5 · · ƒyd,eƒ
sr
2.54 · 0.19 · 104

As = (0.925 − 0.75 · 0.860) ·
1
1.5 · · 297
0.5
As = 1.51 cm2
req As,1 = 2.5 · 1.51 = 3.79 cm2
req As,2 = 1.4 · 1.51 = 2.12 cm2
(NCI), 9.4.3: Eq. (9.11DE) As,mn = 0.26 cm2
32.4.5 Punching check for wall

The punching check is verified at position B2.

0.5 · y 0.5 ·  
0.5 · y 0.5 ·  0.5 ·  0.6 ·  0.4 · 
3
0.5 · y
y
0.5 · y
2
0.6 · y
y
0.4 · y
1
C B A
Figure 32.7: Load distribution - wall
d = 190 mm
b1 = b = 350 mm < 3 · d
1
= b = 350 mm
2
< 3 · d − 0.5 · b1 = 3 · 190 − 175 = 395 mm
B
225
350
350
ed = 14.67 kN/ m2
Load distribution:

ALE = (0.5 + 0.6) · 6.75 m · (0.5 · 6.75 m + 0.125 m) = 26.0 m2
VEd = ALE · ed
VEd = 26.0 · 14.67 = 381 kN

For walls there are two methods to analyse the punching force at wall
ends and corners. Default is the integration of the slab shear force
along the critical perimeter. As the result varies depending on the
distance to the wall, BEMESS analyses four distances and takes the
maximum punching force.
Critical perimeter:
1 = 3 · 0.35 + ϕ · 2.0 · 0.19 = 2.24 m
Max. shear force:

β · VEd
Ed =
 · d
β = 1.35 for wall ending, β = 1.35
(NDP) 6.4.3 (6)
1.35 · 0.381
Ed = = 1.208 MN/ m2
2.24 · 0.19
0.18
NDP, 6.4.4(1), Eq. 6.47, Rd,c = · k · (100 · ρ · ƒck )1/ 3 ≥ mn
slabs without punching reinforcement γc
with:
k = 2.0
mn ; (NCI) 6.2.2; mn = 0.586 MN/ m2

Eq. 6.3DE for d ≤ 600 mm
Reinforcement ration ρ :
(Parallel over the edge of wall B/2)
For this example we will take ρ = 1.4 %
ρ = 0.014
≤ 0.02
ƒcd
≤ 0.50 · = 0.023
ƒyd
0.18
Rd,c = · 2.0 · (100 · 0.0140 · 35)1/ 3
1.5
Rd,c = 0.878 MN/ m2 > mn
< 1.208 MN/ m2
⇒ punching reinforcement is required!

Maximum shear force
VRd,m = 1.4 · Rd,c = 1.4 · 0.878

= 1.229 MN/ m2 < VEd = 1.208 MN/ m2
Rd,m
(NDP) 6.4.5(3) Eq.(NA.6.53.1)
⇒ VEd < VRd,m !

VEd
ot = β · (NCI) for 6.4.5 (4): Rd,c is used accord-
Rd,c · d 0.15
ing 6.2.2 (1), CRd,c =
γc
0.381
ot = 1.35 ·
0.15
0.878 · · 0.19
0.18
ot = 3.69 m
ot − o
ot =
π
3.69 − 3 · 0.35
= = 0.84 m →≈ 4.42 · d
π
Punching reinforcement is required until (4.42 − 1.5) · d = 2.92 · d
d As · ƒyd,eƒ · snα

Rd,s = 0.75 + Rd,c + 1.5 · ·
sr 1 · d
with
ƒyd,eƒ = 297 MN/ m2
sr = 0.5 · d
1 · d
As = (Ed − 0.75 · R,dc ) ·
d
1.5 · · ƒyd,eƒ
sr
2.24 · 0.19 · 104

As = (1.208 − 0.75 · 0.878) ·
1
1.5 · · 297
0.5
As = 2.62 cm2
req As,1 = 2.5 · 2.62 = 6.55 cm2
req As,2 = 1.4 · 2.62 = 3.66 cm2

(NCI), 9.4.3: Eq. (9.11DE) As,mn = 0.26 cm2

32.5 Conclusion
The program searches for the single support nodes (single columns, wall ends as well as wall corners),
and performs a punching check for these points. Nodes with less than 5 kN support reaction are not
considered! Because the focus of the verification example is punching, the value ρ is overtaken from
the verification example.
It has been shown that the results are reproduced with excellent accuracy.
32.6 Literature


DCE-EN32: Crack width calculation of reinforced slab acc. DIN EN 1992-1-1
33 DCE-EN32: Crack width calculation of reinforced slab

acc. DIN EN 1992-1-1
Overview

Module(s): BEMESS
Input file(s): crack width slab din-en-1992-1-1.dat

The problem consists of a flat slab, reinforced, as shown in Fig. 33.1. Loading always consisting of a
bending moment MEd , the normal force is N = 0. The crack width is determined.
My
A0s N
h
As
Figure 33.1: Geometry of slab, b = 1 m’

This example is concerned with the control of crack widths. The content of this problem is covered by
the following parts of DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 [1]:
• Basic assumptions for calculation of crack widths (Section 7.3.2, 7.3.3, 7.3.4)

A
ϕ h−
c B

ε2 = 0
h d
A C
E D
hc,eƒ
B ε1 5(c + ϕ/ 2)

The slab, with properties as defined in Table 33.4, is to be designed for crack width, with respect to
DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 (German National Annex) [1] [2]. The calculation steps with different loading
conditions and calculated with different sections of DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 + NA are presented below
and the results are given in Table 33.3.
10.0
.0
10
.0
10
10.0
Figure 33.3: Model and Loading

15.19
27.00
35.44
40.50
42.19
40.50
35.44
Figure 33.4: Model and internal forces - design element - γG = 1.35
C 25/ 30 h = 24.0 cm MEd = 42.11 kNm
B 500A d = 21 cm
b = 1000.0 cm
ϕs = 10.0 mm, s = 5.50 cm2 / m0
ϕs0 = 10.0 mm
k,req = 0.3 mm
Table 33.2: Results - Crack width calculation without direct method (quad element 10226)
Case SOF. REF.

σs,tb [MP] 303.87 303.87
ϕs [mm] 10 10
ϕ∗
s
[mm] 11.337 11.337
σs [MP] 303.87 303.87
s [cm2 / m] 7.04 7.34

Table 33.3: Results - Crack width calculation with direct method (quad element 10226)
Case Value SOF. REF.
s = 5.5 cm2 / m0 k [mm] 0.460 0.434
k,req = 0.3 mm s [cm2 / m0 ] 6.6 6.76


33.4.1 Material
Steel: γs = 1.15
ƒyk = 500 MP 3.2.2: (3)P: yield strength ƒyk =
500 MP
ƒyd = ƒyk / γs = 500/ 1.15 = 434.78 MP 3.2.7: (2), Fig. 3.8
Design Load:
MEd = 42.11 kNm
NEd = 0.0
33.4.2 Without direct calculation 7.3.3: Control of cracking without direct

calculation
ƒct,eƒ ƒ = ƒctm Examples calculated in this section are
w.r.t. Table 7.2DE, here Table 7.3N is
ƒct,eƒ ƒ = 2.56 MP not relevant
(NDP) 7.3.2 (2): ƒct,eƒ ƒ mean value of
mEd concrete tensile strength
σs = Tab. 3.1: ƒctm = 2.6 MP for C 25
s · z
(NDP) 7.3.3: Eq. 7.7.1DE: The maxi-
mum bar diameters should be modified
42.11 · 10−3
σs = = 405.09 MP for load action
5.5 · 10−4 · 0.9 · 0.21
ϕs = ϕ∗
s
· ≥ ϕ∗
s
· As = 5.5 cm2 prescribed reinforce-
4(h − d) · b · 2.9 2.9 ment
405.09 · 5.5
ϕs = 10 mm = ϕ∗
s
· = ϕ∗
s
· 0.475
4(24 − 21) · 100 · 2.9
ϕs = 10 = ϕ∗
s
· 0.640 ≥ ϕ∗
s
· 0.882
ϕs 10
→ ϕ∗
s
= = = 11.337 mm
0.882 0.882
Ç
σs,tb = k · 3.48 · 106 / ϕ∗
s
(NDP) 7.3.3 Tab. 7.2DE (a)
where k = 0.3 mm the prescribed
p maximum crack width
σs,tb = 0.3 · 3.48 · 106 / 11.337 = 303.448 MP
σs,tb = 303.448 < σs = 405.09 MP
→ crack width control is NOT passed with given reinforcement.

defined in [1] 3.2.7:(2), Fig. 3.8.


mEd mEd
s,req = ≈
σs,tb · z σs,tb · 0.9 · d
In BEMESS the lever arm is calculated by iterating the strains ϵtop ,

ϵbot , ϵc , ϵs . To simplify the reference → z = 0.9 · d is used.
42.11 · 100
s,req = = 7.34 cm2 / m0
30.3448 · 0.9 · 21
33.4.3 With direct calculation
Given reinforcement s = 5.5 cm2 / m0

mEd
σs =
s · z
42.11 · 10−3
σs = = 405.09 MP
5.5 · 10−4 · 0.9 · 0.21
Effective area Ac,eƒ ƒ of concrete in tension surrounding the reinforce-
ment :
7.3.2(3), Figure 7.1 Ac,eƒ ƒ = hc,eƒ ƒ · b
Ac,eƒ ƒ = (h − d) · 2 · b = (24 − 21) · 2 · 100 = 600 cm2
Crack width k , 7.3.4, Eq. 7.8 k = sr,m · (ϵsm − ϵcm )
ƒct,eƒ ƒ
σs − kt · · (1 + αe · ρp,eƒ ƒ )
ρp,eƒ ƒ σs
Crack width k , 7.3.4, Eq. 7.9 ϵsm − ϵcm = ≥ 0.6 ·
Es Es
7.3.4, kt = 0.4 for long term loading, kt = 0.4
kt = 0.6 for short term loading
0
As + ξ21 · Ap
7.3.4, Eq. 7.10 ρp,eƒ ƒ =
Ac,eƒ ƒ
Es 200000
αe = = = 6.354
Ecm 31476
A0p = 0
0
As + ξ21 · Ap As
7.3.4, Eq. 7.10 ρp,eƒ ƒ = =
Ac,eƒ ƒ Ac,eƒ ƒ
5.5
ρp,eƒ ƒ = = 0.00916
600
2.56
405.09 − 0.4 · · (1 + 6.35 · 0.00916)
0.00916
Crack width k , 7.3.4, Eq. 7.9 ϵsm − ϵcm =
200000
σs 405.09
· 0.6 = · 0.6 = 0.00122
Es 200000
ϵsm − ϵcm = 0.00143 ≥ 0.00122

ϕ σs · ϕ
sr,m = ≤ (NDP) 7.3.4 (3), Eq. 7.11
3.6 · ρp,eƒ ƒ 3.6 · ƒct,eƒ ƒ
10 405.09 · 10
sr,m = ≤
3.6 · 0.00917 3.6 · 2.56
sr,m = 303.03 mm ≤ 439 mm
k = sr,m · (ϵsm − ϵcm ) = 303.03 · 0.00143
k = 0.43 mm ≥ req = 0.30 mm
→ Check for crack is NOT passed with given reinforcement
The steps are now iterated and the reinforcement will be increased
until k = req = 0.3 mm.
Table 33.4: Iteration
s [cm2 / m] σs [MP] k [mm]
5.5 405.0986051 0.434

5.6 397.86 0.419
5.7 390.88 0.404
5.8 384.15 0.390
5.9 377.63 0.377
6.0 371.34 0.364
... ... ...
6.6 337.58 0.300
Calculation steps for given reinforcement s = 6.6 cm2 / m
σs = 337.58 MP
Ac,eƒ ƒ = hc,eƒ ƒ · b 7.3.2(3), Figure 7.1
Ac,eƒ ƒ = (h − d) · 2 · b = (24 − 21) · 2 · 100 = 600 cm2
k = sr,m · (ϵsm − ϵcm ) Crack width k , 7.3.4, Eq. 7.8
ƒct,eƒ ƒ
σs − kt · · (1 + αe · ρp,eƒ ƒ )
ρp,eƒ ƒ σs
ϵsm − ϵcm = ≥ 0.6 · Crack width k , 7.3.4, Eq. 7.9
Es Es
kt = 0.4 7.3.4, kt = 0.4 for long term loading,
kt = 0.6 for short term loading
0
As + ξ21 · Ap
ρp,eƒ ƒ = 7.3.4, Eq. 7.10
Ac,eƒ ƒ
Es 200000
αe = = = 6.354 7.3.4, αe is the ratio Es / Ecm
Ecm 31476
A0p = 0

0
As + ξ21 · Ap As
ρp,eƒ ƒ = =
Ac,eƒ ƒ Ac,eƒ ƒ
6.6
ρp,eƒ ƒ = = 0.0110
600
2.56
337.58 − 0.4 · · (1 + 6.35 · 0.0110)
0.0110
7.3.4, Eq. 7.9 ϵsm − ϵcm =
200000
σs 337.58
· 0.6 = · 0.6 = 0.00101
Es 200000
ϵsm − ϵcm = 0.0011899 ≥ 0.00101
ϕ σs · ϕ
(NDP) 7.3.4 (3), Eq. 7.11 sr,m = ≤
3.6 · ρp,eƒ ƒ 3.6 · ƒct,eƒ ƒ
10 337.58 · 10
sr,m = ≤
3.6 · 0.0110 3.6 · 2.56
sr,m = 252.52 mm ≤ 366.30 mm
k = sr,m · (ϵsm − ϵcm ) = 252.52 · 0.0011899
k = 0.30 mm ≤ req = 0.30 mm
→ Check for crack is passed with given reinforcement

33.5 Conclusion
This example shows the calculation of crack widths. Various ways of reference calculations are demon-
strated, in order to compare the SOFiSTiK results to. It has been shown that the results are reproduced
with excellent accuracy.
33.6 Literature


DCE-EN33: Designing a Reinforced Concrete Column acc. DIN EN 1992-1-1
34 DCE-EN33: Designing a Reinforced Concrete Column

acc. DIN EN 1992-1-1
Overview

Module(s): COLUMN
Input file(s): column din en 1992 nkv.dat

The problem consists of a reinforced concrete column positioned at edge of the building, as shown in
Fig. 34.1. Different loading conditions and the design approach by using the nominal curvature method
are examined.
The main goal of this benchmark is to verify and compare the SOFiSTiK results with the reference
example Beispiele zur Bemessung nach Eurocode 2 - Band 1: Hochbau [4, Example 10]. In this example
the Ultimate Limit State (ULS) of the prefabricated column is verified.
D1
15.0 m 15.0 m 15.0 m
Figure 34.1: Column D1

This example is concerned with the design of reinforced concrete column. The content of this problem
is covered by following parts of DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 [1]:
• Concrete cover (Section 4.4.1.1 and (NDP) Tab. 4.4DE)
• Materials (Section 3.1 and 3.2)
• Analysis of second order effects with axial load (Section 5.8)
• Geometric imperfections (Section 5.2)
• Columns (Section 9.5)

• Shear (Section 6.2.2)
1.9 m
A
Detail A β = 2.1
6.2 m
225 225
170 155 125
450
β = 2.1
Figure 34.2: Column properties

The column, with properties as defined in Table 34.1, is to be designed for ultimate limit state, with
respect to DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004 (German National Annex) [1] [2]. The calculation steps with loading
conditions are presented below and the results are given in Table 34.3.
C 30/ 37 b1 / h1 = 45/ 40 cm Gk = 431.0 kN
B 500B b2 / h2 = 17/ 40 cm Qk,s = 68.0 kN
dy = 41 cm qk,1 = +4.32 kN/ m
h = 6.20 + 1.9 = 8.1 m qk,2 = −1.85 kN/ m

Table 34.2: Results
Units SOF. Ref.

N [kN] -633.0 -633.0
My [kNm] 100.28 100.0
Mz [kNm] 0.0 0.0
e0 [mm] 158.41 179.0
e1 [mm] 20.7 21.0
As,req,1 [cm2 ] 15.431 16.20
As,req,2 [cm2 ] 4.52 4.52
1 See conclusion (Section 34.5) for more details why the results are different compared to the reference example.


34.4.1 Exposure class

For concrete inside buildings with low air humidity → XC1
Min. concrete class → C 16/20
Chosen concrete class → C 37/30
cnom = cmn + cde
cnom is the nominal concrete cover be- cnom = 10 + 10 = 20 mm

tween the surface of the reinforcement
closest to the nearest concrete surface
,4.4.1.1, Eq. (4.1)
34.4.2 Actions
Dead loading
Gk,1 = 400 kN
Gk,2,1 = 0.40 m · 0.45 m · 6.20 m · 25 kN/ m3 = 27.9 kN
Gk,2,2 = 0.40 m · 0.17 m · 1.90 m · 25 kN/ m3 = 3.2 kN
Gk, = 431 kN
P
Variable loading
Snow: Qk,s = 68 kN
Wind: e = cpe · q(ze )
qk,,1 = +0.7 · 0.95 = +0.665 kN/ m2
qk,,2 = −0.3 · 0.95 = −0.285 kN/ m2
Distance between columns is  = 6.5 m
34.4.3 Materials
Concrete
Class C 30/37
(NDP) 2.4.2.4: (1), Tab. 2.1DE: Partial γc = 1.50

defined in [1] 3.2.7:(2), Fig. 3.8.


Steel
Class B 500B
γs = 1.15
ƒyk = 500 MP 3.2.2: (3)P: yield strength ƒyk =

500 MP
ƒyd = ƒyk / γs = 500/ 1.15 = 434.78 MP 3.2.7: (2), Fig. 3.8
34.4.4 Buckling length

Buckling length around the y-axis:
0,y = βy · co
co = 6.20 m co , height of the column between the

idealized fixing points.
βy = 2.1 ← approximated βy , buckling factor
0,y = 6.2 · 2.1 = 13.0 m
y,0 p
λy = = 13.0 · 12/ 0.45 = 100 λy , slenderness
y
Buckling length around the z-axis:
0,z = βz · co
co = 6.20 m co , height of the column between the

idealized fixing points.
βz = 1.0 ← pinned on both sides βz , buckling factor
0,z = 6.2 · 1.0 = 6.2 m
z,0 p
λz = = 6.2 · 12/ 0.40 = 54 λz , slenderness
z
Slenderness criterion for isolated member
NEd 0.684
n= = = 0.224 n is the relative normal force, (NDP)
Ac · ƒcd 0.40 · 0.45 · 17.0 5.8.3.1 (1)
y
38 38
200
z
400
200
225 225
450
Figure 34.3: Column properties

16 16
λm = p = = 34 for n = 0.224 < 0.41
n 0.224
Because λy = 100 and λz are > λm = 34 second order effects
5.8.3.1(2) should be taken into account in both directions (y and z).
34.4.5 Imperfections
For isolated members, the effect of imperfection may be taken into ac-
count:
0
e is the eccentricity acc. 5.2(7), a) Eq. e = θ ·
(5.2) 2
θ is the inclination value acc. Eq. (5.1) θ = θ0 · αh · αm
1
θ0 is the basic inclination value, Eq. θ0 =
(5.1) 200
2 2
αh is the reduction factor for length of αh = p = p = 0.803 < 1.0
the height  6.2
αm = 0.5 · (1 + 1/ m) = 0.5 · (1 + 1/ 4) = 0.79

p p
Bending about the y-axis:
0,y = 13.00 m
1
θ = 0.803 · 0.79 · = 0.00317 = 1/ 315
200
13000
e,z = = 21 mm
2 · 315
Bending about the z-axis:
0,z = 6.20 m
1
θ = 0.803 · 1.0 · = 0.00402 ≈ 1/ 250
200
6200
e,y = = 13 mm
2 · 250
34.4.6 Min. and max. required reinforcement
(NDP) 9.5.2, maximum value of 0.09Ac As,m = 0.09 · 40 · 45 = 162 cm2

should not be exceeded.
|NEd |
As,mn = 0.15 · = 104 · 0.15 · 0.684/ 435 = 2.35 cm2
ƒyd
Constructive: 6 ϕ 12: As,mn = 6.79 cm2

34.4.7 Design of longitudinal reinforcement
Nominal curvature method for y-y direction
The design is approached by using the nominal curvature method. This

method is primarily suitable for isolated members with constant normal
force and a defined effective length 0 . The method gives a nominal
second order moment based on a deflection, which in turn is based on
the effective length and an estimated maximum.
Design moment MEd :
MEd = M0Ed + M2 = NEd · (e0 + e + e2 )
K1 = 1 for λ > 35
ƒcd · Ac
n = 1 + ω = 1 +
ƒyd · As
In the reference example As = 25.1 cm2 value is roughly estimated.

The formula for ω value is NOT correct.
ƒyd · As
In SOFiSTiK we use ω =
ƒcd · Ac
17.0 · 0.40 · 0.45

n = 1 +
435 · 25.1 · 10−4
3.06
n = 1 + = 3.81
1.09
nb = 0.4 nb is the value of n at maximum mo-
ment resistance, the value 0.4 may be
ƒyd 435 used, 5.8.8.3
ϵyd = = = 2.175 · 103
Es 200000
statical height:
ϕ
d = h − c,s − ϕ,s −
2
16
d = 450 − 20 − 10 − ≈ 410 mm
2
Cross-section: b/h/d = 400/450/410 mm
d1 (450 − 410)
= = 0.09 ≈ 0.10
h 450
Table 34.3: Results
Value Units Comb 1 Comb 2 Comb 3

My [kN] 74.40 90.40 100.00
N [kN] -684.00 -431.00 -633.00
e0 [mm] 109 210 158
e1 [mm] 21 21 21

Value Units Comb 1 Comb 2 Comb 3

e0 + e [mm] [ mm] 130 231 179
n 0.224 0.141 0.207

Kr 1 1 1
1 20
e2 = K1 · · [mm] 199 199 199
r 10
etot = e0 + e + e2 [mm] 329 430 378
MEd = NEd · etot [kNm] 225 185 239
μEd = MEd / (b · d2 · ƒcd ) 0.16 0.13 0.174
ωtot 0.19 0.13 0.174
ƒcd
As,tot = ωtot · b · h · [cm2 ] 13.40 12.70 16.20
ƒyd
Creep and shrinkage
M0Eqp
ϕ(∞, t0 ), 3.1.4, Fig. 3.1 a) ϕeƒ = ϕ(∞, t0 ) ·
M0Ed
Kƒ φ = 1 + β · φeƒ ≥ 1.0
ƒck λ
β = 0.35 + − ≥0
200 150
300 100
β = 0.35 + − = −0.17 < 0
200 150
Kφ = 1 → Creep and shrinkage is neglected!
Nominal curvature method for z-z direction
The column will be designed as a non-reinforcement column for z-z

direction:
Buckling length:
0,z = 6.20 m
Slenderness:
λz = 54 < λm = 86
Limits for the second order theory:
co 6.20
= = 15.50 > 2.5
h 0.40
The column should be investigated for the second order effects.

Design resistance normal force NRd :
NRd = b · h · ƒcd,p ·   is the factor taking into account ec-

centricity, including 2nd order effects
etot 0 2 · etot and normal effects of creep, 12.6.5.2
 = 1.14 · (1 − 2 · ) − 0.02 · ≤1− h is the overall depth of the cross-
h h h section, 12.6.5.2
b is the overall width of the cross-
etot = e0 + e = 0 + 13 = 13 mm
section, 12.6.5.2
13 6200 2 · 13
 = 1.14 · (1 − 2 · ) − 0.02 · ≤1−
400 400 400
 = 0.756 ≤ 0.94
0.70 · 30
ƒcd,p = = 14.0 N/ mm2
1.5
NRd = 0.45 · 0.40 · 14.0 · 0.756 = 1.9 sMN > |NEd | = 0.684 MN
34.4.8 Design of shear reinforcement

Shear design on bottom of column:
VEd = −32.0 kN General verification procedure, 6.2.1
NEd = 431 kN
d = 0.41 m
VEd,reƒ = 32.0 − 0.41 · 6.48 = 29.3 kN
The design value of the shear resistance VRd,c
0.15

VRd,c = · k · (100 · ρ · ƒck ) 1/ 3 + 0.12 · σcp · b · d >
γc
VRd,c,mn Shear design, 6.2.2, Eq. (6.2)
v
t 200
k =1+ ≤ 2.0
d
v
t 200
k =1+ = 1.70
410
As 8.04
ρ = = = 0.0049 < 0.02
b · d 40 · 41
ƒck = 30 N/ mm2
NEd 0.431
σcp = = = 2.39 MN/ m2 C30/37 → 0.2 · ƒcd = 3.4 MP
Ac 0.40 · 0.45
0.15

VRd,c = · 1.70 · (100 · 0.49 · 30)1/ 3 + 0.12 · 2.39 · 0.40 ·
1.5
0.41 >= 0.115 MN
VEd,red = 29.3 kN < VRd,c = 115 kN
→ no shear reinforcement required!

34.5 Conclusion
This example shows the calculation of column design by using the norminal curvature method. Various
ways of reference calculations are demonstrated, in order to compare the reference results to SOFiSTiK.
The main reason for minor deviations (See Tab. 34.3 in Section 34.3) is that in the reference benchmark,
the 2nd order effects and the reinforcement are approximated by using analytical formulas. In SOFiSTiK,
the Kr value is iterated until Kr < 1 · 10−4 , if this condition is met, then the iteration is stopped. With a
hand calculation this is very difficult to achieve.
START
New As
As · ƒyd
n = 1 +
Ac · ƒcd
NEd
n=
Ac · ƒcd
n + n
Kr =
n − nb
No
|Kr,ne − Kr,od | < 1 · 10−4
Yes
END
Figure 34.4: Iteration
The general approach of the nominal curvature is listed as following steps:
1. Calculation of the imperfection e , slenderness λ and inner lever arm dy,z
2. Find the critical deflection e0 , which depends on the current loadcase combination. Consider
different end-moments according EN 1992-1-1:2004, 5.8.8.2 (2), Eq. 5.32
3. Start iteration of design moment MEd (Theory II. Order). The iteration will stop, when the coefficient
Kr achieved convergence.
(a) Validation, if uni-/biaxial design can be applied
(b) Calculate the coefficient Kr and the eccentricity e2
(c) Calculate actual design moment MEd = NEd · (e0 + e + e2 )
(d) Calculate required reinforcement with the program AQB
4. Additional cross section design on different locations (without imperfection and theory II.O.)
5. Result: decisive design moment, required reinforcement and utilization factor.

34.6 Literature


DCE-EN34: Elastic Critical Plate Buckling Stress
35 DCE-EN34: Elastic Critical Plate Buckling Stress
Overview

Module(s): ASE
Input file(s): eccs plate buckling.dat

The problem consists of a stiffened steel plate. Its dimensions and boundary conditions are given in
Figure 35.2.
The main goal of this benchmark is to verify and compare the SOFiSTiK results with the ECCS reference
example Beg et al. [22, Example 2.4-3].
In SOFiSTiK a FEM model will be used to compare the results with:
• Klöppel diagrams (Klöppel and Scheer, 1960)
• EBPlate (2007)
• FEM software (ABAQUS)
• EN 1993-1-5 rules
Figure 35.2: SOFiSTiK FEM Model - Steel plate with 2 horizontal stiffeners

hs
σc
b1
ts
b b2 = b1
b3 = b1
a = 1800 mm, b = 1800 mm, b1 = 600 mm, hs = 100 mm, ts = 10 mm.
S 355, ƒy = 355 N/ mm2 , ϵ = 0.81
Figure 35.1: The layout of stiffened plate

This example is concerned with calculation of the elastic critical plate buckling stress. The content of
this problem is covered by following parts of EN 1993-1-1 [7] and EN 1993-1-5 [23]:
• Materials (EN 1993-1-1 [7], Section 3)
• Calculating the critical plate buckling stress (EN 1993-1-5 [23], Annex A.2)

The calculation steps with loading conditions are presented below and the results are given in Table 35.2.
To calculate the critical plate buckling stress the loading, σc = 1.0 N/ mm2 is used. The critical elastic
stress will be calculated by multiplying the minimum eigenvalue with the unity stress σc = 1.0.
σcr,p = αcr · σc
S 355  = 1800 mm σc = −1 N/ mm2
ƒy = 355 N/ mm2 b = 1800 mm

ϵ = 0.81 b1 = 600 mm
hs = 100 mm
ts = 10 mm
t = 12 mm
Table 35.2: Results
Units SOF. Klöppel EBPlate ABAQUS EN 1993-1-5
N

σcr 275.793 274.170 268.721 2682 290
mm2
Table 35.3: SOFiSTiK Buckling Eigenvalues
No. Loadcase Relative Error Buckling Factor
1. 2001 8.47E-22 275.793

2. 2002 2.91E-14 324.218
3. 2003 3.30E-13 350.579
4. 2004 7.14E-10 361.747
5. 2005 1.69E-10 374.351
1 EBPlate, V2.01
2 The results were overtaken from the ECCs reference example Beg et al. [22, Example 2.4-3]

1.0923
1.0798
1.0731
1.02 1.02 1.02 1.03
93
1.0664
0.9
1.0598
1.0531
1.0465
1.0398
1.0331
1.0265
1.0198 4
1.0131 1.0
1.01 1.01 1.01 1.01
1.0065 1.07 1.01 1.07
0.9998 1.01
0.9931 1.08 1.08
0.9865
0.9798
0.9731
0.9665 0.991
1.06
0.9598 1.06 0.991
0.9465
0.9398
0.9331
0.9265 1.08 1.08
0.9198 1.01
0.9131 1.08 1.09
0.9065 1.01
04
1.
0.8998
0.8932
0.8865
0.8798
0.8732
0.8665
0.8598 1.01
0.8532
0.8465 1.03 0.993 1.03
0.8398
0.8332
0.8265
0.8257
Figure 35.3: SOFiSTiK FEM Model - Stress distribution along the plate for σc = 1.0 N/ mm2

35.4 Design Process

Design with respect to EN 1993-1-5:2006 [23]: 3
35.4.1 Klöppel
σcr,p is given with the following equation:
σcr,p = kσ,p · σE
Where:
π2 · E · t2
σE =
12 · (1 − ν 2 ) · b2
π 2 · 210000 · 122
σE = = 8.436 N/ mm2
12 · (1 − 0.32 ) · 18002
kσ,p is the elastic critical plate buckling coefficient according to Klöppel.
The parameters needed for the evaluation of kσ,p are:
 1800
α= = = 1.0
b 1800
As bs · t 100 · 10
δ= = = = 0.05
b·t b·t 1800 · 12
(s + As · e2 ) · 12 · (1 − ν 2 )
γ=
b · t3
ts

b3s · + bs · ts · e2 · 12 · (1 − ν 2 )
12
γ=
b · t3
10

+

1003 · 100 · 10 · 502 · 12 · 1 − 0.32
12
γ= = 11.70
1800 · 123
Note that parameter α and δ above are not the same as in EN 1993-1-
5, Annex A.1, where the procedure for plates stiffened with more than
two stiffeners is given.
The plate buckling coefficient is obtained from the diagram (according

to Klöppel) in Figure 35.4.
kσ = 32.5
Finally, the critical buckling stress is equal to:
σcr,p = kσ · σE = 32.5 · 8.436 = 274.17 N/ mm2

wise specified.

36
σ1 100
γ, δ b/ 3
30 15
γ, δ b/ 3 80
b/ 3
10 ψ · σ1 = σ1  =  · b 60
50
20 6 40 30
kσ 25 20
4 15
10
10 2 6
24
1 1
0 0
0
0.7 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 3.8
α
Figure 35.4: Klöppel Diagram
35.4.2 EBPlate
The usual procedure (calculation of buckling modes) for the calculation
of critical stresses is presented by using EBPlate.
plate:  = 1800 mm, b = 1800 mm, t = 12 mm
stiffener: h = bs = 100 mm, t = ts = 10 mm
stiffener position: b1 = 600 mm
Results (1st and 2nd buckling mode)
Figure 35.5: EBPlate - Buckling mode 1, σcr,p = 268.72 N/ mm2

Figure 35.6: EBPlate - Buckling mode 2, σcr,p = 316.508 N/ mm2
35.4.3 EN 1993-1-5, Annex A.2

The critical plate buckling stress is calculated according to EN 1993-1-5,
Annex A.2. The plate can be treated as an equivalent orthotropic plate
if it is stiffened with at least three stiffeners. The plate-like behaviour is
modelled by the buckling of each stiffener as a column on continuous
elastic support provided by plate, while the other stiffeners acts as rigid
support. Buckling of both stiffeners simultaneously is accounted for by
considering a single lumped stiffener, which substitutes both stiffeners
in such a way that its cross-sectional area and its second moment of
area are the sum of the individual stiffeners. It is positioned at the loca-
tion of the resultant of the respective forces in the individual stiffeners.
b1 b2
As,1
s,1
b
b2 b3
As,2
s,2
b
Amped,1
mped,2
bmped,1 bmped,2
bmped

Stiffeners I and II
b1 / 2 ts b2 / 2
e2
e1
bs
Figure 35.7
e1 = 49.20 mm, e2 = 6.80 mm, b1 = 595 mm, b2 = 590 mm
b1 = b2 = 600 mm, b = b1 + b2 = 600 + 600 = 1200 mm

!
b1 + b2
As,1 = + ts · t + bs · ts
2
595 + 590

As,1 = + 10 · 12 + 100 · 10 = 8230 mm2
2

b3s · ts (b1 + b2 ) · 0.5 + ts,1 · t 3
s,1 = + + bs · ts · e21 +
12 12
(b1 + b2 ) · 0.5 + ts,1 · t · e22
1003 · 10 ((595 + 590) · 0.5 + 10) · 12

s,1 = + +100·10·49.22 +
12 12
((595 + 590) · 0.5 + 10) · 12 · 6.802
s,1 = 3.68 · 106 mm4

v
2 2
4  s,1 · b 1 · b 2
u
c = 4.33 ·
t
t3 · b
v
6 2 2
4 3.68 · 10 · 600 · 600
u
c = 4.33 ·
t
123 · 1200
c = 2998 mm
As  ≤ c ( = 1800 mm), the column buckles in a 1-wave mode and

the buckling stress is obtained as follows:

π 2 · E · s,1
σcr,s =
As,1 · 2
E · t 3 · b · 2
+
4 · π 2 · (1 − ν 2 ) · As,1 · b21 · b22
π 2 · 210000 · 3.68 · 106

σcr,s =
8230 · 18002
210000 · 123 · 1200 · 18002
+
4 · π 2 · (1 − 0.32 ) · 8230 · 6002 · 6002
σcr,s = 322 N/ mm2
In case of a stress gradient over the plate width, the critical plate buck-
ling stress should be properly interpolated from the position of the stiff-
ener to the most stressed edge of the plate. In this case no stress gra-
dient over the depth of the plate is present. Therefore, the critical plate
buckling stress is equal to the critical stress calculated for the buckling
of the stiffener on the elastic support:

σcr,p = σcr,p
 = σcr,s = 322 N/ mm2
Lumped stiffener
bmped,1 = bmped,2 = 900 mm, bmped = 1800 mm
Amped = As + A

s
= 8230 + 8230 = 16460 mm4
mped = s
 +   = 3.675 · 106 + 3.675 · 106 = 7.35 · 106 mm4
s
v
mped · b2mped,1 · b2mped,2
u
u
4
c = 4.33 ·
t
t 3 · bmped
v
6 2 2
4 7.35 · 10 · 900 · 900
u
c = 4.33 ·
t
123 · 1800
c = 4832 mm
As  < c ( = 1800 mm), the column buckles in a 1-wave mode and

the buckling stress is obtained with equation:
π 2 · E · mped
σcr,mped =
Amped · 2
E · t 3 · bmped · 2
+
4 · π 2 · (1 − ν 2 ) · Amped · b2mped,1 · b2mped,2

π 2 · 210000 · 7.35 · 106

σcr,mped =
16460 · 18002
210000 · 123 · 1800 · 18002
+
4 · π 2 · (1 − 0.32 ) · 16460 · 9002 · 9002
Finally we have:
σcr,mped = 290 N/ mm2

mped

σcr,p = mn σcr,p
 , σcr,p
σcr,p = mn [322, 290] = 290 N/ mm2
35.4.4 ABAQUS
The results from ABAQUS have be overtaken from the ECCS reference
example Beg et al. [22, Example 2.4-3], see Table 35.2 for more details.

35.5 Conclusion
The critical plate buckling stress was calculated by using:
• SOFiSTiK
• Klöppel diagrams
• EBPlate
• ABAQUS
• EN 1993-1-5 rules
All results are compared and summarised in Table 35.2.
The methods used in the calculation give very similar results. The advantage of SOFiSTiK compared to
Eurocode formulas and other tools (that are not using FEM) is that the stiffeners can be added customly.
The cases with variable height of plates can be analysed as well (haunches). In conclusion, it has been
shown that the SOFISTiK results are reproduced with excellent accuracy.
(a) 1st buckling mode: σcr,p = 275.79 N/ mm2 (b) 2nd buckling mode: σcr,p = 324.22 N/ mm2
Figure 35.8: SOFiSTiK - Buckling modes
35.6 Literature
[22] D. Beg et al. Design of plated structures. Ernst & Sohn and ECCS, 2010.
[23] EN 1993-1-5: Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures, Part 1-5: Plated structural elements. CEN.
2006.


DCE-MC1: Creep and Shrinkage Calculation using the Model Code 2010
36 DCE-MC1: Creep and Shrinkage Calculation using

the Model Code 2010
Overview
Design Code Family(s): MC

Design Code(s): MC 2010
Module(s): AQB, CSM
Input file(s): creep shrinkage mc10.dat

crete, as shown in Fig. 36.1. The total creep and shrinkage is calculated.
h My
Np
zp
Ap

This example is concerned with the calculation of creep and shrinkage on a prestressed concrete cross-
section, subject to bending and prestress force. The content of this problem is covered by the following
parts of fib Model Code 2010 [16]:
• Creep and Shrinkage (Section 5.1.9.4)
• Temperature effects (Section 5.1.10)

crete simply supported beam. In benchmark 18 the calculation was made using DIN EN 1992-1-1:2004
design code. This example will explain the calculation for the case of creep and shrinkage using fib
Model Code 2010 [16] The analysed system can be seen in Fig. 36.2, with properties as defined in
Table 36.1. Further information about the tendon geometry and prestressing can be found in benchmark
17. The beam consists of a rectangular cross-section and is prestressed and loaded with its own weight.
A calculation of the creep and shrinkage is performed with respect to fib Model Code 2010 [16].

Material Properties Geometric Properties Time
C 35/ 45 h = 100.0 cm t0 = 28 dys
Y 1770 b = 100.0 cm ts = 0 dys
RH = 80 % L = 20.0 m t = 36500 dys
Ap = 28.5 cm2
Table 36.2: Results
εcs −27.8 · 10−5 −27.8 · 10−5 −27.82 · 10−5
ϕbc (t, t0 ) 1.57 1.561 1.563
Note: The results from SOFiSTiK are rounded for output.

36.4 Design Process

Design with respect to fib Model Code 2010 [16]
Material:
Ecm = 35000 N/ mm2 5.1.7.2: Modulus of elasticity for

C 35/ 45
ƒck = 35 N/ mm2
ƒcm = 43 N/ mm2 5.1.4: Mean value of compressive

strength ƒck . See the eq. (5.1-1)
Ep = 195000 N/ mm2 Ep for wires
ƒpk = 1770 N/ mm2 ƒpk Characteristic tensile strength of

prestressing steel
CALCULATION OF TOTAL SHRINKAGE AND SWELLING at  =
10.0 m midspan:
t0 = 28 days t0 age at first loading

ts concrete age at the beginning of
ts = 0 days shrinkage or swelling
ered
t = 36500 days
εcs (t, ts ) = εcbs (t) + εcds (t, ts ) 5.1.9.4.4: Eq. 5.1-75: εcs (t, ts ) total
shrinkage or swelling strains
Calculating the basic shrinkage:
εcbs (t) = εcbs0 (ƒcm ) · βbs (t) 5.1.9.4.4: Eq. 5.1-76: εcbs (t) is the ba-
sic shrinkage
2.5
0.1 · ƒcm

ε(ƒcm ) = −αbs · · 10−6 5.1.9.4.4: Eq. 5.1-78: εcds0 (ƒcm ) is the
6 + 0.1 · ƒcm notional shrinkage coefficient
αbs = 700 for N class of cement αbs is a coefficient, dependent on the

type of cement (see table 5.1-12)
2.5
0.1 · 43

ε(ƒcm ) = −700 · · 10−6
6 + 0.1 · 43
ε(ƒcm ) = −700 · (4.3/ 10.3)2.5 · 10−6
ε(ƒcm ) = −7.8827 · 10−5
The development of drying shrinkage strain in time strongly depends

on βds (t, ts ) factor. SOFiSTiK accounts not only for the age at start
of drying ts but also for the influence of the age of prestressing t0 .
Therefore, the calculation of factor βds reads:
p
βbs (t) = 1 − ep(−0.2 · t) − 1 − ep(−0.2 · t0 )
p
p p
βbs (t) = 1 − ep(−0.2 · 36500) − 1 − ep(−0.2 · 28)
βbs (t) = 1 − ep(−38.2099) − (1 − ep(−1.0583))
βbs (t) = 0.347

The basic shrinkage is calculated:
εcbs (t) = εcbs0 (ƒcm ) · βbs (t)

5.1.9.4.4: Eq: 5.1-76 εcbs (t) = −7.8827 · 10−5 · 0.347
εcbs (t) = −0.0002735269 = −2.735 · 10−5
Calculating the drying shrinkage:

5.1.9.4.4: Eq. 5.1-77 εcds (t, ts ) = εcds0 (ƒcm ) · βRH (RH) · βds (t − ts )
The drying shrinkage is calculated εcds (t, ts ) by means of the notional

drying shrinkage coefficient εcds0 (ƒcm ), the coefficient βRH , taking into
account the effect of the ambient relative humidity, and the function
βds (t − ts ) describing the time development:
5.1.9.4.4: Eq. 5.1-80 εcds0 = [(220 + 110 · αds1 ) · ep(−αds2 · ƒcm )] · 10−6
See table 5.1-12 Coefficients (αds ) are depending on the type of cement.
For normal class type of cement:

αds1 = 4
αds2 = 0.012
εcds0 (ƒcm ) = [(220 + 110 · 4) · ep(−0.012 · ƒcm )] · 10−6

εcds0 (ƒcm ) = [660 · ep(−0.516)] · 10−6
εcds0 (ƒcm ) = 39.39 · 10−5
RH 3

−1.55 · 1 −

, ƒ or 40 ≤ RH < 99% · βs1
5.1.9.4.4: Eq. 5.1-81 βRH = 100

ƒ or RH ≥ 99% · βs1

0.25,
0.1
35

βs1 = ≤ 1.0
ƒcm
35 0.1

5.1.9.4.4: Eq. 5.1-83 βs1 = = 0.9796 ≤ 1.0
43
99% · βs1 = 99 · 0.9796 = 96.98
80 3

βRH = −1.55 · 1 − = −0.7564
100
SOFiSTiK accounts not only for the age at start of drying ts but also
for the influence of the age of prestressing, so the time development
function reads:
v v
u t − ts u t0 − ts
βds (t − ts ) = −
t t
5.1.9.4.4: Eq. 5.1-82
0.035 · h2 + (t − ts ) 0.035 · h2 + (t0 − ts )
v v
u
36500 u
28
βds (t − ts ) =
t t
−
0.035 · 5002 + 36500 0.035 · 5002 + 28
βds (t − ts ) = 0.8981 − 0.05669 = 0.8416
The drying shrinkage is calculated:
εcds (t, ts ) = εcds0 (ƒcm ) · βRH · βds (t − ts )

εcds (t, ts ) = 39.39 · 10−5 · (−0.7564) · 0.8416

εcds (t, ts ) = −25.08 · 10−5
The total shrinkage or swelling strain is calculated:

εcs (t, ts ) = εcbs (t) + εcds (t, ts )
εcs (t, ts ) = (−2.735 + (−25.08)) · 10−5 = −27.82 · 10−5
CALCULATION OF TOTAL CREEP at x=10.0 m midspan:
The creep coefficient:

ϕ(t, t0 ) = ϕbc (t, t0 ) + ϕdc (t, t0 ) 5.1.9.4.3(b): Eq. 5.1-63: ϕ(t, t0 ) is the
creep coefficient; ϕbc (t, t0 ) is the basic
Calculating the basic creep: creep coefficient according to eq. 5.1-
64; ϕdc (t, t0 ) is the drying creep coeffi-
cient according to eq. 5.1-67
ϕbc (t, t0 ) = β(ƒcm ) · βbc (t, t0 )
1.8 1.8
with: βbc (ƒcm ) = = = 0.12937
(ƒcm )0.7 (43)0.7
and the time development function:
2
30
βbc (t, t0 ) = n + 0.035 · (t − t0 ) + 1 5.1.9.4.3(b): Eq. 5.1-66: βbc (t, t0 ) is
t0,dj the time development function
 α
9
t0,dj = t0,T ·  1.2
+ 1 ≥ 0.5 days t0,dj is the modified age at loading t0
2 + t0,T
n
X
4000

tT = Δt · ep 13.65 − 5.1.10.2: Eq. 5.1-85; tT the adjusted
=1
273 + T(Δt ) concrete age, during the effect of ele-
vated or reduced temperatures on the
n
4000

X maturity of concrete
t0,T = 28 · ep 13.65 − = 27.947 days
=1
273 + 20
α = 0 for N class cement

0
9

t0,dj = 27.947 · +1 = 27.947 ≥ 0.5 days
2 + 27.9471.2
2
30
βbc (t, t0 ) = n + 0.035 · 36472 + 1
27.947
βbc (t, t0 ) = 10.71
The basic creep coefficient:

ϕbc (t, t0 ) = 0.12937 · 10.71 = 1.385
Calculating the drying creep:

The drying coefficient may be estimated from:
ϕdc (t, t0 ) = βdc ƒcm · β(RH) · βdc (t0 ) · βdc (t, t0 ) 5.1.9.4.3b: Eq. 5.1-67; ϕdc (t, t0 ) is the
drying creep coefficient
with:
412
βdc (ƒcm ) = = 2.1283 5.1.9.4.3: Eq.5.1-68
(ƒcm )1.4

RH 80
1− 1−
100 100
5.1.9.4.3(b): Eq. 5.1-69 β(RH) = v = v = 0.251
h 500
u u
3
t 3
t
0.1 · 0.1 ·
100 100
1 1
5.1.9.4.3: Eq.5.1-70 βdc (t0 ) = = = 0.4886
0.2
0.1 + t0,dj 0.1 + 27.947
γ(t0 )
t − t0

5.1.9.4.3(b): Eq. 5.1-71a; βdc (t, t0 ) the βdc (t, t0 ) =
development of drying creep with time βh + (t − t0 )
with:
1 1
5.1.9.4.3: Eq. 5.1-71b γ(t0 ) = == 0.3376
3.5 2.962
2+ p
t0,dj
v v
u 35
t 35
u
αƒcm = = = 0.9021
t
5.1.9.4.3: Eq. 5.1-71d
ƒcm 43
5.1.9.4.3: Eq. 5.1-71c βh = 1.5 · h + 250 · αƒcm ≤ 1500 · αƒcm
βh = 1.5 · 500 + 250 · 0.9021 = 975.548 ≤ 1352.15
0.3376
36500 − 28

5.1.9.4.3: Eq. 5.1-71a βdc (t, t0 ) = = 0, 9911
975.548 + (36500 − 28)
The drying creep coefficient:

ϕbc (t, t0 ) = 2.1283 · 0.251 · 0.4886 · 0.9911 = 0.2597
The total creep coefficient:

ϕ(t, t0 ) = ϕbc (t, t0 ) + ϕdc (t, t0 )
ϕ(t, t0 ) = 1.385 + 0.2587 = 1.64
According to Model Code 2010 [16], the creep value is related to the
tangent Youngs modulus Ec , where Ec being defined as 1.05 · Ecm . To
account for this, SOFiSTiK adopts this scaling for the computed creep
coefficient (in SOFiSTiK, all computations are consistently based on
Ecm .
ϕ(t, t0 ) = 1.64/ 1.05 = 1.56

36.5 Conclusion
This example shows the calculation of the creep and shrinkage using fib Model Code 2010 [16]. It has
been shown that the results are in very good agreement with the reference solution.
36.6 Literature


37 DCE-MC2: Creep and Shrinkage Calculation using

the Model Code 1990
Overview
Design Code Family(s): MC

Design Code(s): MC 1990
Module(s): AQB, CSM
Input file(s): creep shrinkage mc90.dat

crete, as shown in Fig. 37.1. The total creep and shrinkge is calculated.
h My
Np
zp
Ap

subject to bending and prestress force. The content of this problem is covered by the following parts of
CEB-FIP Model Code 1990 [24]:
• Creep and Shrinkage (Section 2.1.6.4)
• Temperature effects (Section 2.1.8)
In this Benchmark the total creep and shrinkage will be examined.

crete simply supported beam. The analysed system can be seen in Fig. 37.2, with properties as defined
in Table 37.1. Further information about the tendon geometry and prestressing can be found in Bench-
mark 17. The beam consists of a rectangular cs and is prestressed and loaded with its own weight. A
calculation of the creep and shrinkage is performed with respect to CEB-FIP Model Code 1990 [24].

Material Properties Geometric Properties Time
C 35/ 45 h = 100.0 cm t0 = 28 dys
Y 1770 b = 100.0 cm ts = 0 dys
RH = 80 % L = 20.0 m t = 36500 dys
Ap = 28.5 cm2
Table 37.2: Results
εcs −25.1 · 10−5 25.1 · 10−5 25.146 · 10−5
ϕ0 1.57 - 1.566
ϕ(t, t0 ) 1.48 1.476 1.47
Note: The results from SOFiSTiK are rounded for output.

37.4 Design Process

Design with respect to CEB-FIP Model Code 1990 [24]
Material:
Concrete: C 35/ 45 2.1 Concrete classification and constitu-

tive relations
Ecm = 35000 N/ mm2 2.1.4.2: Modulus of elasticity for
C 35/ 45
ƒck = 35 N/ mm2
ƒcm = 43 N/ mm2 2.1.3.2: Mean value of compressive

strength ƒcm . See the eq. (2.1-1)
Ep = 195000 N/ mm2 Ep for wires
ƒpk = 1770 N/ mm2 ƒpk Characteristic tensile strength of

prestressing steel
CALCULATION OF TOTAL SHRINKAGE AND SWELLING at  =
10.0 m midspan:
t0 = 28 days t0 age at first loading

ts concrete age at the beginning of
ts = 0 days shrinkage or swelling
ered
t = 36500 days
The total shrinkage or swelling strans εcs (t, ts ) may be calculated from
εcs (t, ts ) = εcs0 · βs (t − ts ) 2.1.6.4.4: Eq. 2.1-74; εcs (t, ts ) is the
total or swelling strain
Calculating the notional shrinkage:
The notional shrinkage coefficient may be obtained from
εcs0 = εs (ƒcm ) · βRH 2.1.6.4.4: Eq. 2.1-75; εcs0 is the no-

tional shrinkage coefficient
with:
ƒcm

εs (ƒcm ) = 160 + 10 · βsc · 9 − · 10−6 2.1.6.4.4: Eq.2.1-76; βsc is a coefficient
ƒcm0 which depends on the type of cement,
for N class of cement βsc = 5; ƒcm0 =
43

10 MP
εs (ƒcm ) = 160 + 10 · 5 · 9 − · 10−6
10
εs (ƒcm ) = 39.5 · 10−5
βRH = −1.55 · βsRH for 40 % ≤ RH < 99 % 2.1.6.4.4: Eq.2.1-77
3 3
RH 80

βsRH = 1 − =1− = 0.488 2.1.6.4.4: Eq.2.1-78; RH0 = 100 %
RH0 100
βRH = −1.55 · 0.488 = −0.7564
εcso = 39.5 · 10−5 · (−0.7564) = −29.8778

The development of shrinkage with time is given by:

0.5
(t − ts )/ t1

2.1.6.4.4: Eq.2.1-79; βs (t − ts ) is the βs (t − ts ) =
development of shrinkage with time; 350 · (h/ h0 )2 + (t − ts )/ t1
h0 = 100 mm; t1 = 1 dy
SOFiSTiK accounts not only for the age at start of drying ts but also
for the influence of the age of prestressing, so the time development
function reads:
βs = βs (t − ts ) − βs (t0 − ts )
0.5 0.5
36500 28

βs = −
350 · 52 + 36500 350 · 52 + 28
βs = 0.8981 − 0.05647 = 0.8416
The total shrinkage or swelling strain is calculated:

εcs (t, ts ) = εcs0 · βs
εcs (t, ts ) = −29.8778 · 10−5 · 0.8416 = 25.146 · 10−5
CALCULATION OF TOTAL CREEP at x=10.0 m midspan:
The creep coefficient may be calculated from:

2.1.6.4.3(b): Eq. 2.1-64; ϕ(t, t0 ) is the ϕ(t, t0 ) = ϕ0 · βc (t − t0 )
creep coefficient
The notional creep coefficient may be estimated from:
2.1.6.4.3(b): Eq. 2.1-65; ϕ0 is the no- ϕ0 = ϕRH · β(ƒcm ) · β(t0 )
tional creep coefficient
with:
1 − (RH/ RH0 )
2.1.6.4.3(b): Eq.2.1-66; h is the notional ϕRH = 1 +
2 · Ac 0.46 · (h/ h0 )1/ 3)
size of member in [mm], h =

1 − (80/ 100) 0.2
2.1.6.4.3(b): Eq. 2.1-66 ϕRH = 1 + =1+ = 1.254
0.46 · (500/ 100)1/ 3) 0.78658
5.3 5.3
2.1.6.4.3(b): Eq. 2.1-67 β(ƒcm ) = = = 2.556
(ƒcm / ƒcm0 )0.5 (43/ 10)0.5
The adjusted time t0 is given by:
Xn
4000

2.1.8.2: Eq. 2.1-87; t0,T is the adjusted t0,T = Δt · ep 13.65 −
age of concrete at loading (days) =1
273 + T(Δt )/ T0
n
X
4000

t0,T = 28 · ep 13.65 − = 27.947 days
=1
273 + 20/ 1
 α
9
2.1.6.4.3(c): Eq.2.1-71; the effect of t0,dj = t0,T ·  1.2
+ 1 ≥ 0.5 dys
type of cement on the creep coefficient 2 + (t0,T / t1,T )
of concrete may be taken into account
by using the modified age at loading 0
9

t0,dj ; α = 0 for cement class N
t0,dj = 27.947 · +1 = 27.947 ≥ 0.5 dys
2 + 27.9471.2
1 1
2.1.6.4.3(b): Eq. 2.1-68 β(t0 ) = = = 0.48862
0.1 + (t0 / t1 )0.2 0.1 + (27.947/ 1)0.2

The development of creep with time is given by:

0.3
(t − t0 )/ t1

βc (t − t0 ) = 2.1.6.4.3(b): Eq. 2.1-70
βh + (t − t0 )/ t1
with: ¨ 18 «
RH h

βH = 150 · 1 + 1.2 · · + 250 ≤ 1500 2.1.6.4.3(b): Eq. 2.1-71; t1 = 1 dy;
RH0 h0 RH0 = 100 %; h0 = 100 mm
¨ 18 «
80 500

βH = 150 · 1 + 1.2 · · + 250 ≤ 1500
100 100
βH = 1359.702 ≤ 1500
0.3
(36500 − 28)/ 1

βc (t − t0 ) = = 0.989
1359.702 + (36500 − 28)/ 1
ϕ0 = 1.254 · 2.556 · 0.48862 = 1.566
The creep coefficient:

ϕ(t, t0 ) = 1.56613 · 0.989 = 1.5489
The creep value is related to the tangent Youngs modulus, where the
tangent modulus being defined as 1.05 · Ecm . To account for this,
SOFiSTiK adopts this scaling for the computed creep coefficient (in
SOFiSTiK, all computations are consistently based on the secant mod-
ulus of elasticity).
1.5489
ϕ(t, t0 ) = = 1.47
1.05

37.5 Conclusion
This example shows the calculation of the creep and shrinkage using Model Code 1990 [24]. It has been
shown that the results are in very good agreement with the reference solution.
37.6 Literature
[24] CEB-FIP Model Code 1990. Model Code for for Concrete Structures 1990. Euro-International
Concrete Committee. 1991.

DCE-SIA1: Punching of flat slabs
38 DCE-SIA1: Punching of flat slabs
Overview
Design Code Family(s): SIA

Design Code(s): SIA 262
Module(s): BEMESS
Input file(s): slab punching sia262 2013.dat

The problem consists of a flat slab. The structure under consideration is a five-storey residential building
with the geometry and main dimensions given in Fig. 38.1. The design of slab against punching at the
columns is discussed in the following.
For the concrete, strength class C30/37 (ƒck = 30 MP, γc = 1.5) is assumed, for the reinforcing steel,
grade B500B (ƒyk = 500 MP, Es = 205 GP, γs = 1.15, ductility class B). The factored design load
accounting for self-weight, dead load and imposed load is qd = 15.6kN/ m2 .
(a) SOFiSTiK Model
Figure 38.1: View of building
The width of the slab is h = 26 cm as shown in Fig. 38.2.

0,39
26
2,38
280
column
0,37
26 slab
Figure 38.2: Section through flat slab and supporting columns
3
600 3
600
0,1326
C1 C4
0,13
2,42
2,16
Opening
0,13
2,67
2,8
560
534
483
26 0,13
5,73
C2 C5 0,9
180
1146
2,67
0,13
2,8
2,42
2,16
560
534
483
26 0,13
0,13
C3 C6
26 0,13
2574
,87 0,13 2,87
574 0,8
160 0,77
154
7,57
1513
Figure 38.3: Main dimensions in [cm],  = 6.00 m, y = 5.60 m
C30/ 37 h = 26 cm qd = 15.6kN/ m2
B500B d1 = 4.0 cm

d = 21.0 cm

This example is concerned with the punching of flat slabs. The content of this problem is covered by the
following parts of SIA 262:2013 [25]:
• Construction materials (Section 2.2 )
• Dimensoning values (Section 4.2)
• Shear force (Section 4.3.3)
• Punching (Section 4.3.6)

The goal of the preliminary design is to check if the dimensions of the structure are reasonable with
respect to the punching shear strength and if punching shear reinforcement is needed.
In the reference example the reaction forces are estimated by using contributive areas. The results are
given in Table 38.2.
Table 38.2: Results
Result SOF. Ref.

Inner column C5 (Node 1070)
 1.681 m 1.681 m
ke 0.9 0.9
red 1.5129 m 1.5129 m
ψ 1.31 % 1.325 %
ψy 1.41 % 1.424 %
kr 1.03 1.02786
VRd,c 349.2 kN 347.36 kN
VRdc,m 698.4 kN 694.69 kN
As 8.79 cm2 8.766 cm2


STEP 1: Material
SIA 262:2013; 4.2.1 Concrete 30/37
Characteristic value of cylinder com- ƒck = 30 N/ mm2

pressive strength
1/ 3 1/ 3
30 30

Conversion factor ηƒ c ; 4.2.1.2; Eq. (26) ηƒ c = = = 1.00 ≤ 1.00
ƒck 30
ηƒ c · ηt · ƒck 1 · 1 · 30
The dimensioning value of the concrete ƒcd = = = 20 N/ mm2
compressive strength; 2.3.2.3; Eq. (2) γc 1.5
p
(ƒck )
p
0.3 · ηt · 0.3 · 1.0 · 30
The dimensioning value of shear stress τcd = = = 1.095 N/ mm2
limit; 2.3.2.4; Eq.(3) γc 1.5
Dm = 32mm
STEP 2: Reinforcement
SIA 262:2013; 4.2.2 Steel B500B (flexural and transverse reinforcement)
ƒyd = 435 MP
Es = 205000 MP
Ductility class: B
For ϕ10 @200 mm/ ϕ16 @200 mm STEP 3: Cross-section
d = h − d1
1.6

= 26 − 4.8 +
2
= 20.4 cm
4.3.6.2; Fig. 21 and Fig. 22 STEP 4: Calculating the control perimeter
Inner:
 = 2 ·  + 2 · b + d · π
= 2 · 26 + 2 · 26 + 20.4 · 3.14
= 168.1 cm
In BEMESS the shear force Vd is equal to column reaction force minus

the applied load within the control perimeter gd · Ac . The value qd is
not taken into account.
Vd = 686.1 kN
1 The sections mentioned in the margins refer to SIA 262:2013 [25] unless otherwise
specified.

Bemess takes into account the min. value of ke . For inner columns ke = 0.9, SIA
262:2013, 4.3.6.2.5
 
1
ke = mn 0.9; 1 + (38.1)
 
e 
1+
b
Md 5.46 kNm

e =
− Δe =
= 7.95 mm
Vd 686.1 kN
In case of inner columns, the centroid of the column corresponds to the

centroid of the control perimeter. Therefore, Δe = 0
2
d
d
Ac = b2c + 4 · bc · + ·π
2 4
0.204 0.2042
= 0.262 + 4 · 0.26 · + ·π
2 4
= 0.2063 m2
v v
t4 t4
u u
b = · Ac = · 0.2063 = 0.5129 m = 512.9 mm
π π
According to Eq. 38.1:

 
1
ke = mn 0.9,
 
e 
1+
 b 
1
= mn 0.9,
 
e 
1+
 b 
 1 
= mn 
0.9,

7.95 
1+
512.9
= mn (0.9, 0.98)
= 0.9
Where e is the eccentricity of the resultant of shear forces with respect

to the centroid of the basic control perimeter and b is the diameter of
a circle with the same surface as the region inside the basic control
perimeter.
Reduced control perimeter is calculated:

red = ke ·  = 0.9 · 168.1 = 151.29 cm
STEP 5: Rotations
The distances rs, and rs,y are calculated from the results of the flexural
analysis, one can obtain the distances between the center of the column

and the point, at which the bending moments are zero.
rs = 1.166 m
rsy = 1.248 m
The average moment of the strip is calculated by the integration of the

moments at the strip section. Since the flexural moments md, and
md,y are negative, the absolute value of the twisting moment md,
needs to be subtracted so that the absolute value of msd, and msd,y
will be maximized:
msd, = md, − |md,y |
msd,y = md,y − |md,y |
By using FEM analysis:
msd, = 105.53 kNm/ m
msd,y = 105.81 kNm/ m
The representative width bs ; 4.3.6.4.6; The representative width is calculated:

Eq. (60)
bs = 1.5 ·
p
rs · rsy ≤ mn
p
= 1.5 · 1.248 · 1.166
= 1.8094 m
BEMESS calculates the ψ value by using LoA (Level of Approximation)

III. LoA I is used only at beginning of the calculation for iteration, when:
msd
= 1.
mRd
Rotation ψ; 4.3.6.4.1 and 4.3.6.4.2; Eq. For Level of Approximation III:
(59)
3/ 2
rs ƒsd msd

ψ = 1.2 · · ·
d Es mRd
3/ 2
1.166 434.78 105.53

= 1.2 · · ·
0.204 205000 112.306
= 1.325 %
3/ 2
rsy ƒsd msdy

ψy = 1.2 · · ·
d Es mRd
3/ 2
1.248 434.78 105.85

= 1.2 · · ·
0.204 205000 112.306
= 1.424 %
The governing value is ψ = m(ψ , ψy ) = 1.424 %
kr ; 4.3.6.3.2; Eq. (58) The coefficient kr :

1
kr =
0.45 + 0.18 · ψ · d · kg
1
=
0.45 + 0.18 · ψ · d · kg
1
=
0.45 + 0.18 · 0.01424 · 204 · 1
= 1.02786
In BEMESS there isn’t any option to set the Dm value and the Dm
is strictly defined:
• For normal concrete Dm = 32 mm → kg = 1.0
• For high-strength and lightweight concrete, the Dm = 0 → kg =

3.
STEP 6: Punching strength with and without shear reinforcement
According to SIA 262:2013 the punching strength without shear rein-

forcement is calculated: 4.3.6.3.1; Eq. (57)
VRd,c = kr · τcd · d · 
= 1.02786 · 1.095 · 0.204 · 1.5129
= 0.34736 MN = 347.36 KN
Vd > VRd,c → shear/punching reinforcement is necessary
Calculating the maximum punching strength VRd,m 4.3.6.5.7; Eq. (69)
VRd,m = 2 · kr · τcd · d · red ≤ 3.5 · τcd · d · red

= 2 · 1.0278 · 1.095 · 0.204 · 1.5129 ≤ 3.5 · 1.095 · 0.204 · 1.5129
= 0.69469 MN ≤ 1.182 MN
= 694.69 kN
Punching strength with shear reinforcement: 4.3.6.5; Eq. (65) and Eq. (66)
Vd,s = m(Vd − VRd,c ; 0.5 · Vd )
Vd − VRd,c = 686.1 − 347.36 = 338.74 kN
Vd · 0.5 = 686.1 · 0.5 = 343.05 kN
Vd,s = m(338.74; 343.05) = 343.05 kN

Calculating the reinforcement:
Vd,s
snβ · As =
ke · σsd
343.05
=
0.9 · 43.478
= 8.766 cm2
4.3.6.5.4; Eq. (68) where σsd is calculated according:
Es · ψ ƒbd d

σsd = · 1+ · ≤ ƒsd
6 ƒsd ϕs
205000 · 0.01424 2.703 204

= · 1+ · ≤ 434.78
6 434.78 16
= 487.00 · (1 + 0.006216 · 12.75) ≤ 434.78
= 525.60 ≤ 434.78
= 434.78 N/ mm2
Please note that in BEMESS, snβ = 1.0.
STEP 7: Failure outside the shear reinforcement
To avoid failure outside the shear reinforcement area, BEMESS iterates

the perimeter until the shear strength VRdc ≥ Vd .
In this example, the calculating value of the effective depth d is equal

to the effective depth d minus the distance from concrete cover c on the
bottom surface of the slab: d,ot = d − c = 204 − 40 = 164 mm
VRd,c,ot = 2 · kr · τcd · d,ot · ot = Vd
0.6861
ot = = 3.7170 m
1.02786 · 1.095 · 0.164
ot − 4 · bc 3.717 − 4 · 0.26
rot = = = 0.426 m
2·π 2·π

38.5 Conclusion
This example shows the calculation of punching of flat slabs and it has been shown that the results are
reproduced with excellent accuracy.
38.6 Literature
[25] SIA 262:2013 Concrete Structures. Swiss Society of Engineers and Architects. 2013.
[26] S. Lips, A. Muttoni, and M.F. Ruiz. “Punching of flat slabs: Design Example”. In: fib Model Code
2010 (2011).
[27] A. Muttoni et al. Background to fib Model Code 2010 shear provisions - part II: punching shear.
Tech. rep. fib, 2013.

So Fistik

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

So Fistik

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

So Fistik

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VERiFiCATiON MANUAL

Design Code Benchmarks

VERiFiCATiON MANUAL, Version 2018-4

Copyright © 2018 by SOFiSTiK AG, Oberschleissheim, Germany.

HQ Oberschleissheim Office Nuremberg

T +49 (0)89 315878-0 T +49 (0)911 39901-0

I SOFiSTiK Software Quality Assurance (SQA) 9

II Design Code Benchmarks 17

5 DCE-EN2: Design of a Rectangular CS for Bending 23

SOFiSTiK 2018 | VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks i

5.4 Design Process ............................................................................ 25

6 DCE-EN3: Design of a T-section for Bending 29

7 DCE-EN4: Design of a Rectangular CS for Bending and Axial Force 35

8 DCE-EN5: Design of a Rectangular CS for Double Bending and Axial Force 39

9 DCE-EN6: Design of a Rectangular CS for Shear Force 45

10 DCE-EN7: Design of a T-section for Shear 49

11 DCE-EN8: Design of a Rectangular CS for Shear and Axial Force 57

12 DCE-EN9: Design of a Rectangular CS for Shear and Torsion 63

ii VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks | SOFiSTiK 2018

12.3 Model and Results ........................................................................ 64

13 DCE-EN10: Shear between web and flanges of T-sections 71

14 DCE-EN11: Shear at the interface between concrete cast 79

15 DCE-EN12: Crack width calculation of reinforced beam acc. DIN EN 1992-1-1 87

16 DCE-EN13: Design of a Steel I-section for Bending and Shear 97

17 DCE-EN14: Classification of Steel Cross-sections 105

18 DCE-EN15: Buckling Resistance of Steel Members 111

19 DCE-EN17: Stress Calculation at a Rectangular Prestressed Concrete CS 115

SOFiSTiK 2018 | VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks iii

19.2 Reference Solution ........................................................................ 115

20 DCE-EN18: Creep and Shrinkage Calculation of a Rectangular Prestressed Con-

21 DCE-EN19: Fatigue of a Rectangular Reinforced Concrete CS 131

23 DCE-EN21: Real Creep and Shrinkage Calculation of a T-Beam Prestressed CS 149

24 DCE-EN22: Stress Relaxation of Prestressing Steel - EN 1992-1-1 165

25 DCE-EN23: Stress Relaxation of Prestressing Steel - DIN EN 1992-1-1 173

iv VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks | SOFiSTiK 2018

26 DCE-EN24: Lateral Torsional Buckling 181

30 DCE-EN29: Design of restrained steel column 223

31 DCE-EN30: Steel column with a class 4 cross-section 231

32 DCE-EN31: Punching of flat slab acc. DIN EN 1992-1-1 245

SOFiSTiK 2018 | VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks v

32.4.2 Actions and Loads ...................................................................... 248

34 DCE-EN33: Designing a Reinforced Concrete Column acc. DIN EN 1992-1-1 273

35 DCE-EN34: Elastic Critical Plate Buckling Stress 285

vi VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks | SOFiSTiK 2018

38 DCE-SIA1: Punching of flat slabs 311

SOFiSTiK 2018 | VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks vii

viii VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks | SOFiSTiK 2018

SOFiSTiK 2018 | VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks 1

1 About this Manual

1.1 Layout and Organization of a Benchmark

• Model and Results

1.2 Finding the Benchmark of interest

Element Type(s): C2D

SOFiSTiK 2018 | VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks 3

Table 1.1: Categories Overview

Analysis Type Dynamic

Eigenvalue/ Modal analysis

4 VERiFiCATiON MANUAL - Design Code Benchmarks | SOFiSTiK 2018

Table 1.1: (continued)

er relative error of the approximate number